PPE Notes

PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE AND ETHICS
[UNIT I - INTRODUCTION TO ARCHITECTURAL

PROFESSION CODE OF CONDUCT AND ETHICS]
FACULTY IN-CHARGE: Dr Shiva Jaganath & Ar Murali J
REVA UNIVERSITY , SCHOOL OF
ARCHITECTURE
TOPICS:
 IMPORTANCE OF ARCHITECTURAL PROFESSION ------------------------ 03
 ROLE OF ARCHITECTS IN SOCIETY -------------------------------------------- 03
 REGISTRATION OF ARCHITECTS ----------------------------------------------- 04
 ARCHITECT’S OFFICE AND ITS MANAGEMENT- LOCATION,
ORGANISATIONAL STRUCTURE ------------------------------------------------ 08
 INFRASTRUCTURE REQUIREMENTS, SKILLS REQUIRED,
ELEMENTARY ACCOUNTS -------------------------------------------------------- 08
 TAX LIABILITIES --------------------------------------------------------------------- 20
 ROLE OF INDIAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS ---------------------------- 22
 ARCHITECTS ACT 1972 (INTENT, OBJECTIVE, PROVISIONS WITH
REGARD TO ARCHITECTURAL PRACTICE) ---------------------------------- 23
 COUNCIL OF ARCHITECTURE (ROLE AND FUNCTIONS) ---------------- 39
 IMPORTANCE OF ETHICS IN PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE ---------------- 40
 CODE OF CONDUCT FOR ARCHITECTS, PUNITIVE ACTION FOR
PROFESSIONAL MISCONDUCT OF AN ARCHITECT -----------------------40
SOURCE:http s://creativemin d snitc.files.word p ress.com/201 2/04/role - o f-

a r c h i t e c t s - i n -s o ci e ty. p d f,P R O FE S S IO N A L P R AC T IC E ,
K.G.KR ISHNAMUR THY & S.V.RAVINDRA, https://www.coa.gov.in Page 1
ARCHITECTURE
INTRODUCTION
 An architect is a person who professes skill in the art of designing buildings to meet
his client’s needs.
 An architect is the one who possess with due regard to aesthetic as well as
practical considerations, adequate skill and knowledge to enable him, to originate,
design and plan to arrange for and to supervise construction of buildings.
 But an architect’s function is not limited to creation of new ideas of amenities and
design.
 An architect’s duties include preparation of contract documents, acceptance of
estimates, selection of specialist contractors, inspection of works, solution to the
problems encountered during the execution of work, rejecting defective work,
issues of certificates under the contract and resolution of disputes between the
owner and the contractor. Thus, his duties extend far into other fields of technical
knowledge and business management.
 An architect is primarily answerable to the owner in matters of design, modern
techniques of construction and specialised building products and processes.
 An architect may not be personally qualified to discharge all the responsibilities.
He/she seeks the help of outside consultants, specialist sub-contractors and vendors.
 In general an architect is the general agent for all purposes, relating to designing,
obtaining tenders and superintending the work.
 An architect stands apart in the family of professionals. He is recognised for his noble
aesthetic creation which brings joy to the present as well as future generations.
FIGURE 1.1 - WHO IS AN ARCHITECT?

REVA UNIVERSITY, SCHOOL OF
ARCHITECTURE
IMPORTANCE OF A PROFESSION
 Profession is the mastery of specific activities demanding prolonged period of study

and practice in any discipline before they can be completely applied.
 A professional Architect, engineer or doctor has nothing to sell except his
disinterested personal service. Central theme of any profession is to provide an
unselfish service to the mankind.
 To profess means to take a vow of service and to live one’s career by a higher
standard than is expected of others.
IMPORTANCE OF ARCHITECTURAL PROFESSION
 A professional architect is required to satisfy the below mentioned characteristics:

a) Corpus of knowledge
b) Prolonged period of study and practice
c) Membership of a professional association
d) Code of conduct
e) Social responsibilities
 An architect in particular has abundant social responsibilities. His obligation to the
society in which he/she operates is termed as social responsibilities.
 Some of the responsibilities of architects are:
a) Preservation of environment
b) Elimination of poverty
c) Best value for clients money
d) Judicious use of depleting natural resources
e) Conformance to building byelaws and regulations etc…
ROLE OF ARCHITECT IN SOCIETY
 Apart from early days, at present society requires skilled architects who are educated
and trained to be in architectural profession. The increase in meeting the complexities
of society’s desires is the sole reasons for change in the added requirement to call
some as architects.
 Due to increase in population, role of architect and complexity in his/her duties have
increased which resulted in transforming architecture as a profession and technically
one has to do some course work to call themselves as an architect and the same holds
good for practicing in present days.
 The bottom line of an architect’s role in society is to respond with the surrounds
environment in a positive manner while rendering their or client’s needs.
 Present day trend: one who designs is different from the one who builds and the one
who is going to use the building.
 It has become a different job for an architect to satisfy the needs of everyone along
with keeping the place/space intact with the environment.
 Even after finishing a project successfully by satisfying all the needs, they are not
certain that the space will cater to the expected function for a minimum of 30 years.

ARCHITECTURE
 An architect needs to have proper idea of what could be the potential of the space in
the near feature, and educate client about it.
 If required to modify the function of the space they are working or selecting another
site for the function client is looking for he/she should be educated about it. For doing
this an architect should be aware of trends and need of the society.
 These days many of the civilians are not having knowledge on why we need to value
the natural environment and its special configurations. It is the duty of the architect to
educate the society/people about it, through some public lectures of writings etc. This
will make an architect’s job easier when the client approaches for getting any of their
work to be done.
 Another important role of an architect is that it’s their duty to train architects for
future. They should educate and guide the young and upcoming architects about their
role in society as an architect, and also should take part in teaching architecture
students who are going to become the future generation architects.
REGISTRATION OF ARCHITECTS
The Council of Architecture maintains a register of Architects under section 23 of The

Architects Act 1972. The register shall include the following particulars:
i. The full name with date of birth, nationality and residential address of the Architect.
ii. His/her qualification for registration and the date on which he/she obtained that
qualification and the authority which conferred.
iii. The date of the first admission to the register.
iv. His professional address.
v. Such further particulars as may be prescribed by rules.
ARCHITECTURAL PRACTICE/ ARCHITECS OFFICE
An architect starting his/her own proprietorship firm, or buying out a practice from others, or
inheriting it or joining some firm and rising through ranks to become a partner or joining
other Architects or other professional to open a practice, has to organise the office to produce
optimum work and deliver efficient service.
He/she may also join government service, or public sector or Semi-government Corporation
in different capacities, like assistants, deputy or Chief Architect or even an NGO, wherein
he/she will be called upon to organize an office to suit the nature of work of the organisation.
An Architect’s practice can be roughly classified as small practice, slightly older practice,
medium practice and big practice.
A variation from the above mentioned classification is “Consultant” concept.

ARCHITECTURE
SMALL PRACTICE
ARCHITECT
AFTER GETTING WORK / - PREPARE SKETCHES

PROJECT - ARCHITECT - FINAL SCHEME
- PREPARE WORKING DRAWINGS,
ESTIMATE
- CALL TENDERS
- SELECT A CONTRACTOR
- OBTAIN MUNICIPAL SANCTION
- SUPERVISE CONSTRUCTION
- OVERSEE ITS COMPLETION IN ALL
RESPECTS APART FROM MAINTAINING
ACCOUNTS AND OFFICE
FIGURE 1.2 - SMALL OFFICE
SLIGHTLY OLDER PRACTICE
ENGINEER:
ESTIMATION & SITE SUPERVISION
DRAUGHTSMAN:
ARCHITECT; DEVELOPS DETAIL DRAWINGS
SKETCHES
(PLANNING) TYPIST-CUM RECEPTIONIST
OFFICE BOY:
PRINTING, STORING DRAWINGS &
VISITING OTHER OFFICES TO REMIT
OR OBTAIN RELATED DOCUMENTS
FIGURE 1.3 – SLIGHTLY OLDER OFFICE

ARCHITECTURE
MEDIUM PRACTICE
JUNIOR ARCHITECT:
DRAWING / DETAILING WORKS
DRAUGHTSMAN:
PRINCIPAL +
SENIOR DEVELOPS DETAIL DRAWINGS
ARCHITECT:
TYPIST-CUM RECEPTIONIST
FINAL DESIGN
OFFICE BOY:
PRINTING, STORING DRAWINGS &
VISITING OTHER OFFICES TO REMIT
OR OBTAIN RELATED DOCUMENTS
FIGURE 1.4 – MEDIUM PRACTICE
BIG PRACTICE
ARCHITECTS: 10-15 NUMBERS

+ 3- 4 DESIGNERS PR TEAM
PRINCIPAL /
PARTNER:
CONCEPT + SENIOR ARCHITECT (TEAM LEADER):
APPROACH TO (COMPLETE RESPONSIBILTY – PROJECTS)
THE DESIGN + DISCUSSIONS: CLIENT,CONTRACTORS &
CLIENT CONSULTANTS
DISCUSSION
FIGURE 1.5 - BIG PRACTICE
This kind of office may be usually doing two or three types of building only viz. Residences,
apartments, offices.

ARCHITECTURE
These offices will be carrying out architectural and interior designs together.
OFFICE MANAGEMENT
Office is a place where records are prepared, handled and preserved for future reference. It is
an administrative centre of business where relevant records are prepared, preserved and made
available for the purpose of efficient management of the organisation. Administrative
function relates to communication, safety, security, co-ordination, planning, cost reduction
and public relations, apart from achieving project goal. It is necessary for the office to:
a. Improve upon existing information system

b. Reduce amount of paper work. Use of computer in all possible areas
c. Encourage creative thinking and employee participation
d. Improve and maintain public relations
e. Attract, acquire and retain talent
f. Endeavour for cost-efficient office service
g. Decentralise as many function possible
h. Achieve greater productivity through incentives and incorporating employee’s ideas
in all areas of productivity, e.g. cost, meeting deadlines, etc.
MANAGEMENT AND ARCHITECTS
Management is defined as the art of getting result through other people. In case of
professional architects there is an additional responsibility. Besides, responsibility for the
performance of other team members, architects should also be an individual professional
contributor. The architect should ensure coordination of activities of key players, viz. other
consultants, contractors, client, regulatory authorities, sub-contractors and vendors. It is the
duty of the architect to organise his team to meet the requirements.
He/she has to analyse the strengths, weakness, opportunities the project offers and threats/
problems which can affect the execution of the project. Later, the suggested course of action
shall co-ordinate factors of cost, labour, time and technology and site execution to achieve the
target. Alternative strategies are required to be prepared, so that in case Plan A fails, Plan B
and C are ready. Strategies have to be reoriented in case of drastic changes in the project due
to reasons beyond architect’s control like natural and man-made disasters.
BUSINESS DEVELOPMENT
A client expects that the architect possesses required skill and expertise to render consultancy
for the work entrusted. He/she would like to get the best value for the fees paid to the
architect. Securing clients may not be easy for an architect who has just registered his/her
name with the council. Initially social contacts, relatives and friends may help in getting
clients for small building works. Participation in architectural competitions, seminars,
technical discussions, contribution to architectural journals will help him to get recognised.
Merit, optimal designs and innovation will open up many opportunities for business
development. Primary objective is client’s satisfaction. Business development follows if this
primary objective is met.

ARCHITECTURE
ELEMENTARY ACCOUNTS
 Cash book
 Ledger
 Profit and loss account
 Assets & liabilities and balance sheet are all to be maintained as per standard
accounting practice.
 Field records are to be maintained at site of work.
LOCATION, ORGANISATIONAL STRUCTURE, INFRASTRUCTURE

REQUIREMENTS & SKILLS REQUIRED:
Types of Architectural Organization
 Single Proprietorship Firm

 Partnership Firm
 Limited company
 Large scale consulting company
 Very large offices
 Freelancing
 Architect as a Builder/ Developer
Single Proprietorship Firm
 The easiest and simplest mode of architectural consultancy firm.

 Architect as the principal will be solely responsible for all decisions, i.e. like brining
in projects or to ensure preparation, progress and completion of the project, getting all
types of licenses and issuing of certificates.
 They can appoint assistants but should give directions in all decisions.
 Can enjoy freedom in design and management (profits, fame if work is good).
 They can also take fast decisions, rectify mistakes, and execute them.
 They should also bare all losses, less freedom if the project is too big (decision
makers may be many) and blame for making mistakes occurring in project.
 Liable to be sued for lack of discharging duties and supervision.
 Indecision (the inability to make a decision quickly) may also delay projects or when
they are sick the work may suffer.
 Single proprietorship suitable only for small and medium size projects; as the
architect/ designer can provide complete attention to the project, personally to ensure
proper execution,
 When they carry out large project, it will be too difficult to handle single handily, so
he need to form a team and the success completely depends on the team work.
 A variation of this type is appointing an associate (senior employee).
 Associates are also employees, with greater responsibilities.
 They can bring in projects to the office.

ARCHITECTURE
 They have the rights for decision – making but their views are not and need not be
binding on the principal or proprietor.
 They also can have a share in the profits of the firm.
 They will also have more freedom to take individual decisions in the projects they
handle unlike an ordinary employee and also principal need not look into every
decision of the associate.
 The proprietor can always remove an associate from being an associate.
Partnership Firm
 Generally there will be two partners or more number of partners.

 An agreement is prepared between two or more partners to establish and run a firm
under a designated name, style and symbol.
 Agreements state the duties and responsibilities of partnership, sharing profits and
losses, liabilities and options along with procedure for one or more partners to leave
partnership.
 Its advantages include sharing responsibilities as no one individual will be liable for
everything, ability to organise large organisation of employees, ability to take up large
scale projects, and hence more profits, can take greater risks, and can operate from
multiple locations.
 Partnership firms can be offer more services under one roof.
 The partners can be from the same professional background or different background
enabling the firm to provide multiple services. Like partners can be architect,
structural engineer, mechanical engineer or electrical engineer or management
specialist.
 These firms will have access to more capital because of more members.
 Can operate from a residence also, but it is preferable to have an independent office in
the city.
 Slow in taking decision due to large number of people involved in decision-making.
Work can also get slow due to communication gap among workers and quality of
work can suffer due to difference in ideas.
 Problems may occur due to mismanagement both financially and in work.
 When partners are only architects, they might deal with individual projects; the
partnership is useful only to share space, infrastructure, tax benefits and ability to
create a better image to attract larger projects.
 Partners can also decide to dissolve partnership, if needed.
Limited company
 A bigger version of partnership type but with more defined structure and a large and
diversified project profile or range.
 The company will have a board of directors.
 Needed when the office grows from a medium scale to a large scale outfit.

ARCHITECTURE
 Can have many directors both technical and non-technical to take up wide range of
projects and services which are not possible by smaller firms.
 These companies can rise capital, offer multiple services, can have multiple offices,
can employ a wide range of people with diversified specialisations, and can have
access to latest technologies and management services through high investments.
 There can be subsidiaries under the main company offering specialist services with
directors being the same or different, with better facilities the firm can compete for
larger projects both in private and public sectors.
 Responsibilities are shared generally, but can be specific in different areas: can avail
tax benefits and concessions. The directors apart from services can avail bonuses and
perquisites and losses do not directly affect them as in other type of firms.
 The directors will be collectively responsible for any mistakes.
 A young architect can reach higher positions of responsibilities, and gets chances to
handle large scale projects.
 The company operates from independent premises to establish business identity.
 Individual responsibilities are less. Hence, blame can be passed on to others can
become bureaucratic, decision – making can be slow and low level of involvement
can be present in employees when incentives are absent.
 Quality can suffer, as many decision – making is involved, individual identity as
Architect/ designer will be absent. Which will affect creativity and individual’s
contribution may not receive enough recognition.
 An architect may lose identity, hence not suitable for individualistic minded
designers; experimentation becomes difficult as the company goals are more
important than that of an individual’s own. This type of organisation will be rigid.
Large scale consulting company
 A variation from the other companies discussed is the large scale consulting
corporations which take up turnkey projects providing all types of services needed for
a project.
 Raise capital from public apart from initial capital.
 Operate globally and are capable of taking up large scale projects due to their access
to the best available technology and human resources (specialists), e.g. townships,
high-rise and high-tech buildings, recreation complexes.
 They undertake projects not possible by smaller organisations. Survival depends on
their level of efficiency.
 Some companies are available in India also: as the concept of globalisation is
spreading.
 A young Architect designer can hope to get involved in some of the most challenging
works if they join such a corporation along with high salary, but as mentioned earlier,
this type of organisation suffers from the same set of deficiencies as in limited
company with its rigid structure, presenting a faceless organisation indifferent to an
individual’s personality and creativity.

ARCHITECTURE
 This corporation has to invest heavily in corporate campus buildings for distinct
corporate image requiring heavy capital investment.
Very large offices
 Have corporate status in organisation.

 Focus on separate specializations and offer services in these specialised areas, like
city planning, urban design, landscape, interior design, project management, structural
design, H.V.A.C.
 Consultancy, project feasibility reports, retail and merchandise service, accessories
design as an extension of interior design, graphic design, product design, exhibition
design, visual design, apart from regular architectural design. Due to the changing
demands of market/clients this is done in large cities.
 Separate units/departments are formed within the same firm for each of the
specializations or subsidiary firms can be formed to handle the parent firm’s jobs and
also to take up outside projects too. This method is also used to save income tax.
Some of the directors from the parent company will be on the board of its subsidiary
also.
 The reach of these companies can be transnational as their expertise can tackle
complex problems needing heavy capital investment and multiple skills to be
integrated both in linear/horizontal and vertical hierarchies. Further, they can have
multiple offices spread across the country and globe. This also involves hi-tech
transfer of data and communication (e.g. teleconferencing0 in day-to-day work.
 It can also result in convergence of the best talent and practices, concepts from
different part of the world; which will be beyond medium and big scale practices.
 These firms can encourage research and generate patents in design related fields, e.g.
structural glazing, detailing.
 Higher level of efficiency is possible due to access to high technology.
 These corporates can thrive only on large projects hence, not feasible in contexts
where there is little scope for very large projects.
 A creative person with individualistic approach may feel the loss of identity in such a
large setup. Further, large corporations tent to become rigid and less flexible due to
the nature of work; where targets need to be achieved in limited time. They tend to
become hierarchical, where the organisation is more important than an individual.
Freelancing
 Not a type of organisation, but very relevant and appealing to Architects/designers.

 Architect operates as a consultant to other Architects. They don’t have a single
office/boss/employer. They can work for several offices simultaneously from own
premises.
 Challenging and gives greater satisfaction in one’s work. They can work at their own
pace to meet deadlines. They get recognition and have large scope for freedom and
creativity.

ARCHITECTURE
 Highly suitable to individualistic and creative Architects who cannot and do not want
to work in official organisations.
 Problems and running an office and heavy investments are avoided.
 Risks are low and losses can be minimized.
 They employ assistants only when needed.
 Work is done on job basis. They can be choosy in selecting or accepting jobs.
 Risks involved include a high level of expertise needed in the field of work, good
rapport with other professionals to obtain projects, ability to maintain continuous
delivery of work of good quality, as it will be an individual or one man show. Other
factors like injury or ill health can affect one’s work or delivery schedules.
 One has to keep pace with latest trends in the field otherwise one’s expertise may lose
on edge.
 Freelancing can be, in general, service of design too, but is seen more in specialised
areas.
 Architect/Consultant can have greater expertise in a particular area, viz. hospital
design, hotel design or industrial design, etc. and provides specialized advice on a few
aspects of a project either to another Architect or consultant who is involved in the
overall design of the same project.
 A young architect cannot aspire to take to freelancing immediately after graduation as
it requires greater expertise and management skills which come with wider exposure
and experience, but can work towards becoming one as soon as possible. It is highly
desirable as a mode of practice.
 The architect gets due recognition and remuneration will be good apart from job
satisfaction.
Architect as a Builder/Developer
 Remains as a highly controversial and a hot-debated issue in architectural profession.

It is not strictly a mode of architectural practice, and is not classified so by the
profession.
 The professional bodies monitoring and representing the profession, like Council of
Architecture and Indian Institute of Architects do not recognise or allow or encourage
such a practice and prohibit it.
 The reason are obvious, i.e. the architect as builder can compromise on issues, like
construction quality, ethics and the client does not possess any measure to check the
architect.
 The architect acts as an advisor to the client and protects their interests as a neutral
person. This may change when they themselves become a builder and the profit
motive may become stronger affecting not only the quality of the building but also his
relationship with the client. Hence it is not permitted.
 Another viewpoint is that architects be allowed to take up building/construction also
as they can translate what they have designed more honestly into a three-dimensional

ARCHITECTURE
building than any contractor, whose skills are confined to building only. The work can
be faster and smoother in the absence of conflicts with the contractor.
 Needs greater capital, management skill, plant and machinery, high level of
involvement from architect/builder which may not be easy to provide by the
architect/builder. In such a case there will not be any mechanism or forum to solve
any problem that may arise between the client and architect builder.
 One can take up the building activity separately as a builder/developer under different
title as a registered company with attendant risks involved, but definitely not under
the title architect which is prohibited under present professional conduct guidelines.
LAYOUT OF ARCHITECT’S OFFICE
Location of an Architect’s office has bearing on the professional standing; hence, preferably a
central location with good access will help the practice. But in case of large and corporate
type consultancies location will not be a limitation.
Office layout
 The layout reflects the nature of office, whether a hierarchical on with clearly
designated areas or an informal open office type where hierarchy is less rigid and
personal relationships are free. It depends on the image the office tries to project as
well as the type of clients it deals with.
 The current trend is towards less hierarchical and more open type of offices, even in
large consulting firms, to promote greater work output.
 Generally, exclusive cabins/rooms are provided for the principal or partners for
greater privacy and to reflect their standing in the office.
 Senior designers may get open cabins depending on the length of service in the office
and nature of project handled by them individually. Others would be assigned specific
work area.
 In today’s offices where computerisation is normal, networking of computers makes it
possible for people to work from any table/computer rather than from a single table.
 Computers have made drawing boards and manual drafting less necessary, thereby,
saving space too.
 The distinction between work area and the principal’s offices can be distinct
depending on whether the office is formal or informal.
 The principal or principal’s office tend to reflect the personal taste compared to the
work area. A more relaxed, but business-like ambience is reflected in furniture and
other accessories.
 A few offices encourage employees to arrange their desks according to one’s taste to
promote a sense of belonging and identity to an employee.
 A separate meeting room or a discussion area is a must in offices where client
meetings or consultants meetings are held for project presentations aided by computer
generated audio-visual mode and three-dimensional models.

ARCHITECTURE
 These areas can be a separate/exclusive room with all accessories or as in most offices
a portion of the office can be converted for the purpose when needed in an informal
manner.
 Some offices encourage presentation of a project by the individual project team to
their own office co-workers for comments which can fine tune the design, for which
this space is used sometimes on a regular basis.
Library
 A library is an essential requirement in any office not only to keep in touch with the
latest in the field but also to encourage experimentation and a sense of inquiry in
office staff.
 Further, documentation of not only the office projects but also of other well-known or
interesting outside projects create a large database for reference to be used for
research, publication and to prepare project reports.
 The collection can be in the form of books, journals, reports, drawings and compact
discs, films, slides, recordings.
 Access to internet and video conference facilities will be of greater value.
 Proper indexing is needed for speedier access.
Material or samples collection
 Every architect’s or consultant’s office shall have as large a sample’s collection area
as possible for reference during design.
 Today, a range of products and choice within the same product type are being offered
by the building industry. Hence, it is necessary for the designer to have a wide
collection for greater creative expression.
 It is possible to get most materials related data on compact discs thereby saving
storage space.
 All the samples are to be catalogued and displayed or filed for easy access.
Administration section
 In small offices, one or two individuals may combine/perform several functions, viz.,
that of a receptionist, accountant, typist, etc.
 In medium and large offices separate administrative officer/office manager will be
present to coordinate the various functions of the office apart from accountants to
maintain financial transactions of varied nature.
 Further, a liaison official may be present to interact with various agencies on behalf of
the office.
 Very large offices would employ even a public relation officer to represent the office.
 Apart from these people, subordinate staff, like office boys, security, personnel,
personal secretaries, etc., will be present based on the size and need of an office.

ARCHITECTURE
Store
 In small offices it may include material collection blue print printing machine or
Xerox machine, storing area for drawings.
 In large and very large offices, this area may contain unused supplies and stocks of
various kinds, furniture and filling cabinets.
 Specific design can result in efficient use of available space. Spaces saving techniques
are needed in case of small offices or where the rent for office accommodation is very
high.
 An office, depending on the volume of work may possess a Xerox machine, blue
printing machine, CD writer, printer, etc.
 Otherwise, it can outsource these works to an outside agency on a regular basis.
Pantry
 An area which can combine preparation and serving of beverages, heating facility for
food, dining area for employees, drinking water fountain, coffee or tea dispensers and
such related activities.
 In case of large and very large firms, this can be a formal area specially designed as
an independent food court.
 In small offices, it becomes optional depending on space availability.
 Comfort station could be individually present or shared.
Reception area/entrance lobby
 It is important as it projects the image of the office to a visitor; his/her first encounter
with the office when one visits the office.
 It is desirable that the entrance is appealing with the office sign board, logo, address,
etc., neatly designed for clarity and access.
 Inside, the reception area can boost the image of office through photographs, models,
posters, etc., of the projects to give an idea of nature of work done in office.
 Good lighting, furniture, sculpture/paintings/murals, colour scheme, interior
landscaping, small water sources, cascades, fountains, aquarium, flooring/carpeting,
false ceiling all part of interior design can add value to the image of the office in
terms of style and operational efficiency.
Office administration: Project administration
 The principal/director in charge of administration selects the individual or team to

handle a project as soon the client approaches the office.
 In smaller firms, the architect themselves decides and takes the decisions.
 In medium and large offices a team, usually comprising a senior and junior member,
will be assigned the work, who in turn have direct access to the client and are in
charge of day-today progress involving coordination of design, programming,

ARCHITECTURE
execution drawings, structural and services aspects and site supervision apart from
interacting with contractors and suppliers.
 In very large offices, there will be separate departments to deal with different aspects,
viz., initially the work will go to architectural programming section where, the
problem/work will be thoroughly analysed as system and sub-systems, their
networking, problem areas, grouping/zoning, based on requirements as required by
the project.
 Functional, structural, site factors, technology, climate characteristics, etc., will be
included to optimize the sizes, locations and grouping of functions/activities.
 Later this goes to design section where, design concepts are derived and spatial
analysis leads to shapes and forms. Plans emerge, alternatives are prepared and
evaluated and final scheme is prepared.
 Further this moves to working drawing/execution drawings section where detailed
drawings, i.e. plans, sections, elevations, and details are provided in all clarity; ready
for execution with specifications and quantities as provided by the estimation
department.
 At this stage, structural design inputs, services consultant’s inputs are either prepared
within the office or obtained from outside. Tender preparation and selection of
contractor for execution occur at this stage.
 Later site architects coordinate between contractor’s work and office work so as to
ensure that the work progresses according to design.
 In case of very large project, viz., townships, factory layout, industrial complexes,
etc., the site architect’s presence at site on whole time basis is necessary for
coordinating different agencies/individuals.
 They are the one who checks on quality of work and certifies the quantum of work
completed based on which bills are passed for payment.
 The final certificate will be released only after the expiry of defect liability period.
 A concept not usually observed is the post occupancy evaluation of the
building/complex not adopted by small and medium offices at all.
 Even large offices and consulting companies hardly resort to this practice due to time
and effort involved. This practice is desirable as it identifies problem areas and
management of these can result in more efficient use.
Office administration: Work format
 Each firm follows its own mode of presentation and preparation of drawings,
guidelines regarding site inspection books and communication format used for
different purposes.
 Well-established offices would have standardised format, viz. standard size drawing
sheet with the firm’s name and address printed at the lower half of the sheet and
instructions on the right side of sheet.
 In case of working drawings all instructions details like scale, location of detail, level,
names of people who prepared and check the drawings, date, specific instructions by

ARCHITECTURE
the architect, changes made from previous drawings, job number are provided on the
right hand side of the sheet for easy reading.
 There can be standardized instructions, e.g. drawings should be read and not scaled or
in case of doubt refer back to the architect, etc., appear on every sheet while any
particular specification connected with a particular drawing or detail appear only in
the specific sheet.
 Latest instructions will always super cede the ones given earlier unless otherwise
specified.
 In case of job number, it can be year-wise, e.g. 001/spic/2004/Arch or
5601/spic/2004/interior signifying the total number of the job handled by the firm.
The client’s name and nature of work, i.e. architecture or interior can be included in
the job number.
 Some firms would have summarised concept sheet to explain the entire project in a
single sheet for clarity.
 The derivation of the concept is explained through a fixed format, i.e. site, function,
structure, technology, form and climate. Their impact on formulation of design
strategy is explained visually. This format is flexible and can be enlarged or abridged.
 Site manual in large offices will be formalised, with names of individuals in charge of
department and their contact numbers for easy coordination. These will be in regular
printed format.
 Information regarding different consultants, e.g. structural, plumbing, etc., connected
with the project will be filled in the standardised format.
 Separate work progress sheets will also be present to show the work schedule
prepared and amount of work completed.
 Well-organised offices also maintain the proceedings of client meetings and more
importantly review of work in relation to on-going projects in the office based on
suggestions and reactions of design related people to synergise and optimise decision-
making process of the office. Here there is greater employee participation in decision-
making.
 Storage and retrieval of drawings also vary from office to office. They are stored in
roll form with tags in vertical mode or in horizontal mode in regular drawing file
cabinet or can be vertically suspended from rollers to avoid folding and to conserve
space.
 Apart from these drawings can be folded and kept in individual file, but this is a crude
method of storing and drawings get damaged, and hence, to be avoided.
 Today however, all drawings can be on soft copy/CD to save space and easy retrieval;
further they can be faxed, stored for long time and copies can be made any time and in
large number.
 Changes can also be made easily. Digital technology ensures greater clarity, longer
life and has ability to make corrections and enormous storage capability. Most firms
are using computers on a large scale.

ARCHITECTURE
 Apart from project administration which is the major part of office administration, the
other components are: General overall administration, Finance and Human resource
management.
General administration
 General administration involves day-today-running of office, issues of general

communication memos within the office, and with outsiders like clients, official
agencies, suppliers as also non-official agencies.
 Duties include communicating official directions from the principal/director to the
employees and maintain records of the same as per standard office procedures.
 Other aspects include maintaining attendance register, casual leave records, earned
leave record, annual leave of absence of employee, medical leave, issuing of
certificates dealing with agencies like P.F. commissioner, labour department, income
tax department, etc.
 In small or one man managed, offices, these will be handled by the architect
themselves or by a single clerk cum typist.
 It is in bigger and large corporate offices that trained administrators, typists,
stenographers form administration pool.
 Filing of records relating to office correspondence can be on year-wise or on
continual number basis.
 Filing of project-related documents, like contract, drawings, etc., can be grouped year-
wise or continual number basis or project type basis. Use of colour code, symbols
makes identification easier.
 Further storing of the same can be in individual racks, either year-wise or project type
wise. Along with code like ARCH, INT, LAND, etc., can be provided if these projects
are also handled.
 Further fine tuning like P for plans, S for sections, E for elevations and D for details
can be resorted to within a single project. These are needed for easy storing and
retrieval both in hard copy more so, in soft copy in computer or CD.
Finance
 Finance essentially deals with income and expenditure apart from savings
 The architect’s office is essentially not a commercial organization with profit motive
but all efforts should be made to increase income and control expenditure thereby
earning a reasonable profit.
 Income is generated from consultancy services of various types the office offers,
royalties, sale of any patented items, reports, visual productions made by office, hiring
out extra space or space facilities, e.g. computer time, personnel, etc.
 Expenditure includes employee’s salaries and bonuses, office stationery and
consumables, postage/mailing, drawing prints, Xeroxing of documents, internet
facilities, printing of documents, telephone/mobile expenses, fax, official vehicles

ARCHITECTURE
owned by the office and their maintenance, services like water, electricity for general
lighting and a/c, coolers, etc., in addition to rent for the office accommodation.
 Others include income tax, professional tax, sales tax/commercial tax, licences from
consultants and petty cash.
 Within the office, provision is made for a pantry for light beverages and snacks to
employees including meals from outside.
 Additional expenditure includes gifts to employees and well-known clients, expenses
incurred for annual office parties or picnics entertaining clients.
 The accounts department with trained manpower has to handle these assignments
especially in large/corporate offices.
 While in small offices the architect’s assistant can manage most of these functions.
 However, whether it is a small or big office, the final annual accounts have to be
prepared by a chartered accountant for submitting to the income tax department.
 A firm or company can get various rebates for investments, purchase of books,
entertaining clients, purchase of vehicles, etc., under income-tax rules which can be
availed to reduce tax liability.
Human resource management
 The growth and well-being of a firm depends on how supportive its employees are in
achieving its objectives. Today, it is receiving due attention as part of administration.
 The idea is to hire the right type of employees, motivate them by providing the
required ambience to get the best out of them.
 Value is place on their skills to raise the quality and output of the office. The
employee is seen as a partner in progress rather than just an employee.
 Many well-established firms are adopting HRM practices which broadly include
competitive salary structure, incentives like commission on the project that is handled,
bonus for early completion of projects, greater freedom in decision-making and in
design.
 A percentage of fees is given if a project is brought to the office by an employee. All
these are in addition to salary, and increments, in salary, either yearly or half yearly.
 House rent and vehicle allowance are also given in many organisations.
 Provident fund gratuity, etc., as per prevailing law are given to employees.
 Other incentives include sponsoring for seminars, conferences, paid annual leave for
holidaying, medical check-up or hospitalisation charges, office parties and picnics to
generate greater bonding, and also sponsoring accommodation for employees from
office side.
 This department also conducts interviews for employees and trainees both at the entry
level and for promotions, encourages workers to obtain extra skills, tries to motivate
them by attending to their personal and family needs also when needed so that, the
employee remains focussed and gives their best.
 Design of the work place is dictated by this department.

ARCHITECTURE
 Large offices are focussing on providing corporate culture to cater to national and
international level project/clients in view of globalisation and business processing
operations. Hence, facilities like designer uniforms, identity card, personal computers
use even for office communication, flexible office timings, and personalised entry
system are becoming inevitable. They also offer most of the incentives and facilities
discussed before.
 Small and medium offices cannot plan for such practices as of now, but, they may
have to change mode and style of delivering the services for which, adoption of these
practices at whatever scale possible becomes inevitable to remain competitive. The
face of practice is changing in terms of pace and types of services being offered.
 Globalisation and competition has resulted in greater efficiency and confidence in
many firms. Their participation is increasing as local partners to foreign firms who are
coming to India in greater numbers.
TAX LIABILITY
Indian Income Tax Act, 1961
The number of employees can be either more or less than ten. Here the tax has to be deducted
at source and deposited at income tax office. As of now taxable income of Rs.50,000/- does
not attract any income tax. This ceiling is fixed in the annual budget of the Central
Government. Certificates to people who pay income tax will be issued by the income tax
office. In other case where an employee’s income falls within tax ceiling, salary statement
will be prepared and submitted to income tax office. The tax is computed after applying
different deductions allowed as per rules. This act is applicable throughout India and is
mandatory.
Professional Tax
This is also governed by the State Legislation. The percentage to be levied varies from state
to state. Number of employees can be more or less than ten. This tax is levied on salaries
beyond a cut off amount as decided by the individual state government. The funds go to state
government. An annual statement of tax deducted at source, i.e. office should be submitted to
the profession tax officer.
Service Tax
This is regulated by a Central Legislation applicable to different types of services.

Architectural consultancy is one among them, applicable throughout India, and is based on
the number of projects handled. Its scope is getting widened due to globalisation and business
outsourcing across the world.
INDIAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS
 In 1917, a group of people who were past students of architecture of Sir J.J. school of
art decided to form themselves into an association and it was decided to christen the
infant "the architectural students association"

ARCHITECTURE
 The activities of the association showed, steady progress, members began to seriously
consider an improvement in status of the association. The word "students" seemed
inapt for a body that had now practicing architects within it. In 1922, it announced the
formal inauguration of the rechristened association The “Bombay architectural
students association” in Mumbai.
 Its affiliation to the Royal Institute of British architects in 1925 and re-considered
aims and objectives it was converted to IIA in the year 1929.
 The Indian Institute of Architects (IIA) is the national body of architects in our
country.
 The institute today has more than 12000 members.
 The institute has a major role in promoting the profession of architects by uniting and
organizing in fellowship the architects of India to promote aesthetic, scientific and
practical efficiency of the profession.
 IIA is represented on various national and international committees connected with

art, architecture and the building industry is also actively associated with
a. International union of architects (UIA)
b. Commonwealth association of architects(CAA)
c. South Asian association for regional co-operation of architects.
 IIA has six classes of membership:
a. Honorary fellows - any individual who is not necessarily a qualified architect but has
contributed to the growth of architectural profession.
b. Associates - any person who has attained the age of 21 and graduated from one of the
institutions registered with Council of Architecture.
c. Licentiates - any person who is registered with COA is eligible to apply for licentiate
member.
d. Students - a student enrolled in any one of the architectural institutions – can on

application, become a student member.
e. Retired members - any fellow, associate or licentiate after attaining the age of 55 and
on completely retiring from service or profession can apply for this post.
f. Subscribers - a subscriber shall be either a person who was a member of the Bombay
architectural association at the time of adoption of the original constitution of the
institute, now amended or a person who in the opinion of the council is likely to
render assistance in promoting the objects of the institute.

ARCHITECTURE
Council
All affairs of the institute is be managed by the council, but will be subject to the control by
the general body of the institute. The council holds office for a period of 2 official years.
Council consists of:
o President
o 2 Vice President
o Hon. Treasurer
o 2 or more Joint Secretaries
o The immediate past President
o Chairman of 5 regional committees
o Chairman of all chapters
o The Hon. Editor of the Journal.
ROLE OF INDIAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS
 It encourages the science and the art of planning and building the standards of
architectural education, training and practice, by making grants to Technical
Institutions, or by paying or assisting to pay the fees and expenses of students or by
providing and giving scholarships, prizes or other rewards to such students, or by any
or all such methods.
 It devises and imposes the means for testing the qualifications of the candidates for
admission to membership of the Institute, by examination in theory and in practice, or
by any other tests, or to arrange with any technical Institute or Institutions for the
imposition of any such tests.
 It looks into all factors affecting the practice of architecture and it initiates and
watches over measures affecting, or likely to affect, the practice of Architecture, and
to procure such changes of and amendments in the law relating to or affecting the
practice of Architecture.
 It holds conferences or meetings for the discussion of, and the exchange of news and
matters affecting or relating to architecture, the reading of papers and the delivery of
lectures, and hold congresses or exhibitions (either jointly with any other body or
Institution or otherwise) for the exposition of any matters affecting or relating to the
theory or practice of Architecture or any allied subject; and to award medals,
certificates, prizes or diplomas in connection therewith.
 It co-ordinates the activities of the building industry and of the Profession of
Architecture, and too amalgamate or combine or act temporarily or otherwise, in
conjunction with any other body or bodies, Institution or Institutions, having like or
similar objects.
 It purchases, leases, rents, holds and disposes of any land or property, and any
building or hall and erects any such building or buildings to be used as place of
meeting for the members of the institute, or as a college, school or reading room or
library for the advancement of the object of the institute, and provides

ARCHITECTURE
accommodation for any meeting, conference, exhibition or congress, whether

promoted wholly or partly by the Institute or which, in the opinion of the Council,
may conduce to or assist in the carrying on with the objects of the Institute or tend to
do so.
 t acquires by purchasing, donation, and request or otherwise a library and collection
of models, drawings, designs or other materials, and to maintain, extend and improve
the same.
 It formulates and notifies the law and practice relating to Architecture to members and
the public, and to compile, collect, collate, revise, print and publish statistics,
professional records or periodicals relating to any of the objects of the Institute.
 It issues appeals for funds in furtherance of the objects of the Institute, to accept any
gift, endowment or bequest mode to the Institute, and to carry any trust attached to
any such gift, endowment or bequest, and to borrow moneys, if required for the
purpose of the Institute, provided such gifts, endowments, bequests or loans shall be
accepted if they are not accompanied by conditions inconsistent or in conflict with the
objects for which the Institute is established.
 It ensures the advancement of the living standards of our people through their
improved environment and to make the profession of ever increasing service to
Society.
 It constitutes various classes of members including Honorary Fellows who are
influential and experienced people directly or indirectly from the field.
ARCHITECT’S ACT, 1972
 An Act to provide for the registration of architects and for matters connected
therewith.
 It has come into force from 31st May 1972 and extends to the whole India.
 It contains 4 Chapters with 45 Sections along with one Schedule.
GENRAL READING IS REQUIREDFOR THE POINTS MENTIONED BELOW
Chapter - I (Preliminary)
1)
1. This Act may be called the Architects Act, 1972.
2. It extends to the whole of India.
3. It shall come in to force on such date as the Central Government may, by notification
in the Official Gazette, appoint.
2) In this Act, unless the context otherwise requires,
a. "Architect" means a person whose name is for the time being entered in the register;

ARCHITECTURE
b. "Council" means the Council of Architecture constituted under Section 3;

c. "Indian Institute of Architects" means the Indian Institute of Architects registered
under the Societies Registration Act, 1860;
d. "Recognised qualification" means any qualification in architecture for the time being
ncluded in the Schedule or notified under section 15;
e. "Register" means the register of architects maintained under section 23;
f. "Regulation" means a regulation made under this Act by the Council;
g. "Rule" means a rule made under this Act by the Central Government.
Chapter – II
 The Central Government shall, by notification in the Official Gazette, constitute, with
effect from such date as may be specified in the notification, a Council to be known as
the Council of Architecture, which shall be a body corporate, having perpetual
succession and a common seal, with power to acquire, hold and dispose of property,
both movable and immovable, and to contract, and may by that name sue or be sued.
 The Head Office of the Council shall be at Delhi or at such other place as the Central
Government may, by notification in the Official Gazette, specify.
3) The Council shall consist of the following members, namely:-

a. Five architects possessing recognized qualifications elected by the Indian Institute of
Architects from among its members;
b. Two persons nominated by the All India Council for Technical Education established
by the Resolution of the Government of India in the late Ministry of Education
No.F.16-10/44-E.III, dated the 30th November, 1945;
c. Five persons elected form among themselves by heads of architectural institutions in
India imparting full-time instruction for recognised qualifications;
d. The Chief Architects in the Ministries of the Central Government to which the
Government business relating to defence and railways has been allotted and head of
the Architectural Organization in the Central Public Works Department, ex officio;
e. One person nominated by the Central Government;
f. An architect from each State nominated by the Government of that state;
g. Two persons nominated by the Institution of Engineers (India) from among its
members; and
h. One person nominated by the Institution of Surveyors of India from among its
members.
Explanation -- For the purposes of this sub-section,--
 "Institution of Engineers (India)" means the Institution of Engineers (India) first registered in 1920
under the Indian Companies Act, 1913 and subsequently incorporated by a Royal chapter in 1935.
 "Institution of Surveyors of India" means the Institution of surveyors registered under the Societies
Registration Act, 1860. 

ARCHITECTURE
4) Notwithstanding anything contained in clause (a) of sub-section (3), the Central

Government may, pending the preparation of the register, nominate to the first Council, in
consultation with the Indian Institute of Architects, persons referred to in the said clause (a)
who are qualified for registration under section 25, and the persons so nominated shall hold
office for such period as the Central Government may, by notification in the Official Gazette,
specify.
5) Notwithstanding anything contained in clause (f) of sub-section (3), the Central

Government may, pending the preparation of the register, nominate to the first Council, in
consultation with the State Governments concerned, persons referred to in the said clause(f),
who are qualified for registration under section 25, and the persons so nominated shall hold
office for such period as the Central Government may, by notification in the Official Gazette,
specify.
 The President and the Vice-President of the Council shall be elected by the members of the Council
from among themselves:
Provided that on the first constitution of the Council and until the President is elected, a member of the
Council nominated by the Central Government in this behalf shall discharge the functions of the
President.
 An elected President or Vice-President of the Council shall hold office for a term of three years or till
he ceases to be a member of the Council, whichever is earlier, but subject to his being a member of the
Council, he shall be eligible for re-election:
Provided that –
o The President or the Vice-President may, by writing under his hand addressed to the Vice-President or
the President, as the case may be, resign his office;
o President or the Vice-President shall, notwithstanding the expiry of his term of three years, continue to
hold office until his successor enters upon office.
 The President and the Vice-President of the Council shall exercise such powers and discharge such
duties as may be prescribed by the regulations.
5)
1. Elections under this Chapter shall be conducted in such manner as may be

prescribed by rules.
2. Where any dispute arises regarding any such election, the matter shall be referred by
the Council to a Tribunal appointed by the Central Government by notification in the
Official Gazette in this behalf, and the decision of the Tribunal shall be final:
Provided that no such reference shall be made except on an application made to the
Council by an aggrieved party within thirty days from the date of the declaration of
the result of the election.
3. The expenses of the Tribunal shall be borne by the Council.
6)
1. Subject to the provisions of this section, an elected or nominated member shall hold
office for a term of three years from the date of his election or nomination or until his
successor has been duly elected or nominated whichever is later.

ARCHITECTURE
2. An elected or nominated member may, at any time, resign his membership by writing
under his hand addressed to the President, or in his absence, to the Vice-President,
and the seat of such member shall thereupon become vacant.
3. A member shall be deemed to have vacated his seat --
a. If he is absent without excuse, sufficient in the opinion of the Council, from

three consecutive ordinary meetings of the Council; or
b. If he ceases to be a member of the body referred to in clause (a), clause(g) or

clause(h) of sub-section (3) of section 3 by which he was elected or nominated,
as the case may be; or
c. In the case where he has been elected under clause(c) of sub-section (3) of
section 3, if he ceases to hold his appointment as the head of an Institution
referred to in the said clause.
4. A Casual vacancy in the Council shall be filled by fresh election or nomination, as the
case may be, and the person so elected or nominated to fill the vacancy shall hold
office only for the remainder of the term for which the member whose place he takes
was elected or nominated.
5. Members of the Council shall be eligible for re-election or re-nomination, but not
exceeding three consecutive terms.
7) No act or proceeding of the Council or the Executive Committee or any other Committee
shall be invalid merely by reason of -
a. Any vacancy in, or defect in the constitution of the Council, the Executive Committee
or any other committee, or
b. Any defect in the election or nomination of a person acting as a member thereof, or
c. Any irregularity in procedure not affecting the merits of the case.
8) A person shall not be eligible for election or nomination as a member of the Council, if
he/she --
a. Is an un discharged insolvent; or
b. Has been convicted by a court in India for any offence and sentenced to imprisonment
for not less than two years, and shall continue to be ineligible for a further period of
five years since his release.
9)
1. The Council shall meet at least once in every six months at such time and place and
shall observe such rules of procedure in regard to the transaction of business at its
meetings as may be prescribed by regulations.

ARCHITECTURE
2. Unless otherwise prescribed by regulations, nine members of the Council shall form a
quorum, and all the acts of the Council shall be decided by a majority of the members
present and voting.
3. In the case of an equal division of votes, the President, or in his absence, the Vice-
President or, in the absence of both, the member presiding over the meeting, shall
have and exercise a second or casting vote.
10)
1. The Council shall constitute from among its members an Executive Committee, and
may also constitute other committees for such general or special purposes as the
Council deems necessary to carry out its functions under this Act.
2. The Executive Committee shall consist of the President and the Vice-President of the
Council who shall be member’s ex-officio and five other members who shall be
elected by the Council from among its members.
3. The President and the Vice-President of the Council shall be the Chairman and Vice-
Chairman respectively of the Executive Committee.
4. A member of the Executive Committee shall hold office as such until the expiry of his
term as a member of the Council but subject to his being a member of the Council, he
shall be eligible for re-election.
5. In addition to the powers and duties conferred and imposed on it by this Act, the
Executive Committee shall exercise such powers and discharge such duties as may be
prescribed by regulations.
11) The President, the Vice-President and other members of the Council shall be entitled to
such fees and allowances as the Council may, with the previous sanction of the Central
Government, fix in this behalf.
12)
1. The Council shall -
a. Appoint a Registrar who shall act as its Secretary and who may also act, if so
decided by the Council, as its treasurer;
b. Appoint such other officers and employees as the Council deems necessary to
enable it to carry out its functions under this Act;
c. With the previous sanction of the Central Government, fix the pay and
allowances and other conditions of service of officers and other employees of
the Council.
2. Notwithstanding anything contained in clause(a) of sub-section(1), for the first three

years from the first constitution of the Council, the Registrar of the Council shall be a

EVA UNIVERSITY , SCHOOL OF
ARCHITECTURE
person appointed by the Central government, who shall hold office during the
pleasure of the Central Government.
3. All the persons appointed under this section shall be the employees of the Council.
13)
1. There shall be established a Fund under the management and control of the Council
into which shall be paid all moneys received by the Council and out of which shall be
met all expenses and liabilities properly incurred by the Council.
2. The Council may invest any money for the time being standing to the credit of the
Fund in any Government security or in any other security approved by the Central
Government.
3. The Council shall keep proper accounts of the Fund distinguishing capital from
revenue.
4. The annual accounts of the Council shall be subject to audit by an auditor to be

appointed annually by the Council.
5. As soon as may be practicable at the end of each year, but not later than the thirtieth
day of September of the year next following, the Council shall cause to be published
in the Official Gazette a copy of the audited accounts and the report of the Council for
that year and copies of the said accounts and report shall be forwarded to the Central
Government.
6. The Fund shall consist of --
a. All moneys received from the Central Government by way of grant, gift or
deposit;
b. Any sums received under this Act whether by way of fee or otherwise.
7. All moneys standing at the credit of the Council which cannot be immediately be
applied shall be deposited in the State Bank of India or in any other bank specified in
column 2 of the First Schedule to the Banking Companies (Acquisition and Transfer
of Undertakings) Act, 1970.
14)
1. The qualifications included in the schedule or notified under section 15 shall be

recognised qualifications for the purposes of this Act.
2. Any authority in India which grants an architectural qualification not included in the
schedule may apply to the Central Government to have such qualification recognised,
and the Central Government, after consultation with the Council, may, by notification
in the Official Gazette, amend the schedule so as to include such qualification therein,
and any such notification may also direct that an entry shall be made in the schedule

ARCHITECTURE
against such architectural qualification declaring that it shall be a recognised

qualification only when granted after a specified date.
3. Provided that until the first Council is constituted, the Central Government shall,
before, issuing any notification as aforesaid, consult an expert committee consisting
of three members to be appointed by the Central Government by notification in the
official Gazette.
15)
1. The Central Government may, after consultation with the Council, direct, by
notification in the Official Gazette, that an architectural qualification granted by any
university or other institution in any country outside India in respect of which a
scheme of reciprocity for the recognition of architectural qualification is not in force,
shall be a recognised qualification for the purposes of this Act or, shall be so only
when granted after a specified date or before a specified date :
Provided that until the first Council is constituted the Central Government shall,
before issuing any notification as aforesaid, consult the expert committee set up under
the proviso to sub-section (2) of section 14.
2. The Council may enter into negotiations with the authority in any State or country
outside India, which by the law of such State or country is entrusted with the
maintenance of a register of architects, for settling of a scheme of reciprocity for the
recognition of architectural qualifications and in pursuance of any such scheme, the
Central Government may, by notification in the Official Gazette, direct that such
architectural qualification as the Council has decided should be recognised, shall be
deemed to be a recognised qualification for the purposes of this Act, and any such
notification may also direct that such architectural qualification, shall be so
recognised only when granted after a specified date or before a specified date.
16) Notwithstanding anything contained in sub-section (2) of section 14, the Central
Government, after consultation with the Council, may, by notification in the Official Gazette,
amend the schedule by directing that an entry be made in respect of any architectural
qualification.
17) Notwithstanding anything contained in any other law, but subject to the provisions of this
Act, any recognised qualification shall be a sufficient qualification for enrolment in the
register.
18) Every authority in India which grants a recognised qualification shall furnish such
information as the Council may, from time to time, require as to the courses of study and
examinations to be undergone in order to obtain such qualification, as to the ages at which
such courses of study and examinations are required to be undergone and such qualification
is conferred and generally as to the requisites for obtaining such qualification.

RCHITECTURE
19)
1. The Executive Committee shall, subject to regulations, if any, made by the Council,
appoint such number of inspectors as it may deem requisite to inspect any college or
institution where architectural education is given or to attend any examination held
by any college or institution for the purpose of recommending to the Central
Government recognition of architectural qualifications granted by that college or
institution.
2. The inspectors shall not interfere with the conduct of any training or examination, but
shall report to the Executive Committee on the adequacy of the standards of
architectural education including staff, equipment, accommodation; training and such
other facilities as may be prescribed by regulations for giving such education or on
the sufficiency of every examination which they attend.
3. The Executive Committee shall forward a copy of such report to the college or
institution and shall also forward copies with remarks, if any, of the college or
institution thereon, to the Central Government.
20)
1. When upon report by the Executive Committee it appears to the Council -
1. That the courses of study and examination to be undergone in, or the

proficiency required from the candidates at any examination held by, any
college or institution, or
2. That the staff, equipment, accommodation, training and other facilities for
staff and training provided in such college or institution,
Do not conform to the standards prescribed by regulations, the Council shall

make a representation to that effect to the appropriate Government.
2. After considering such representation the appropriate Government shall forward it

along with such remarks as it may choose to make to the college or institution
concerned, with an intimation of the period within which the college or institution, as
the case may be, may submit its explanation to the appropriate Government.
3. On receipt of the explanation or where no explanation is submitted within the period

fixed, then on the expiry of that period, the State Government, in respect of the college
or institution referred to in clause(b) of sub-section (5), shall make its
recommendations to the Central Government.
4. The Central Government --
a. After making such further enquiry, if any, as it may think fit, in respect of the
college or institution referred to in sub-section (3), or
b. On receipt of the explanation from a college or institution referred to in clause

(a) of sub-section (5), or where no explanation is submitted within the period
fixed, then on the expiry of that period,

ARCHITECTURE
May, by notification in the Official Gazette, direct that an entry shall be made
in the Schedule against the architectural qualification awarded by such
college or institution, as the case may be, declaring that it shall be a
recognised qualification only when granted before a specified date and the
Schedule shall be deemed to be amended accordingly.
5. For the purposes of this section, "appropriate Government" means --
. In relation to any college or institution established by an Act of Parliament or

managed, controlled or financed by the Central Government, the Central
Government, and
a. In any other case, the State Government.
21) The Council may prescribe the minimum standards of architectural education required
for granting recognised qualifications by colleges or institutions in India.
22)
a. The Council may by regulations prescribe standards of professional conduct and

etiquette and a code of ethics for architects.
b. Regulations made by the Council under sub-section (1) may specify which violations
thereof shall constitute infamous conduct in any professional respect, that is to say,
professional misconduct, and such provision shall have effect notwithstanding
anything contained in any law for the time being in force.
Chapter – III
23)
1. The Central Government shall, as soon as may be, cause to be prepared in the
manner hereinafter provided a register of architects for India.
2. The Council shall upon its constitution assume the duty of maintaining the register in
accordance with the provisions of this Act.
3. The register shall include the following particulars, namely :-
a. The full name with date of birth, nationality and residential address of the
architect ;
b. His qualification for registration, and the date on which he obtained that
qualification and the authority which conferred it ;
c. The date of his first admission to the register;
d. His professional address ; and
e. Such further particulars as may be prescribed by rules.

ARCHITECTURE
23.
1. The Central Government shall, as soon as may be, cause to be prepared in the
manner hereinafter provided a register of architects for India.
2. The Council shall upon its constitution assume the duty of maintaining the register in
accordance with the provisions of this Act.
3. The register shall include the following particulars, namely :-
a. The full name with date of birth, nationality and residential address of the
architect ;
b. His qualification for registration, and the date on which he obtained that
qualification and the authority which conferred it ;
c. The date of his first admission to the register;
d. His professional address ; and
e. Such further particulars as may be prescribed by rules.
24)
1. For the purposes of preparing the register of architects for the first time, the Central
Government shall, by notification in the Official Gazette, constitute a Registration
Tribunal consisting of three persons who have, in the opinion of the Central
Government, the knowledge of, or experience in, architecture; and the Registrar
appointed under section 12 shall act as Secretary of the Tribunal.
2. The Central Government shall, by the same or a like notification, appoint a date on or
before which application for registration, which shall be accompanied by such fee as
may be prescribed by rules, shall be made to the Registration Tribunal.
3. The Registration Tribunal shall examine every application received on or before the
appointed day and if it is satisfied that the applicant is qualified for registration under
section 25, shall direct the entry of the name of the applicant in the register.
4. The first register so prepared shall thereafter be published in such manner as the
Central Government may direct and any person aggrieved by a decision of the
Registration Tribunal expressed or implied in the register so published may, within
thirty days from the date of such publication, appeal against such decision to an
authority appointed by the central Government in this behalf by notification in the
Official Gazette.
5. The authority appointed under sub-section (4) shall, after giving the person affected
an opportunity of being heard and after calling for relevant records, make such order
as it may deem fit.

ARCHITECTURE
6. The Registrar shall amend, where necessary, the register in accordance with the
decisions of the authority appointed under sub-section (4).
7. Every person whose name is entered in the register shall be issued a certificate of
registration in such form as may be prescribed by rules.
8. Upon the constitution of the Council, the register shall be given into its custody, and
the Central Government may direct that the whole or any specified part of the
application fees for registration in the first register shall be paid to the credit of the
Council.
25) A person shall be entitled on payment of such fees as may be prescribed by rules to have
his name entered in the register, if he resides or carries on the profession of architect in India
and --
a. Holds a recognised qualification, or
b. Does not hold such a qualification but, being a citizen of India, has been engaged in
practice as an architect for a period of not less than five years prior to the date
appointed under sub-section (2) of section 24, or
c. Possesses such other qualifications as may be prescribed by rules :
Provided that no person other than a citizen of India shall be entitled to registration
by virtue of a qualification --
d. Recognised under sub-section (1) of section 15 unless by the law and practice of a
country outside India to which such person belongs, citizens of India holding
architectural qualification registrable in that country are permitted to enter and
practise the profession of architect in such country, or
e. Unless the Central Government has, in pursuance of a scheme of reciprocity or

otherwise, declared that qualification to be a recognised qualification under sub-
section (2) of section 15.
26)
1. After the date appointed for the receipt of applications for registration in the first
register of architects, all applications for registration shall be addressed to the
Registrar of the Council and shall be accompanied by such fee as may be prescribed
by rules.
2. If upon such application the Registrar is of opinion that the applicant is entitled to
have his name entered in the register he shall enter thereon the name of the applicant
:
3. Provided that no person, whose name has under the provisions of this Act been
removed from the register, shall be entitled to have his name re-entered in the register
except with the approval of the Council.

ARCHITECTURE
4. Any person whose application for registration is rejected by the Registrar may, within
three months of the date of such rejection, appeal to the Council.
5. Upon entry in the register of a name under this section, the Registrar shall issue a
certificate of registration in such form as may be prescribed by the rules.
27)
1. The Central Government may, by notification in the Official Gazette, direct that for
the retention of a name in the register after the 31st day of December of the year
following the year in which the name is first entered in the register, there shall be
paid annually to the Council such renewal fee as may be prescribed by rules and
where such direction has been made, such renewal fee shall be due to be paid before
the first day of April of the year to which it relates.
2. Where the renewal fee is not paid before the due date, the Registrar shall remove the
name of the defaulter from the register :
3. Provided that a name so removed may be restored to the register on such conditions
as may be prescribed by rules.
4. On payment of the renewal fee, the Registrar shall, in such manner as may be
prescribed by rules, endorse the certificate of registration accordingly.
28) An architect shall, on payment of such fee as may be prescribed by rules, be entitled to
have entered in the register any further recognised qualification which he may obtain.
29)
1. The Council may, by order, remove from the register the name of any architect -
a. From whom a request has been received to that effect, or
b. One, who has died since the last publication of the register
2. Subject to the provisions of this section, the Council may order that the name of any
architect shall be removed from the register where it is satisfied, after giving him a
reasonable opportunity of being heard and after such further inquiry, if any, as it may
think fit to make, --
a. That his name has been entered in the register by error or on account of
misrepresentation or suppression of a material fact; or
b. That he has been convicted of any offence which, in the opinion of the Council,
involves moral turpitude; or
c. That he has been convicted of any offence which, in the opinion of the Council,
involves moral turpitude; or
d. That he has been adjudged by a competent court to be of unsound mind.

ARCHITECTURE
3. An order under sub-section (2) may direct that any architect whose name is ordered
to be removed from a register shall be ineligible for registration under this Act for
such period as may be specified.
4. An order under sub-section (2) shall not take effect until the expiry of three months
from the date thereof.
30)
1. When on receipt of a complaint made to it, the Council is of opinion that any architect
has been guilty of professional misconduct which, if proved, will render him unfit to
practise as an architect; the Council may hold an inquiry in such manner as may be
prescribed by rules.
2. After holding the inquiry under sub-section (1) and after hearing the architect, the
Council may, by order, reprimand the said architect or suspend him from practice as
an architect or remove his name from the register or pass such other order as it thinks
fit
31) A person whose name has been removed from the register under sub-section (2) of
section 27, sub-section (1) or sub-section (2) of section 29 or sub-section (2) of section 30, or
where such person is dead, his legal representative, as defined in clause (11) of section 2 of
the Code of Civil Procedure, 1908, shall forthwith surrender his certificate of registration to
the Registrar, and the name so removed shall be published in the Official Gazette.
32) The Council may, at any time, for reasons appearing to it be sufficient and subject to the
approval of the Central Government, order that upon payment of such fee as may be
prescribed by rules, the name of the person removed from the register shall be restored
thereto.
33) Where it is shown to the satisfaction of the Registrar that a certificate of registration has
been lost or destroyed, the Registrar may, on payment of such fee as may be prescribed by
rules, issue a duplicate certificate in the form prescribed by the rules.
34) As soon as may be after the Ist day of April in each year, the Registrar shall cause to be
printed copies of the register as it stood on the said date and such copies shall be made
available to persons applying therefore on payment of such fee as may be prescribed by rules
and shall be evidence that on the said date the persons whose names are entered therein were
architects.
35)
1. Any reference in any law for the time being in force to an architect shall be deemed to
be a reference to an architect registered under this Act.
2. After the expiry of two years from the date appointed under sub-section (2) of section
24, a person who is registered in the register shall get preference for appointment as
an architect under the Central or State Government or in any other local body or
institution which is supported or aided from the public or local funds or in any
institution recognised by the Central or State Government.

ARCHITECTURE
Chapter - IV (Miscellaneous)
36) If any person whose name is not for the time being entered in the register falsely
represents that it is so entered, or uses in connection with his name or title any words or
letters reasonably calculated to suggest that his name is so entered, he shall be punishable
with fine which may extend to one thousand rupees.
37)
1. After the expiry of one year from the date appointed under sub-section (2) of section
24, no person other than a registered architect, or a firm of architects shall use the
title and style of architect :
Provided that the provisions of this section shall not apply to -
a. Practice of the profession of an architect by a person designated as a

"landscape architect" or "naval architect";
b. A person who, carrying on the profession of an architect in any country

outside India, undertakes the function as a consultant or designer in India for
a specific project with the prior permission of the Central Government.
Explanation - For the purposes of clause (a), --
c. "Landscape architect" means a person who deals with the design of open
spaces relating to plants, trees and landscape;
d. "Naval architect" means an architect who deals with design and construction
of ships.
2. If any person contravenes the provisions of sub-section (1), he shall be punishable on

first conviction with fine which may extend to five hundred rupees and on any
subsequent conviction with imprisonment which may extend to six months or with fine
not exceeding one thousand rupees or with both.
38) If any person whose name has been removed from the register fails without sufficient
cause forthwith to surrender his certificate of registration, he shall be punishable with fine
which may extend to one hundred rupees, and, in the case of a continuing failure, with an
additional fine which may extend to ten rupees for each day after the first during which he
has persisted in the failure.
39)
1. No court shall take cognizance of any offence punishable under this Act, except upon
complaint made by order of the Council or a person authorised in this behalf by the
Council.
2. No Magistrate other than a Presidency Magistrate or a Magistrate of the first class

shall try any offence punishable under this Act.

ARCHITECTURE
40)
1. The Council shall furnish such reports, copies of its minutes, and other information to
the Central Government as that Government may require.
2. The Central Government may publish, in such manner as it may think fit, any report,
copy or other information furnished to it under this section.
41) No suit, prosecution or other legal proceeding shall lie against the Central Government,
the Council or any member of the Council, the Executive Committee or any other committee
or officers and other employees of the Council for anything which is in good faith done or
intended to be done under this Act or any rule or regulation made there under.
42) The members of the Council and officers and other employees of the Council shall be
deemed to be public servants within the meaning of section 21 of the Indian Penal Code.
43)
1. If any difficulty arises in giving effect to the provisions of this Act, the Central
Government may, by order published in the Official Gazette, make such provisions,
not inconsistent with the provisions of this Act, as appear to it to be necessary or
expedient for removing the difficulty: Provided that no such order shall be made
under this section after the expiry of two years from the date of commencement of this
Act.
2. Every order made under this section shall, as soon as may be after it is made, be laid
before each House of Parliament and the provisions of sub-section(3) of section 44
shall apply in respect of such order as it applies in respect of a rule made under this
Act.
44)
1. The Central Government may, by notification in the Official Gazette, make rules to
carry out the purposes of this Act.
2. In particular and without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing power, such
rules may provide for all or any of the following matters, namely : -
a. The manner in which elections under Chapter II shall be conducted, the terms
and conditions of service of the member of the Tribunal appointed under sub-
section (2) of section 5 and the procedure to be followed by the Tribunal;
b. The procedure to be followed by the expert committee constituted under the

proviso to sub-section (2) of section 14 in the transaction of its business and
the powers and duties of the expert committee and the travelling and daily
allowances payable to the members thereof;
c. The particulars to be included in the register of architects under sub-section

(3) of section 23;

ARCHITECTURE
d. The form in which a certificate of registration is to be issued under sub-

section (7) of section 24, sub-section (4) of section 26 and section 33.
e. The fee to be paid under sections 24, 25, 26, 27, 28 , 32 and 33;
f. The conditions on which name may be restored to the register under the
proviso to sub-section (2) of section 27;
g. The manner of endorsement under sub-section (3) of section 27;
h. The manner in which the Council shall hold an enquiry under section 30;
i. The fee for supplying printed copies of the register under section 34.
j. Any other matter which is to be or may be provided by rules under this Act
3. Every rule made under this section shall be laid, as soon as may be after it is made,
before each House of Parliament, while it is in session, for a total period of thirty
days which may be comprised in one session or in two or more successive sessions,
and if, before the expiry of the session immediately following the session or the
successive sessions aforesaid, both Houses agree in making any modification to the
rule or both Houses agree that the rule should not be made, the rule shall thereafter
have effect only in such modified form or be of no effect, as the case may be; so,
however, that any such modification or annulment shall be without prejudice to the
validity of anything previously done under that rule.
45)
1. The Council may, with the approval of the central Government, *[by notification in
the Official Gazette] make regulations not inconsistent with the provisions of this Act,
or the rules made there under to carry out the purposes of this Act.
2. In particular and without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing power, such
regulations may provide for -
a. The management of the property of the Council;
b. The powers and duties of the President and the Vice-President of the Council;
c. The summoning and holding of meetings of the Council and the Executive
Committee or any other committee constituted under section 10, the times and
places at which such meetings shall be held, the conduct of business thereat
and the number of persons necessary to constitute a quorum;
d. The functions of the Executive Committee or of any other committee

constituted under section 10;
e. The courses and periods of study and of practical training, if any, to be

undertaken, the subjects of examinations and standards of proficiency therein
to be obtained in any college or institution for grant of recognised
qualifications;

ARCHITECTURE
f. The appointment, powers and duties of inspector;
g. The standards of staff, equipment, accommodation, training and other

facilities for architectural education;
h. The conduct of professional examinations, qualifications of examiners and the

conditions of admission to such examinations;
i. The standards of professional conduct and etiquette and code of ethics to be

observed by architects;
j. Any other matter which is to be or may be provided by regulations under this

Act and in respect of which no rules have been made.
3. Every regulation made under this section shall be laid, as soon as may be after it is
made, before each House of Parliament, while it is in session, for a total period of
thirty days which may be comprised in one session or in two or more successive
sessions, and if, before the expiry of the session immediately following the session or
the successive sessions aforesaid, both Houses agree in making any modification to
the regulation or both Houses agree that the regulation should not be made, the
regulations shall thereafter have effect only in such modified form or be of no effect,
as the case may be; so, however, that any such modification or annulment shall be
without prejudice to the validity of anything previously done under that regulation.
COUNCIL OF ARCHITECTURE (COA)
The council consists of the following members:
 5 architects possessing recognised qualifications elected by the Indian Institute of

Architects.
 2 persons nominated by the All India Council for Technical Education.
 5 persons elected from among themselves by heads of architectural institutions in
India imparting full time instruction for recognised qualification.
 3 Chief Architects from MES, Railways and C.P.W.D.
 1 person nominated by Central Government.
 An architect from each State nominated by the government of that state.
 2 persons nominated by the Institution of Engineers (India) from among its members.
 1 person nominated by Institution of surveyors from among its members.
Main Function of COA
 Enrolment of persons holding recognised qualifications.

 Holding enquires into misconduct of registered architects and taking necessary action.
 Prescribing standards of professional conduct and etiquette and code of ethics for
architects.
 Assessment of the standards of education and training of architects.
 President and Vice President: They are elected by the members of the council for a
period of 3 years or till they ceases to be a member of the Council.
 Executive Committee hall consists of President and Vice President as Chairman and
Vice Chairman and five other elected members of the Council.

ARCHITECTURE
 Regulations prescribe powers of Executive.

 The qualifications included in the schedule or notified under Section 15 shall be
recognised qualifications under this Act.
IMPORTANCE OF ETHICS IN PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE
ETHICS is defined broadly and simply as the study of how our decision affect other people.
It is also the study of people’s rights and duties, the moral rules that people apply in making
decisions, and the nature of relationship among people. Ethics deal with moral duty and
obligation, and gives rise to a set of values, which in turn, are used to judge the
appropriateness of a particular conduct or behaviour.
 The code of ethics regulates the professional behaviour, and represents the values on
which the profession stands for.
 Values generate faith in people that their interests are in safe hands, and it would
improve quality of life.
 The code of ethics is based on the principles of truth, honesty, justice,
trustworthiness, to respect and safeguard human life and its welfare, competence
and the accountability which constitutes values every professional ought to
recognise and uphold.
CODE OF CONDUCT FOR ARCHITECTS AND PUNITIVE ACTION FOR

PROFESSIONAL MISCONDUCT OF AN ARCHITECT
Architects (professional conduct) regulations 1989: under Architects Act 1972
Certain regulations are made to promote the standard of professional conduct/self-discipline

required of an architect. Any violation shall constitute a professional misconduct.
A. Conditions of engagement and scale of professional fees and charges:

 Architect acts as a professional advisor to his/her client and his/her advice
must be absolutely unbiased.
 While interpreting conditions of contract, he/she discharges quasi-judicial
functions as between client and contractor and he/she should ensure
impartiality.
 The architect has moral responsibilities towards his/her professional associates
and subordinates. These conditions of engagement are for the mutual benefit
of both clients and the architect. The architect fulfils comprehensive
responsibilities in cooperation with members of other professions.
 The quality of environment ultimately depends on the successful application
of his creative skill.
B. Architects (Professional Conduct) Regulations 1989:
Architect shall
1. Ensure that the professional activities do no conflict with the general responsibility to
contribute to the quality of the environment and future welfare of society.
2. Apply skill to the creative, responsible and economic development of his country.
3. Provide professional services of a high standard, to the best of ability.

ARCHITECTURE
4. If in private practice, inform the client of the conditions of engagement and scale of
charges and agree that these conditions shall be the basis of one’s appointment.
5. Do not sub commission to another architect or architects the work for which one has
been commissioned without prior agreement of the client.
6. Do not give or take discounts, commissions, gifts or other inducements for the
introduction of clients or of work.
7. Act with fairness and impartiality when administering a building contract.
8. Maintain a high standard of integrity.
9. Promote the advancement of architecture, standards of architectural education,
research training and practice.
10. Conduct in a manner which is not derogatory to the professional character, not likely
to lessen the confidence of the public in the profession, nor bring architects into
disrepute.
11. Compete fairly with other architects.
12. Observe and uphold the Council’s conditions of engagement and scale of charges.
13. Do not prepare designs in competition with other architects for a client without
payment or for a reduced fee (except in a competition conducted in accordance with
the architectural competition guidelines approved by the Council).
14. Do not attempt to obtain, offer to undertake or accept a commission for which one
knows another architect has been selected or employed until he/she has evidence that
the selection, employment or agreement has been terminated and one has given the
previous architect written notice to that effect. Provided that in the preliminary stages
of works, the client may consult, in order to select the architect, as many architects as
he/she wants provided he/she makes payment of charges to each of the architects so
consulted.
15. Comply with Council’s guidelines for architectural competitions and inform the
Council of his appointment as assessor for an architectural competition.
16. When working in other countries, observe the requirements of codes of conduct
applicable to the place where one is working.
17. Do not have or take as partner in one’s firm any person who is disqualified for
registration by reason of the fact that his/her name has been removed from the
Register under Section 29 or 30 of the Architects Act, 1972.
18. Provide employees with suitable working environment compensate them fairly and
facilitate their professional development.
19. Recognize and respect the professional contribution of the employees.
20. Provide the associates with suitable working environment compensate them fairly and
facilitate their professional development.
21. Recognize and respect the professional contribution of one’s associates.
22. Enter into agreement with them; define their scope of work, responsibilities,
functions, fees and mode of payment.
23. An architect shall not advertise his/her professional services nor be part of any
publicity material/endorsement. However, change of address may be published, allow
his/her name at project site (of which he/she is the consultant) or his/her office
provided the size of lettering does not exceed 10cm in height, provide his/her name
for tender documents or foe staff selection, publication of his/her work in media, but
not for remuneration, in brochures as the consultant of project being promoted along
with his/her experience or in telephone/web documents. In a partnership also these
guidelines are applicable. If an architect practices as a partner in a partnership firm or
is in charge and is responsible to a company registered under the Companies Act,
1956 for the conduct of business of such company, he/she shall ensure that such

ARCHITECTURE
partnership firm or the company, as the ease may be, complies with the provisions of
above regulation. Violation of any of the provisions of above regulation shall
constitute a professional misconduct.
Professional Negligence
Negligence of an architect means failure to take reasonable degree of care in the course of the
engagement for rendering professional services.
Any person aggrieved by the professional negligence and/or deficiency in services provided
by the architect, the matter shall be referred to the Council of Architecture under Rule 35 of
the Council of Architecture Rules, 1973, to adjudicate whether the architect is guilty of
profession misconduct or not.
Deficient Services
Deficiency, as defined under Section 2(1)(g) of the Consumer Protection Act, 1986, means
any fault, imperfection, shortcoming or inadequacy in the quality, nature and manner of
performance which is required to be maintained by or under any law for the time being in
force or has been undertaken to be performed by a person in pursuance of a contract or
otherwise in relation to any service.
An Architect is required to observe and uphold the Council’s Conditions of Engagement and
Scale of Charges while rendering architectural services in terms of Regulation 2(1) (xii) of
the Architects (Professional Conduct) Regulations, 1989. Thus, failure to provide any
service/services that is/are necessary for discharge of his/her duties and functions for the
project for which he/she has been engaged, amount to deficient service.
Nature of Liability
An architect is liable for the negligent act which he/she committed in the performance of
his/her duties. The action against an architect can be initiated by the client on satisfying the
following conditions:
1. There must be a duty to take care, which is owned by an architect to his/her client.
2. There must be failure on the part of an architect to attain that standard of care
prescribed by law, thereby committed breach of such duty.
3. The client must have suffered damage due to such breach of duty.
Disciplinary Action under the Architects Act, 1972
If an architect is found guilty of professional misconduct, he/she is liable for disciplinary

action by the Council of Architecture under section 30 of the Architects Act, 1972.
Civil and Criminal Action in the Courts of Law
The disciplinary action taken by the Council of Architecture against the architect who has
been found guilty of professional misconduct does not absolve their of their liabilities under
the Code of Civil Procedure, 1908 and the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973, if any.

ARCHITECTURE
Some of the relevant laws include The Law of Torts, The Consumer Protection Act, 1986 and
The Indian Penal Code 1860 and so on.

PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE AND
ETHICS
[UNIT II - ARCHITECT’S SERVICES, SCALE OF FEES

& COMPETITIONS]
FACULTY IN-CHARGE: DR SHIVAJAGANATH & AR MURALI J
ARCHITECTURE
TOPICS:
 MODE OF ENGAGING AN ARCHITECT ---------------------------------------- 02

 COMPREHENSIVE SERVICES, PARTIAL SERVICES AND SPECIALISED
SERVICES ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 02
 SCOPE OF WORK OF AN ARCHITECT ------------------------------------------ 02
 SCHEDULE OF SERVICES ---------------------------------------------------------- 03
 SCALE OF FEES (COUNICILE OF ARCHITECTURE NORMS) ------------- 04
 MODE OF PAYMENT ---------------------------------------------------------------- 04
 TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF ENGAGEMENT ------------------------------ 18
 LETTER OF APPOINTMENT ------------------------------------------------------- 21
 IMPORTANCE OF ARCHITECTURAL COMPETITIONS -------------------- 22
 TYPES OF COMPETITIONS (OPEN, LIMITED, IDEAS COMPETITION) 23
 SINGLE AND TWO STAGE COMPETITIONS ---------------------------------- 24
 COUNCIL OF ARCHITECTURE GUIDELINES FOR CONDUCTING
ARCHITECTURAL COMPETITIONS --------------------------------------------- 26
 NATIONAL AND INTERNATIONAL COMPETITIONS
 CASE STUDIES
SOURCE:PROFESSIONALPRACTICE,K.G.KRISHNAMURTHY&
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 1
ARCHITECTURE
MODE OF ENGAGING AN ARCHITECT

Responsibilities
Architect’s responsibilities are:
i. To study client’s needs and to advice, to prepare, to direct, and to coordinate design and
supervise works executed under a building contract.
ii. The employment of consultants shall be at the architect’s discretion in agreement with client.
Where consultants are employed the architect shall be responsible for the direction and
integration of their work. Consultants shall be solely responsible for detailed design and
supervision of the work entrusted to them.
iii. The architect may also nominate specialist sub-contractors for the design and exaction of part
of the work. They shall be responsible for the direction and integration of their design, and for
general supervision of their work.
iv. The architect must have the authority of their client before initiating any stage of their duties.
Except as provided in para as follows next, any material deviation, alteration, addition to or
omission from the approved design shall be made only with the knowledge and consent of
the client. The architect shall inform the client if the total authorised expenditure or contract
period are likely to be varied.
v. The Architect may authorize material changes in design if they are necessary for
constructional reasons, provided that the client is informed without delay.
vi. The Architect shall give such periodic supervision and inspection as may be necessary to ensure
that the works are being executed in general accordance with the contract. Constant supervision
does not form part of his normal duties.
vii. Where frequent or constant inspection is required a Clerk of Works shall be
employed. He/she shall be nominated or approved by the Architect, and be under the
Architect’s direction and control. He/she shall be appointed and paid by the client or
alternatively may be employed by the Architect who shall be reimbursed.
viii. Where the employment of a Resident Architect is agreed upon, he/she shall be
employed by the Architect who shall be reimbursed.
COMPREHENSIVE SERVICES, PARTIAL SERVICES AND SPECIALISED
SERVICES
1. SCOPE OF WORK
The Architect is required to provide services in respect of the following:
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 2
ARCHITECTURE
Part I - Architecture:
1.1 Taking Client's instructions and preparation of design brief.

1.2 Site evaluation, analysis and impact of existing and / or proposed development on its
immediate environs.
1.3 Design and site development.
1.4 Structural design.
1.5 Sanitary, plumbing, drainage, water supply and sewerage design.
1.6 Electrical, electronic, communication systems and design.
1.7 Heating, ventilation and air conditioning design (HVAC) and other mechanical
systems.
1.8 Elevators, escalators, etc.
1.9 Fire detection, Fire protection and Security systems etc.
1.10 Periodic inspection and evaluation of Construction works.
Part II - Allied fields:
1.11 Landscape Architecture

1.12 Interior Architecture
1.13 Architectural Conservation
1.14 Retrofitting of Buildings
1.15 Graphic Design and Signage
2 SCHEDULE OF SERVICES :
The Architect shall, after taking instructions from the Client, render the following services:
Concept design [STAGE 1]:
2.1 Ascertain Client's requirements, examine site constraints & potential; and prepare a
design brief for Client's approval.
2.2 Prepare report on site evaluation, state of existing buildings, if any; and analysis and
impact of existing and/ or proposed development on its immediate environs.
2.3 Prepare drawings and documents to enable the Client to get done the detailed survey
and soil investigation at the site of the project.
2.4 Furnish report on measures required to be taken to mitigate the adverse impact, if any,
of the existing and / or proposed development on its immediate environs.
2.5 Prepare conceptual designs with reference to requirements given and prepare rough
estimate of cost on area basis.
Preliminary design and drawings [STAGE 2]:
2.6 Modify the conceptual designs incorporating required changes and prepare the
preliminary drawings, sketches, study model, etc., for the Client's approval along with
preliminary estimate of cost on area basis.
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 3
ARCHITECTURE
Drawings for client's/ statutory approvals [STAGE 3]:
2.7 Prepare drawings necessary for Client's/ statutory approvals and ensure compliance
with codes, standards and legislation, as applicable and assist the Client in obtaining the
statutory approvals thereof, if required.
Working drawings and tender documents [STAGE 4]:
2.8 Prepare working drawings, specifications and schedule of quantities sufficient to

prepare estimate of cost and tender documents including code of practice covering aspects
like mode of measurement, method of payments, quality control procedures on materials &
works and other conditions of contract.
Appointment of contractors [STAGE 5]:
2.9 Invite, receive and analyse tenders; advise Client on appointment of contractors.
Construction [STAGE 6]:
2.10 Prepare and issue working drawings and details for proper execution of works during
construction.
2.11 Approve samples of various elements and components.
2.12 Check and approve shop drawings submitted by the contractor/ vendors.
2.13 Visit the site of work, at intervals mutually agreed upon, to inspect and evaluate the
Construction Works and where necessary clarify any decision, offer interpretation of the
drawings/specifications, attend conferences and meetings to ensure that the project proceeds
generally in accordance with the conditions of contract and keep the Client informed and
render advice on actions, if required.
2.14 In order to ensure that the work at site proceeds in accordance with the contract
documents/ drawings and to exercise time and quality controls, the day-to-day supervision
will be carried out by a Construction Manager (Clerk of Works/ Site Supervisor or
Construction Management Agency in case of a large and complex project), who shall work
under the guidance and direction of the Architect and shall be appointed and paid by the
Client.
2.15 Issue Certificate of Virtual Completion of works.
Completion [STAGE 7]:
2.16 Prepare and submit completion reports and drawings for the project as required and
assist the Client in obtaining "Completion/ Occupancy Certificate" from statutory authorities,
wherever required.
2.17 Issue two sets of as built drawings including services and structures.
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 4
ARCHITECTURE
3 PROFESSIONAL FEE :
3.1 In consideration of the professional services rendered by the Architect, they shall be
paid professional fee and other charges in accordance with the Scale of Charges.
3.2 Any tax levied by law, such as Service tax, etc. contingent to professional services
rendered by the Architect, shall be payable by the Client, over and above the gross fees
charged by the Architect in relation to the services provided.
4 SCHEDULE OF PAYMENT :
The Architect shall be paid professional fee in the following stages consistent with the work
done plus other charges and reimbursable expenses as agreed upon:
Retainer Rs.20M* or 5% of the total fees payable,

On appointment/ Signing of Agreement/ whichever is higher, adjustable at the last
acceptance of offer. stage.
Stage 1
On submitting conceptual designs and rough 10% of the total fees payable.
estimate of cost.
Stage 2
On submitting the required preliminary 20% of the total fees payable less payment
scheme for the Client's approval along already made at Stage 1.
with the preliminary estimate of cost.
Stage 3
a. On incorporating Client's
suggestions and submitting 30% of the total fees payable less payment
drawings for approval from the already made at Stages 1 and 2.
Client/ statutory authorities, if
required. 35% of the total fees payable less payment
b. Upon Client's / statutory approval already made at Stages1 to 3a.
necessary for commencement of
construction, wherever applicable.
Stage 4
Upon preparation of working drawings,
45% of the total fees payable less payment
specifications and schedule of quantities
already made at Stages1 to 3a.
sufficient to prepare estimate of cost
and preparation of tender documents.
Stage 5
On inviting, receiving and analysing 55% of the total fees payable less payment
tenders; advising Client on appointment of already made at Stages 1 to 4.
contractors.
Stage 6 65% of the total fees payable less payment
already made at Stages 1 to 5.
a. On submitting working drawings
and details required for 70% of the total fees payable less payment
commencement of work at site. already made
b. at Stages 1 to 6a.
 On completion of 20% of the already made
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 5
ARCHITECTURE
work at Stages 1 to 6b(i).

 On completion of 40% of the 80% of the total fees payable less payment
work already made
 On completion of 60% of the at Stages 1 to 6b(ii).
work 85% of the total fees payable less payment
 On completion of 80% of the already made at Stages 1 to 6b(iii).
work 90% of the total fees payable less payment
 On Virtual Completion already made at Stages 1 to 6b(iv).
Stage 7
On submitting Completion Report and
drawings for issuance of completion/ 100% of the fees payable less payment
occupancy certificate by statutory already made at various stages and retainer.
authorities, wherever required and on
issue of as built drawings.
5 EFFECTING PAYMENT TO THE ARCHITECT:

5.1 The fee payable to the Architect shall be computed on the actual cost of works on
completion. The payment due to the Architect at different stages is computed on the
following basis:
5.1.1 Retainer: On rough estimate of cost.
5.1.2 At Stage 1: On rough estimate of cost.
5.1.3 At Stages 2 to 4: On preliminary estimate of cost.
5.1.4 At Stages 5 to 6b: Accepted tender cost.
5.1.5 At Stage 7: Actual total cost.

5.2 Progressive, on account, payments shall be made by the Client to the Architect against
any of the above stages based on the quantum of work done during that stage, as may be
mutually agreed to between the Client and the Architect.
5.3 No deductions shall be made from the fee of the Architect on account of penalty,
liquidated damages, part rates or other sums withheld from payment or recovered from
contractors/ suppliers.
5.4 When the work is executed wholly or in part with old materials or labour or carriage
is provided by the Client, the percentage fees shall be calculated as if the work had been
executed wholly by the contractor supplying all labour and new materials.
5.5 The actual cost of the completed works shall include cost of execution of assigned
works, referred to in Scope of Work and also the cost of equipment & machinery such as
Transformers, DG Sets, Sub-stations, Lifts, Air Conditioning Machines, Pumps & Motors,
Water and Sewage Treatment Plant, etc., but excluding the cost of land.
URBAN DESIGN
1 SCOPE OF WORK:
The Architect is required to provide services for Urban Design /Urban Renewal Scheme in
respect of the following:
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 6
ARCHITECTURE
Part I - Urban design/ Urban renewal
1.1 Taking Client's instructions and preparation of design brief.

1.2 Site evaluation, analysis of architectural character, social issues and heritage.
1.3 Feasibility study.
1.4 Preliminary proposal for development/ re-development and their impact on immediate
environs.
1.5 Volumetric study and Urban form recommendations including pedestrian / vehicular
movement and parking.
1.6 Architectural controls/ guidelines.
1.7 Conceptual design of :
i. Site development, services and their interconnectivity.
ii. Landscape Architecture.
iii. Architectural Conservation.
iv. Graphic Design and Signage.
Part II - Site development
1.8 Comprehensive Architectural Services beyond Part I with regard to external

Engineering Services and related buildings / structures; Roads, pathways, culverts & bridges;
boundary walls, gates.
Part III - Landscape architecture
1.9 Landscape Architectural Services beyond Part I with regard to public spaces.
PROGRAMMING AND SITE EVALUATION [STAGE 1]:
2.1 Ascertain Client's requirements, examine site constraints & potential; and prepare a
design brief for Client's approval.
2.2 Study of existing land use in and around the project area.
2.3 Study of contextual issues, socio-cultural aspects, landscape features and built form
etc.
2.4 Study of existing infrastructure, accessibility, circulation pattern and parking.
2.5 Prepare report on site evaluation, state of existing buildings, if any ; and analysis with
basic approach to circulation, activity distribution, interconnectivity and external linkages
including rough estimate of project cost based on allowable FAR/ re-development objectives.
2.6 Assessment of impact of development/ re-development plan on the project area and its
immediate environs.
2.7 Furnish report on measures required to be taken to mitigate the adverse impact, if any,
of the existing and/ or proposed development / re-development on its immediate environs.
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 7
ARCHITECTURE
CONCEPT DESIGN [STAGE 2]:
2.8 Preparation of concept design of the area showing circulation pattern, zoning of
various land uses and relevant details, development/re-development strategy.
2.9 Assessment of utility services and their interconnectivity.
2.10 Furnish revised rough estimate of project cost based on FAR used in concept
design/re-development objectives.
2.11 Preparation of three dimensional forms in relation to open spaces, model showing the
proposal and surrounding areas.
2.12 Submission of model and Conceptual design to the Client/ statutory authorities for
approval & ensure compliance with codes, standards and legislation, as applicable and carry
out necessary changes as may be required.
DETAILED DESIGN [STAGE 3]:
2.13 Preparation of drawings showing the common facilities for circulation, parking, open
spaces and external Architectural form.
2.14 Preparation of drawings showing Architectural controls/ guidelines, features and
specifications.
2.15 Preparation of drawings showing schematic network of services.
2.16 Preparation of drawings showing landscape, street furniture and graphic signage.
2.17 Furnish modified project cost.
2.18 Furnish urban design report including implementation strategy.
2.19 Prepare detail designs of various external elements and components.
2.20 Presentations of the urban design study to the statutory authorities for approval and
ensure compliance with codes, standards and legislation, as applicable and carry out
necessary changes as may be required.
IMPLEMENTATION [STAGE 4]:
2.21 Provide Comprehensive Architectural Services with regard to Site Development

works, if assigned.
2.22 Provide Landscape Architectural Services with regard to public spaces, if assigned.
2.23 Review and certification of detailed Architectural design of each of the constituent
components for construction or development within the area under urban design/ urban
renewal before approval by statutory authorities.
EXCLUSIONS:
2.24 The above scope of work will not include any architectural details which are not
relevant to external envelope.
3 PROFESSIONAL FEES:
3.1 In consideration of the professional services rendered by the Architect, he shall be
paid professional fee and other charges in accordance with the Scale of Charges for Urban
Design/ Urban Renewal, Site Development and Landscape Architecture, as assigned.
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 8
ARCHITECTURE
3.2 Any tax levied by law, such as Service tax, etc., contingent to Professional Services
4.1 Urban Design/ Urban Renewal
done plus other charges and reimbursable expenses as agreed upon:

Acceptance of offer. stage
Stage 1
On submitting preliminary report containing
site evaluation, development/ re-development
impact assessment, feasibility study, 10% of the total fees payable
volumetric study and urban form
recommendations along with rough estimate
of project cost
Stage 2
a. On submitting concept design and already made at Stage 1.
revised rough estimate 45% of the total fees payable less payment
b. On incorporating Client's suggestions already made
and submitting model and final design at Stages 1 and 2a, to be released in two
and approval thereof from the Client / equal instalments on submission and
statutory authorities. approval.
Stage 3
a. On submitting drawings showing the

common facilities for circulation,
already made at Stage 1 to 2b.
parking, open spaces and external
Architectural form.
b. On submitting drawings showing
already made at Stages 1 to 3a.
Architectural controls, features and
specifications.
already made at Stages 1 to 3b, to be
c. On submitting drawings showing
released in two equal instalments on
schematic network of services,
submission and approval.
landscape, street furniture, graphic
signage and modified estimate of
project cost and approval thereof from
already made
the Client/ statutory authorities.
d. On submitting urban design report
Stage 4 100% of the fees payable less payment

On completion of review and certification of already made at various stages and retainer.
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 9
ARCHITECTURE
detailed
Architectural designs of each of the
constituent components
for construction or development within the
area under urban
design, before approval by statutory
authorities or on expiry
of five years after stage 3d above.
4.2 Site Development

The stages of payment for Site Development works beyond Part I shall be same as for
Comprehensive Architectural Services.
4.3 Landscape Architecture
The stages of payment for Landscape Architectural Services beyond Part I shall be same as
for Landscape Architecture.
5 EFFECTING PAYMENT TO THE ARCHITECT :

5.1 The payment due to the Architect for Urban Design/ Urban Renewal works, at
different stages, shall be computed in accordance with Scale of Charges.
5.2 The payment due to the Architect for Site Development and Landscape Architecture
works, at different stages, shall be computed in accordance with the respective services.
any of the stages based on the quantum of work done during that stage as may be mutually
agreed to between the Client and the Architect.
LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE
1 SCOPE OF WORK:
1.1 Site appraisal and suitability.

1.2 Site planning.
1.3 Landform and grading.
1.4 Surface drainage design and water management.
1.5 Irrigation design.
1.6 Open space design - hard and soft areas.
1.7 Planting design.
1.8 Landscape structures and features.
1.9 Garden Furniture design.
1.10 Illumination design.
1.11 Graphic design and signage.
1.12 Co-ordination of external services.
1.13 Periodic inspection and evaluation of works at site.
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 10
ARCHITECTURE
2 SCHEDULE OF SERVICES:
2.1 Carry out site analysis and furnish a site appraisal report with regard to the potential
of the site vis-à-vis activities.
2.2 Prepare drawings and documents to enable the Client to get done the detailed survey
and soil investigation at the site of the project.
2.3 Furnish preliminary scheme for site planning.
2.4 Prepare conceptual landscape design with reference to requirements given and prepare
rough estimate of cost on area basis.
PRELIMINARY DESIGN AND DRAWINGS [STAGE 2]:
2.5 Modify the conceptual design incorporating required changes and prepare the
preliminary drawings, sketches, etc. for the Client's approval along with preliminary estimate
of cost on area basis.
DRAWINGS FOR CLIENT'S/ STATUTORY APPROVALS [STAGE 3]:
WORKING DRAWINGS AND TENDER DOCUMENTS [STAGE 4]:

APPOINTMENT OF CONTRACTORS [STAGE 5]:
2.8 Invite, receive and analyse tenders; advise Client on appointment of contractors.
CONSTRUCTION [STAGE 6]:
construction.
2.12 Visit the site of work, at intervals mutually agreed upon, to inspect and evaluate the
Construction Works and where necessary clarify any decision, offer interpretation of the
drawings/specifications, attend conferences and meetings to ensure that the project proceeds
ARCHITECTURE
generally in accordance with the conditions of contract and keep the Client informed and
render advice on actions, if required.
Client.
2.14 Issue Certificate of Virtual Completion of Civil Works and plantation.
COMPLETION [STAGE 7]:
assist the Client in obtaining "Completion / Occupancy Certificate" from statutory
authorities, wherever required.
2.16 Issue two sets of as built drawings including services, structures and plantation.
3 PROFESSIONAL FEE :
3.1 In consideration of the professional services rendered by the Architect, he shall be paid
professional fee and other charges in accordance with the Scale of Charges.
done plus other charges and reimbursable expenses as agreed upon.

Acceptance of offer. stage.
Stage 1
estimate of cost.
Stage 2
scheme for the Client's approval along with already made at Stage 1.
the preliminary estimate of cost.
Stage 3
On incorporating Client's suggestions and
35% of the total fees less payment already
submitting drawings for obtaining approval
made at Stages 1 and 2.
from the Client/ statutory authorities, if
required.
Stage 4 45% of the total fees payable less payment
Upon statutory approval, if required and already made at Stages 1 to 3.
ARCHITECTURE
preparation of working drawings,

specifications and schedule of quantities
sufficient to prepare estimate of cost and
preparation of tender documents.
Stage 5
On inviting, receiving and analysing tenders; 55% of the total fees payable less payment
advising Client on appointment of already made at Stages 1 to 4.
contractors.
Stage 6
On submitting working drawings and details made at Stages 1 to 5.
required for commencement of work at site. 70% of the total fees payable less payment
1. On completion of 20% of the work 75% of the total fees payable less payment
already made at Stages 1 to 6b(i).
already made at Stages 1 to 6b(ii).
already made at Stages 1 to 6b(iii).
already made at Stages 1 to 6b(iv).
5. On Virtual Completion
Stage 7
drawings for issuance 100% of the fees payable less payment
of completion/ occupancy certificate by already made at various stages and retainer.
statutory authorities, wherever required and
on issue of as built drawings.
completion. The payment due to the Architect at different stages be computed on the
following basis:
5.1.1 At Retainer: On rough estimate of cost.

5.3 No deduction shall be made from the fee of the Architect on account of penalty,
RCHITECTURE
5.4 When the work is executed wholly or in part with old materials or labour or carriage
is provided by the Client, the percentage fees shall be calculated as if the work had been
5.5 The actual cost of the completed works shall include cost of execution of assigned
works, referred to in Scope of Work and also the cost of equipment & machinery such as
Pumps & Motors, etc. but excluding the cost of land.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURE
1 SCOPE OF WORK:
1.1 Site evaluation and assessment.

1.2 Interior design - space planning/ development & volumetric study.
1.3 Architectural additions and alterations.
1.4 Design of fixed items of work, loose furniture & interior related civil works.
1.5 Illumination design.
1.6 Sound and acoustic design.
1.7 Graphic design and signage.
1.8 Indoor plants cape.
1.9 Selection of materials, equipment and other interior related elements.
1.10 Integration of all Engineering services.
1.11 Periodic inspection and evaluation of works at site.
2.1 Furnish a site evaluation and analysis report with basic approach to circulation,
activity distribution, interaction and external linkages.
2.2 Analyse schedule of spaces in relation to activities and site potential.
2.3 Prepare conceptual designs with reference to requirements and prepare rough estimate
of cost on area basis.
PRELIMINARY DESIGN [STAGE 2]:
2.4 Modify the conceptual designs incorporating required changes; prepare the
preliminary drawings, interior views and schedule of finishes for the Client's approval along
with the preliminary estimate of cost on area basis.
ARCHITECTURE
DRAWINGS FOR CLIENT'S /STATUTORY APPROVAL [STAGE 3]:
WORKING DRAWINGS AND TENDER DOCUMENTS [STAGE 4]:

APPOINTMENT OF CONTRACTORS [STAGE 5]:
2.7 Invite, receive and analyse tenders, advice Client on appointment of contractors.
CONSTRUCTION [STAGE 6]:
construction.
2.11 Visit the site of work and fabrication workshop, at intervals mutually agreed upon, to
inspect and evaluate the progress of works and where necessary clarify any decision, offer
interpretation of the drawings/specifications, attend conferences and meetings to ensure that
the project proceeds generally in accordance with the conditions of contract and keep the
Client informed and render advice on actions, if required.
Client.
2.13 Issue Certificate of Virtual Completion of works.
COMPLETION [STAGE 7]:
assist the Client in obtaining "Completion/ Occupancy Certificate" from statutory authorities,
wherever required.
2.15 Issue two sets of as built drawings including services and structures.
ARCHITECTURE
3 PROFESSIONAL FEE:
3.1 In consideration of the professional services rendered by the Architect, he shall be
paid professional fee and other charges in accordance with the Scale of Charges.

Acceptance of offer. stage.
Stage 1
estimate of cost.
Stage 2
scheme for the Client's approval along with already made at Stage 1.
the preliminary estimate of cost.
Stage 3
On incorporating Client's suggestions and
submitting drawings for obtaining approval
made at Stages 1 and 2.
from the Client/ statutory authorities, if
required.
Stage 4
Upon client's approval / statutory approval
and preparation of working drawings, 45% of the total fees payable less payment
specifications and schedule of quantities already made at Stages 1 to 3.
sufficient to prepare estimate of cost and
preparation of tender documents.
Stage 5
On inviting, receiving and analysing tenders; 55% of the total fees payable less payment
advising Client on appointment of already made at Stages 1 to 4.
contractors.
Stage 6 65% of the total fees less payment already
made at Stages 1 to 5.
On submitting working drawings and details
required for commencement of work at site. 70% of the total fees payable less payment
 On completion of 20% of the work 75% of the total fees payable less payment
 On completion of 40% of the work already made at Stages 1 to 6b(i).
 On completion of 60% of the work 80% of the total fees payable less payment
 On completion of 80% of the work already made at Stages 1 to 6b(ii).
 On Virtual Completion 85% of the total fees payable less payment
already made at Stages 1 to 6b(iii).
ARCHITECTURE

already made at Stages 1 to 6b(iv).
Stage 7
drawings for issuance of completion/ 100% of the fees payable less payment
occupancy certificate by statutory already made at various stages and retainer.
authorities, wherever required and on issue of
as built drawings.

completion. The payment due to the Architect at different stages be computed on the
following basis:
5.1.1 At Retainer: On rough estimate of cost.
5.3 No deductions shall be made from the fee of the Architect on account of penalty,
5.4 When the work is executed wholly or in part with old material or labour or carriage is
provided by the Client, the percentage of fees shall be calculated as if the work had been
5.5 The actual cost of the completed works shall include cost of execution of assigned works,
referred to in Scope of Work, but excluding the cost of premises.
ARCHITECTURE
CONDITIONS OF ENGAGEMENT
RESPONSIBILITIES
REMUNERTION
LIABILITY OF ARCHITECT
CONDITIONS OF ENGAGEMENT
TERMINATION OF ENGAGEMENT
COPY RIGHT
INTERPRETATION
SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNMENTS
DISPUTES
ARBITRATION
FIGURE 2.1 – CONDITIONS OF ENGAGEMENT
ARCHITECTURE
RESPONSIBILITIES
Architect’s responsibilities are given as follows:
i. To study client’s needs and to advice, to prepare, to direct, and to coordinate design
and to surprise works executed under a building contract. The normal service
provided by architect in fulfilment of these responsibilities are as under,
ii. The employment of consultants shall be at the architect’s discretion in agreement with
the client. Where consultants are employed the architect shall be responsible for the
direction and integration of their work. Consultants shall be solely responsible for
detailed design and supervision of the work entrusted to them.
iii. The architect may also nominate specialist sub-contractors for the design and
execution of any apart of the work. They shall be responsible for the direction and
integration of their design, and for general supervision of their work.
iv. The architect must have the authority of his/her client before initiating any stage of his
duties. Except as provided in para (v) below, any material deviation, alteration,
addition to or omission from the approved design shall be made only with the
knowledge and consent of the client. The architect shall inform the client if the total
authorised expenditure or contract period are likely to be varied.
v. The architect may authorize material changes in design if they as may be necessary
for constructional reasons, provided that the client is informed without delay.
vi. The architect shall give such periodic supervision and inspection as may be necessary
to ensure that the works are being executed in general accordance with the contract.
Constant supervision does not form part of their normal duties.
vii. Where frequent or constant inspection is required a Clerk of Works shall be
employed. They shall be nominated or approved by the Architect, and be under the
Architect’s direction and control. They shall be appointed and paid by the client or
alternatively may be employed by the Architect who shall be reimbursed.
viii. Where the employment of a Resident Architect is agreed upon, they shall be
employed by the Architect who shall be reimbursed.
REMUNERATION
i. It is the duty of a member to uphold and apply the Scale of Professional Charges
adopted by the Council of Architecture. The employment of the Architect shall,
therefore, be in accordance with these conditions and the fees and charges herein shall
apply unless a higher fee and charge is agreed upon between the Architect and the
Client when the former is commissioned.
ii. Where work done by a Client results in the omission of part of the normal service, a
commensurate reduction in fees may be made by prior written agreement, provided
such agreement specifies in detail the work to be done by the Client which would
otherwise have formed part of the normal service by the Architect.
ARCHITECTURE
LIABILITY OF THE ARCHITECT
i. The Architect is liable if they fail to exercise all reasonable skill, care and diligence in
the discharge of their duties under these conditions but the aforesaid liability shall be
limited as stated hereunder:
ii. The liability of the Architect does not cover costs other than those for the
reinstatement of the work. All liability for consequential damages is excluded.
iii. The liability of the Architect expires after two years from the date of completion of
relevant part of the work.
iv. The Architect does not guarantee the work of any Contractor.
v. The architect has no liabilities whatsoever for any part of the works not designed by
them or not under their responsibilities or which have not been constructed under their
supervision.
vi. The Architect has no liability whatsoever for any damage resulting from any act of
contractors or suppliers which is not in accordance with the contract documents or the
Architect’s instructions.
vii. The Architect has no liability whatsoever for any violation of legal provisions or
rights of third parties unless these provisions or rights have been specially brought to
the notice of the architect by the Client in writing.
TERMINATION OF ENGAGEMENT
An engagement entered between the architect and the client may be terminated any time by
either party on the expiry of reasonable notice (normally three months) when the Architect
shall be entitled to remuneration in accordance with provisions contained in their agreement
with the client.
COPYRIGHT
In accordance with the provisions of the Copyright Act, copyright in all drawings and in the
work executed from them will remain the property of the Architect. Drawings and
Specifications as instruments of service are the property of the Architect whether the work for
which they are made be executed or not, and are not to be used on another work except by
agreement.
INTERPRETATION
Any question arising out of these Conditions of Engagement and Scale of professional Fees
and Charges may be referred by the Architect or the Client to the Indian Institute of
Architects for advice at any time, provided always that any difference or dispute between
them shall be determined in accordance relevant provisions.
ARCHITECTURE
SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNMENTS
The Client and the Architect each binds themselves, their partners, successors, legal
representatives and assigns to the other party to this agreement, and to the partners,
successors, legal representatives and assigns of such other party in respect to all covenants of
this agreement.
DISPUTES
Any difference or disputes may, by an agreement between the parties, be referred to the
Indian Institute of Architects for a ruling; provided always that such a ruling is sought on a
joint statement of undisputed facts and the parties undertake to accept it as final.
ARBITRATION
Where any difference or dispute arising out of these Conditions of Engagement and Scale of
professional Fees and Charges cannot be determined in accordance with interpretations cited
above it shall be referred to the arbitration of a person to be agreed upon between the parties,
or failing agreement within fourteen days after either party has given to the other a written
request, to concur in the appointment of an arbitrator, a person to be nominated at the request
of either party by the President of the Indian Institute of Architects.
LETTER OF APPOINTMENT
From: Ref:
To: Date:
Dear Sir,
We have great pleasure in appointing your firm as our architects for Comprehensive
Architectural services/ Urban Design/ Landscape Architecture/ Interior Architecture as
detailed below :
Project
Services
Fees
Project completion period
This letter of appointment together with Conditions of Engagement and Scale of Charges of
Council of Architecture, as appended herewith, shall govern the agreement. This letter is
being sent in duplicate. One copy may please be signed in token of your acceptance and
returned to us.
Thanking You,
ARCHITECTURE
Yours faithfully,
(Signature of Client)
ACCEPTED
Signature of Architect
Name of Architect
Council of Architecture's
Registration No.
Date
Place
Seal of the Firm
ARCHITECTURAL COMPETITIONS
IMPORTANCE OF ARCHITECTURAL COMPETITIONS
 Architectural Competitions have a long history, and have produced many extremely
successful buildings. They attract great public interest, and have led to the discovery of new
talent and new ideas, that could only be found by throwing an architectural project wide open
to competition.
 The Council of Architecture Competition Guidelines provide a new up to date code
that safeguards the interests of promoters and of architects, and bring the system into line
with present-day conditions
 Too many clients - the choice of an architect presents no difficulty, but to many others
the choice is not easy. The client's desire to see the sketch designs of several architects before
they commissions them, is understandable, but to ask an architect to submit a sketch design is
to ask him to do the essential creative work for which they should be properly paid. If more
than one or two architects are commissioned payment to each would be expensive.
 Architects, however, are allowed to compete against each other without charging a fee
in an open architectural competition held under Council of Architecture Guidelines.
ARCHITECTURE
 Competition Guidelines as laid by the Council of Architecture protects and safeguards

the interest of both the promoter and the competitors. While ensuring the promoter a design
of high standard, it also ensures that each competitor competes on like conditions and within
the same limitations.
 Architectural Competitions give the promoters a choice from the best viable project of
high standard with a variety of approaches. Competition brings out a wide range of ideas and
concepts and gives the promoter the choice of selecting that which fits into his specific
requirements.
 One of the principal aims of the competition is to explore hidden talents among
younger Architects. To many competitors, it often is the first step to a successful career.
 The guidelines therefore lay considerable emphasis on the mandatory requirement of
Assessors and the qualifications.
 The appointment of the Assessors should therefore be the immediate and first step the
moment the promoter decides to go in for a competition.
 The Council of Architecture, if so requested by the promoter, may suggest a panel of
names experienced in this type of project proposed, for appointment as Assessors. Their
responsibilities commence with the approval of the brief of the competition project. The
Assessor may even help to prepare the brief.
The Assessors (or the Senior Assessor) will:
1. Assist in the preparation and approval of the brief.

2. Study and understand the requirements of the Local Authorities.
3. Visit and examine the project site, if necessary.
4. Advise on the appointment of the Technical Advisers, if necessary.
5. Finalize the competition conditions.
6. Prepare the final report/award
The project brief is the most important document. The success of the competition will
depend upon the clarity and the completeness of the brief. This can be achieved by a very
close cooperation between the Promoters and the Assessors (or the Senior Assessor) in the
preparation and finalization of the brief.
TYPES OF COMPETITIONS
1. PROJECT AND IDEAS COMPETITIONS
Competitions may be either "Projects" or "Ideas" competitions or in certain circumstances a

combination of both. The aim of a project competition is to find the best solution for an actual
building project and to appoint its author to carry out the commission. Competitions of Ideas
are set as an exercise to elucidate certain aspects of architectural and town planning
problems. The winner of such a competition may not be commissioned to carry out the
project, and hence students of architecture may participate at the discretion of the promoter.
ARCHITECTURE
2. CLASSIFICATION OF COMPETITIONS
I OPEN COMPETITIONS
Competitions in which all Architects are invited to participate through an announcement by

advertisements in suitable media and through circulars which may be issued by the
promoters.
Open competitions for projects estimated at less than Rs.10, 00,000/- may be restricted to
Architects who have their main or branch office in the State of the project site.
II LIMITED COMPETITIONS FOR COMPETITIONS BY INVITATION
Competitions in which limited amount of Architects (approx. 5 to 8) selected by the promoter

on the advice of the Senior Architect Assessor or Board of Assessors, are invited to
participate. Each participant who submits his designs shall receive an honorarium.
III SPECIAL COMPETITIONS
Besides competitions described in (i) and (ii) above a competition may also combine town
planning as well as design problem, and may involve the use of industrial components or
participation of developers. In such competitions participation may be required to be limited
to professionals or group of professionals with certain definite expertise.
In such cases the competition announcement shall clearly define the field of expertise.
3. COMPETITION ORGANISATION
Competitions may be organised in one or two stages.
I SINGLE STAGE COMPETITION

In single stage competition the competition entries shall be fairly complete drawings i.e.
plans, section, elevations, etc. to a suitable scale and sufficient to explain the scheme as set
out in the competition conditions.
The designs so submitted shall be assessed by the Assessors for the award of the prizes and
the appointment of the architect.
Such competitions are recommended for small and simple project.
II TWO STAGE COMPETITIONS

In two stage competition, the first stage is for soliciting ideas and therefore the competition
entries at this stage would be limited to planning on broad basis and drawings to a suitable
scale sufficient to indicate the intentions of the competitor.
Designs submitted in the first stage shall be assessed by the Assessors for selecting a small
number of competitors (between 5 and 10). The author of these selected designs will be
ARCHITECTURE
invited to take part in the second stage of the competition, and each architect so invited would
be paid a specified sum.
In order to maintain anonymity, each competitor will be informed individually whether

he/she has been or has not been invited to participate in the second stage. Correspondence in
this respect will be the responsibility of the Promoter or Professional Adviser, if appointed. It
will also be his/her responsibility to ensure that the names of those invited and those rejected
are not revealed either to the assessor or to any person.
To ensure this anonymity the envelopes containing the names of the competitors shall be
opened by the Promoter or Professional Adviser if appointed. After the intimation has been
sent to each competitor they shall be re-sealed until the final award.
After the end of the first stage, the Board of Assessors, may, if found necessary and with the
approval of the Promoter, clarify or amplify points in the competition conditions for the
benefit of the second stage competitors. Such clarification or amplification shall not in any
way disclose directly or indirectly or even inadvertently any of the designs submitted in the
first stage to those invited for the second stage.
The period between the Assessors award for the first stage and submission of designs for the
second stage shall not exceed six months. Only under exceptional circumstances period may
be extended.
The second stage of the competition may be limited to only a part of the subject dealt with in
the first stage.
Members of the Board of Assessors shall be the same for first stage and second stage of the
competition.
The designs submitted for both the first stage and the second stage shall be exhibited and/or
published only after the final award of the second stage competition.
If any design selected for the second stage is published or exhibited before the final award of
the second stage has been declared, it will be disqualified.
Two stage competitions are recommended for town planning and for large scale or complex
project.
III REGIONAL SPECIAL CATEGORY COMPETITIONS
This type of competition is intended for small projects of charitable organisations in which
four to six local firms will compete for the appointment as the Architect.
No premiums are given and the winner shall be appointed to carry out the project.
ARCHITECTURE
COUNCIL OF ARCHITECTURE GUIDELINES FOR CONDUCTING

ARCHITECTURAL COMPETITIONS
The following guidelines are drawn up to safeguard the interests of client and competitors
and to ensure that selection of design is based on merit and it satisfies client’s requirements.
 Eligibility to compete – architects registered with COA

 Firms in which at least one partner/director is a registered architect.
 Students of a teaching institution. The qualifying examination of which is recognized
by the council. (Subject to condition that the staff member of that institution should
not be sole assessor or not more than one staff member in a jury of three.)
 Client, assessor, their associates or employees are not allowed to act as architects or
joint architects.
UNI (C) 2018. Rights reserved
PREMISE
With the increasing population yet confined amount of resources available, many
beings continue to struggle in search of a decent livelihood- a place to live, food to
eat and a medium to commute. The aspect of travel on a regular basis however lies
a similar issue for people of all social and economical grounds of a place. Public
modes of transportation manage to respond to a considerable number of affairs like
congestion on roads, pollution due to vehicles, and an economic way to commute.
Traffic congestion remains a major apprehension all around the world despite of the
progress in technological fields concerning public transportation and mixed-use
developments. So is the case of the commercial capital city of India, but what makes
it different from other cities in the world is it’s confounding number of people using
public modes to commute.
Being the only world level ‘alpha-city(1)’ of

India - MUMBAI, bears a lot of pressure as a
city staging platforms to millions of dreams,
livelihoods and lifestyles.
1. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Global_city
www.commun.xyz
THE MELTING POT : MUMBAI
Mumbai, previously known as Bombay, is the capital city to the Indian state of Maharashtra
and stands as the wealthiest city of the country. It is well-known for its diverse culture
and is considered a melting pot of several cultures and communities.
Overtaking the country capital’s population in 2013, Mumbai currently has around 21
million people residing in it, making it the most populous city in India (2016). It also is
the fourth most populous city of the world with a population density of eighty thousand
people per square mile.
More than 60% of the people in Mumbai reside in slums. Their dwellings are made up of
whatever materials are readily available or can be sourced to them at cheaper prices and
sewage pipes of large diameters turn into an aisle between slums where most of land is
either utilized by the built, or dumped with garbage. This same city also acts as a home
to the highest number of millionaires and billionaires of the country.
It has the highest GDP (Gross Domestic Product) in the South, West and Central Asian
www.commun.xyz
TRANSPORTATION IN THE CITY
The city of Mumbai with a present population of over 21 million generates more than 17 million trips in a day. Although About 80% commuters use public
unlike other metropolitan cities, majority of Mumbaikars depend on local trains and buses as their means of egress. means of egress.
With less than 20% of the commuters opting private cars or taxis, Mumbai might seem a very citizen friendly city, but
it's not! Even this minor portion accounts to millions of vehicles on road, leading to congestion and longer traffic jams.
Local trains cater to about 8 million
The rail and road network expansion failed to keep pace with the traffic growth resulting in traffic problems. passengers a day
Mumbai has the most successful local-rail network connection in terms of the number of people it is serving to. The
Suburban Railway is an offshoot of the first passenger railway to be built by the British in India, and is also the oldest
Over 50% of the total rail users of
railway system in Asia. This network has the highest passenger density in the whole world. India (in one day) belong to Mumbai.
1853 1992
SUBURBAN
LOCAL RAIL
www.commun.xyz
DESIGN SANCTION OF LAUNCH OF COMPLETION OF SPECIAL RAIL
(Monorail) (Metrorail) (Suburban Rail) PROBLEM THE PROJECT THE RAIL CONSTRUCTION FOR WOMEN
www.commun.xyz
THE CURRENT SITUATION
The existing system though caters to millions of on falling-off a moving train of which nearly 27%
Mumbaikars on a daily basis in a very cost-efficient and succumbed to death and many survived but with
convenient way, the issues attached to it are worth permanent injuries.
worrying about- safety being one of the most prioritized The other key reason behind deaths occuring are of
aspects over those related to comfort and cost. With those who were crossing or trespassing near the
an increasing number of users every year, the trains get railway tracks. This tolls to a higher number of deaths
overcrowded more and more, leading to higher compared to people falling off the train. A few even died
possibilities of deaths caused by falling off a moving of an electric shock from the open wires running above
train and stampede on-board and in the stations. A the train, when they had to climb on the top in an
total of around 26000 incidents have been reported attempt to travel with no space left inside the train. Lesser the over-crowding, happier the network.
1853 1992 1993 2003 2005 2006 2008
6.6M
5.8M 7.4M Expected growth in the upcoming decade
5.1M 7.2M
6.2M
LOCAL RAIL 3769
3423
1838 2713 2634 3139 3672 3312
0
www.commun.xyz
DEATH TOLL NUMBER OF DEATHS IN DESIGN SANCTION OF LAUNCH OF COMPLETION OF
LOCAL RAIL IN SUBURBAN ATTACKS IN 2005 (Suburban Rail) PROBLEM THE PROJECT THE RAIL
www.commun.xyz
2030 - A COMPLEX SYSTEM? OR A SMART SOLUTION?
The increasing death toll is an indicator of the over-the-limit utilisation of Mumbai

local. A number of proposals have been and are being made in order to minimize, if not
eradicate, this problem of congestion and those coming attached to it. The mono-rail
and metro networks are two such cases where a new system (to the city) has been
launched.
As discussed, transportation in Mumbai has maintained its epitome of a public friendly

interface and continues to prevail despite of the issues questioning its current stage. The
solution to these issues can open in 3 directions of which any might lead to a practical
outcome as illustrated.
OUTPUT
The modification of the current system needs to be assessed and acted upon keeping
in mind that it has been happening every now and then, yet the on-going issues continue
to prevail.
Merging few current ones along with introduction to a new system might have an
advantage in terms of efficiency by taking support of the tried-and-tested existing
systems.
A new system altogether will provide a blank canvas on which the city can be interpreted
and redesigned accordingly.
www.commun.xyz
THE DESIGN PROBLEM
The challenge here is to propose a new system ‘Hyper
Local’ for the commuters, and express the vision of how
the city might appear in 2030. It is a new network that
caters to existing and upcoming issues of Mumbai - and
is not limited to commuting, but more.
Will your design drive more people to use the public

modes of transportation? Or will it generate a balance
between private and public modes making sure both
congestion and over-crowding are taken care of?
While tackling these situations, important factors like the

mode of transport, its capacity, frequency, halt
points and how they reshape themselves need to be
addressed in a precise yet explanatory manner. It might
also include the impact on neighboring facilities and how
its interdependency with live, work and urban contexts
turn out.
The underlying motive is to capture a conceptual

picture of how the ‘hyperlocal’ responds to the issues
mentioned above and overall Mumbai. The major focus
needs to remain on articulation of these in a conceptual
manner through text, illustrations, photographs or
graphics.
www.commun.xyz
www.commun.xyz
TYPOLOGY AT AN URBAN SCALE
Does one single solution cater to the entire city? Well that depends on the scale and the way its dealt. Any typology set
on how the proposed system will be accessed and operated is defined by or derived from a narrative that includes the
issue(s)- its occurrence, possible solutions and impact on surrounding aspects.
Based on the above mentioned, the solutions may lead but not limited to three types:
CHAIN MODIFIED SPECIFIC

A A A A A A A A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A A6 A B A C B A C
A¹
Universal Solution Modulated Solutions Tailormade Solutions

Fixed Scale Adjustable scale Changing scale parameters
City as a context Responds to micro-sites Micro-sites as priority
www.cowmwm
wu.unn.xfuysze.xyz
SITE
As a design challenge, the entire rail network of Mumbai
connecting the local stations acts as the underlying site.
The difference here is a patch of land that runs through the

entire city connected from end to end. An intervention like
this can heal, build, enrich the entire city within.
But to set a prototype for addressing common issues and

possible outcomes at a practical level, the site selected is
the link between stations of Andheri and Vile Parle on the
Western Line of Mumbai suburban network. This patch of
the land is inclusive of both the stations.
www.commun.xyz
PROTOTYPE
ANDHERI
VILE PARLE
Andheri stands as one of the busiest nodes of the network, geographically located in the middle of Mumbai's dense urban fabric on the western side. This node handles about 600,000
commuters a day. Vile Parle, in comparison, is a smaller node in terms of area, located between Santacruz and Andheri- two very prominent segments of the city. The given set of
stations are designated as a prototype of how the larger outcome will look like on the site. The overall design approach can be top down or bottom up - but their test as a new solution
to the issues of Mumbai will be benchmarked here.
www.commun.xyz
LEVELS OF INTERVENTION
Considering the open endedness and vast nature of the problem we propose to express
your ideas in three levels - for having a comparable dimension to the problem.
Network Level Prototype Level Detail Level

This level shall reflect how the network works at a city This level shall reflect how the big idea scales to the This sector talks about user / architectural / section
level - and small highlights of how it can help building site - or can talk about how the smaller ideas at site level decisions taken that supports ideas at site level.
a better city of tomorrow. (This can be demonstrated help frame the network level. Consider delivering a If the ideation begins at this stage consider building
by a master plan level discussion and specific zones solution at Andheri - Vile Parle (node and link), which upon the site and network propositions centered
where it excels) extrapolates to other nodes as well. around this level.
www.commun.xyz
SUBMISSION / TIMELINES
The submission is expected in a maximum of 1-A2 and 8-A3 presentation boards in digital format (JPEG - RGB Individual/Team Participation
- 120ppi). Hand rendered drawings (Scanned in 120ppi - JPEG) as well as use of digital mediums are allowed. If
abstractions play a role in contributing to the design, they are expected to be laid clearly in the narration, with the help Both Individual and Team Participations are allowed in
of visual or verbal medium. this competition. A team can consist of maximum 5
members. In case there are 5 or more entries from an
institute, kindly refer to the ‘Institutuional Participation’
1. There are three obligatory items that need to be 4. After successfully completing the payment, we section.
submitted in all the entries, failing which the entry may advise you to make the submission consistently , time
be disqualified/rejected by our server while sorting the to time, alongside your progress of design.
entries:
a. Maximum of 8 A3 presentation boards and a. You can explore all the features of the submission
1 A2 Cover Board in digital format (120ppi). (JPEG portal correctly, and capitalize their potential.
- RGB).
b. You can avoid last minute errors caused in the
b. A minimum of 8 Questions formulated/answered submission of entries
in the FAQ. (Answers shall not exceed more than
250-300 words each) c. You can see how your entry is building up
gradually on the submission window and take peer
c. Cover Image of min. size 1500 x 600 px. in aspect reviews on the same.
ratio 2.5:1 should be added in the submission.
Dates / Fees:
2. Additionally participants can upload their individual Last Date of Submission: 15th June ’18 | 00:00 GMT
images used in the sheets (essential images - eg. Floor Result Declaration: 15th Aug ’18 | 00:00 GMT
plans, Explanatory diagrams, Construction Details,
Drawings, etc.) for referencing purposes on the platform 3.Please do not include your name or any Indian Nationals
composed into images. These images should not be other mark of
Early Registrations Close: 27th March ‘18
more than 15nos. in quantity composed in similar A3 identification on the sheets or additional Professional (25$ + Taxes) | Students (15$ + Taxes)
images (120ppi - JPEG - RGB) format. These images images.
will not count in evaluation. Standard Registrations Close: 1st May ‘18
Professional (35$ + Taxes) | Students (25$ + Taxes)
www.commun.xyz
Late Registrations Close: 5th June ‘18 Foreign Nationals
Professional (60$ + Taxes) | Students (40$ + Taxes)
Early Registrations Close: 27th March ‘18
Professional (60$ + Taxes) | Students (35$ +
Taxes)
Standard Registrations Close: 1st May

‘18
Taxes)
Late Registrations Close: 5th June ‘18

Taxes)
www.commun.xyz
A2 - Cover board (Details): FAQ Section (Submission):
This section of submission talks about how to compose the A2 Cover Board. The rest This is the most important section of the submission page where you discus all the
of maximum 8 x A3 boards can be composed on your own requirements. underlying processes of your project in detail. Tips to formulate FAQ: Formulate and
answer at least 8-10 Questions. Don’t answer any question more than 300 Words. Use
Specifications: A2 (420mmx594mm) at 120ppi x 1No. rich text formatting / Visuals to make your answers more appealing.
Upper Half: A table consisting of three columns where the 3 levels of submission
(Network, Prototype and Detail scales) are summarized in one column each, having the
relevant points for comparison stated.
Legibility (Submission):
The submissions will be displayed + evaluated as a web presentation, hence screen
Lower Half: An image (can be a map, drawing, or any sort of graphical depiction of the
legibility plays a key role in a good web appeal on screen, also guides how audience -
city) that gives an overview of your project, needs to be presented. The layout for the
jury interacts with your entry.
following sheet is given below:
This can be achieved by various methods, and are discussed in the website uni.xyz
submission guidelines. This guide discusses tips which may help you to generate
entries that are powerful web presentations that help you to communicate your ideas
effectively.
Student / Professional:
315 mm
Student category is eligible for enrolled scholars who are in ANY bachelors programme
around the world. (Also students may be asked to provide enrollment proof during
competition registration and further submission stages).
594 mm
Professionals beyond bachelor’s degree are eligible for professional category

participation.
Institutional Participation:
Any Institute, from which 5 or more teams are willing to participate, can email to
register their institution on commun@uni.xyz with the details of participants for a
Image
special pricing on Institutional participation basis.
Submission Best Practices:

To learn about the best submission tactics on web and screen based presentation,
follow these given links: 1. Uni Submission Guidelines 2. Uni Tutorial Video
420mm
www.commun.xyz
REWARDS
2000$
Winner + Trophy
(Common for Students
and Professionals)
+ Certificate
+ Bragging rights of Commun ‘HYPER-LOCAL’
Publication
Champion at UNconference’18
1000$
Runner-up + Trophy
(Students’ category) + Certificate of Merit
1000$
Runner-up + Trophy
(Professionals’ category) + Certificate of Merit
500$
People’s Choice + Trophy
(Online Polling) + Certificate of Merit
300$ (each) Best Best Best

Detail Level
3 Category + Trophy
Mentions
10 Honorary A Medal, Certificate of Merit, and a copy of

Mentions our Bi-annual digest of Commun
www.commun.xyz
To participate now, visit
Reach us at:
http://commun.xyz/hyperlocal.html commun@uni.xyz
Photo Credits: Rajarshi MITRA UNI (C) 2018. Rightswww.commun.xyz

reserved
ABOUT THE COMPETITION
Global commerce and the unprecedented demand for travel and have resulted in the proliferation of airports around the
world. In their short history, terminal buildings have been criticized for employing generic architectural forms that are
unapologetically disconnected from their context and cultural identity. Technical complexity and functional design have
often taken precedence over quality and comfort for users.
In less than a century, the airport has emerged as a new architectural typology that is as important as other large-scale
public buildings such as museums, libraries, temples, and courthouses. Airports are among the most complex and
highly frequented transportation hubs, but they are also increasingly important places for work, commerce, recreation,
and culture. The rapid evolution of airports necessitates the incorporation of the latest developments in technology,
design, and social trends around the globe.
ELIGIBILITY
The Fentress Global Challenge (FGC) competition is open to graduate and undergraduate students who are currently
pursuing architecture or engineering degrees in an accredited university program, as well as recent graduates (within
the last four years) with a degree in architecture or engineering. Students must provide proof of active enrollment status:
a scanned copy of their student ID and current course schedule. Recent graduates must provide a scanned copy of
their diploma.
GUIDELINES
Participants of the (FGC) are encouraged to re-envision the terminal building in the year 2075. Concepts will integrate
Fentress’ Touchstone 2: Use context to create identity. Context is more than an intellectual consideration of the history
or physical appearance of a neighborhood, city or state, and it’s more than the way new will live with old. Context draws
on the senses and memories that define a place and make it unique. Context grows from community, and people
respond to it.
Based in logic, beauty and humanism, our Eight Touchstones of Design™ form the foundation for our approach to public
architecture and guide our “patient search” to discover the art inside.
More on Fentress’ Eight Touchstones of Design
1
In line with the speculative nature of the competition, participants should seek to improve every dimension of the airport
terminal building. All entries should delve into one or more broad topic related to airport architecture and the future of
aviation such as mobility, urbanization, globalization, technology, flexibility, security, project feasibility, and passenger
experience in 2075.
Designs must center on one of these airports, or one of comparable size:
ATLANTA GA, US (ATL)

BEIJING, CN (PEK)
LONDON, GB (LHR)
CHICAGO IL, US (ORD)
TOKYO, JP (HND)
LOS ANGELES CA, US (LAX)
PARIS, FR (CDG)
DALLAS/FORT WORTH TX, US (DFW)
FRANKFURT, DE (FRA)
HONG KONG, HK (HKG)
The submission must take into account existing runways and land restrictions of the chosen airport. Participants should
create a new airport concept that replaces current terminal structures.
EVALUATION CRITERIA
Use clear, concise language to convey ideas, key points, and design solutions. Photographs, diagrams, renderings,
animations, collages or other visualizations are encouraged to help explain the concept, respecting the guidelines
previously described. Please label drawings.
CREATIVE APPROACH
The design approach is innovative and inspiring. Both the concept and design solution are presented through unique
and compelling graphics and other media.
RESPONSE TO SITE
The design honors the physical attributes of the site’s context and culture. The overall design strategy matches the
global and local demographic requirements of the location. Again, use context to create identity.
SUSTAINABILITY
The design considers the airport’s environmental impact and energy use. The overall design strategy considers and
responds to notions of social sustainability, occupant lifestyle, and well-being.
FUNCTIONALITY
The planning and building organization is clear and appropriate. The design solution contains a defined and well-
articulated structural, technical, and constructible rationale.
2
AWARDS
1ST PLACE – US$10,000 Cash + Event
The top prize includes US$10,000 cash and the opportunity to accompany Curt Fentress to a prestigious architectural
event where you will receive your award. Airfare, lodging, and entrance fee will be paid for by Fentress Architects, not
to exceed US$5,000. Winners are responsible for obtaining necessary visas and paperwork. If entering as a group, the
monetary prize and attendance at the architectural event will be distributed equally.
2ND PLACE – US$3,000
3RD PLACE – US$2,000
2 PEOPLE’S CHOICE AWARDS – US$1,000
FGC FELLOWS
Winners of the competition will be elevated to a Fentress Global Challenge Fellow. Of the thousands of entries Fentress
Global Challenge (FGC) has garnered since debuting in 2011, up to four teams earn top honors each year. In 2018, FGC
Fellows was created to recognize a select and dynamic group of past award winners.
Fellows are chosen for their:

 Engagement in and elevation of the discourse on public architecture
 Active participation in mentorship programs
 Demonstration of a growing commitment to their community
FGC supports Fellows by facilitating events and other forums that afford networking opportunities and access to not only
peers, but also industry leaders looking to connect, share ideas and discuss projects. Fellows are also invited to sit on
future FGC award juries and collaborate on papers and other thought pieces.
COMPETITION SCHEDULE
Competition Announcement May 31, 2018
Design Submission Deadline May 31, 2019
Shortlist Announcement July 1, 2019
Winners Announcement July 29, 2019
Architectural Event Fall 2019
SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
By the end of the day on May 31, 2019 (23:00 GMT), participants must register and upload competition materials to their
profile page on www.fentressglobalchallenge.com.
The official language of the competition is English and the official unit of measurement is the inch.
The design concept shall be submitted in PDF format and include:

 Up to 8 pages in 11-inch x 17-inch format, landscape orientation
3
 Each of the 8 pages must have a page number and the team name
 File must be named as follows: 2018/2019_team name_design concept name.pdf
 The submission must have a design concept title, a 400-word description, and a brief description of the team or
individual submitting
 Supporting diagrams, plans, sections and perspectives are encouraged
 The digital file may be no larger than 100mb
 In a separate PDF, please include student IDs of the group members
Plagiarism and/or cheating will result in disqualification.
JURY
The Competition will be judged in two stages by two panels of distinguished experts. The first-round jury will select
the top 15 designs for the final jury to review. The final jury will select the three finalists. Members of the jury will be
announced early autumn and will include airport directors, futurists, sustainability experts, airport architects, and the
Fentress Fellows. Voting for the People’s Choice Award will take place on the Fentress Architects Facebook page and
will include only the shortlisted submissions. The two submissions with the most “likes” will win a prize of US$1,000.
GENESIS OF THE FENTRESS GLOBAL CHALLENGE

The Fentress Global Challenge is an annual international design competition that was created in 2011 to engage
students worldwide in the exploration of future possibilities in public architecture.
It was after Curtis Fentress, FAIA, RIBA, was honored with the 2010 AIA Thomas Jefferson Award that the idea for the
Global Challenge was conceived. The award is the AIA’s highest honor for public architecture, and in many ways, the
Fentress Global Challenge represents the firm’s commitment to continuing the vision of that award—to further advance
the pursuit of innovative design in public architecture. The competition generated more global interest than imagined,
with over 1000 student registrations from 77 different countries in the first year alone.
RULES AND REGULATIONS

By participating in the Fentress Global Challenge, participant accepts these rules and regulations and all other terms
related to the Fentress Global Challenge.
 No changes are allowed once an entry is submitted unless approved by Fentress Architects.
 Participant agrees that, if requested by Fentress Architects, he or she will supply high resolution images for
marketing, printing, or exhibition.
 All materials submitted for the competition must be the participant’s original work. It is the participant’s sole
responsibility to ensure that the work submitted does not infringe upon the intellectual property rights of any
third-party, including but not limited to copyright, trademark, and design rights. Fentress Architects shall not be
responsible for participant’s infringement of any third-party intellectual property rights. Participant shall indemnify
4
and hold harmless Fentress Architects against any claims related to third-party intellectual property rights regardless
of whether said infringement was known, unknown, or should have been known by participant.
 Participant agrees that Fentress Architects and competition sponsors are granted the non-exclusive reproduction
rights to all entries for Fentress Architects’ advertising, promotion, exhibition, print publication, and internet purposes
directly relating to the competition. Fentress Architects shall have no responsibility for the unauthorized use of
entrant’s works by any third party, including but not limited to the sponsors.
 All published and online media, including social media, related to the Fentress Global Challenge must be reviewed
and approved by Fentress Architects.
 No prize transfer, assignment, or substitution by winners is permitted. If a prize (or part of a prize) is unavailable,
Fentress Architects, in its discretion, reserves the right to substitute the original prize (or that part of the prize) with an
alternative prize to the equal monetary value and/or specification, unless to do so would be prohibited by law.
 Entrants agree that personal data, especially name and address, may be processed, shared, and otherwise used for
the purposes and within the context of the contest and any other purposes outlined in these official rules. The data
may also be used by Fentress Architects in order to verify the participant’s identity, postal address, and telephone
number or to otherwise verify the participant’s eligibility to participate in the contest. Participants have the right to
access, review, rectify, or cancel any personal data held by Fentress Architects by writing to Fentress Architects,
c/o Fentress Global Challenge, 421 Broadway, Denver CO 80203, USA. Fentress Architects will use personal data
exclusively for the purposes stated herein.
 Fentress Architects reserves the right to verify the validity and originality of any entry and/or entrant (including an
entrant’s identity and address) and to disqualify any entrant who submits an entry that is not in accordance with
these official rules or who tampers with the entry process. Failure by Fentress Architects to enforce any of its rights at
any stage does not constitute a waiver of those rights.
 Fentress Global Challenge rules and regulations are subject to change without notice.
 If for any reason the contest is not capable of running as planned, due to infection by computer virus, denial of
service attacks, tampering, unauthorized intervention, fraud, technical failures, or any other causes beyond the
control of Fentress Architects that corrupt or affect the administration, security, fairness, integrity, or proper conduct
of this contest, Fentress Architects reserves the right, at its sole discretion, to disqualify any individual(s) who tamper
with the entry process, and/or to cancel, terminate, modify, or suspend the contest. If Fentress Architects elects to
cancel or terminate the contest, Fentress Architects will not retain any rights to the submitted designs.
 Any claims related to participation in the competition must be brought in Denver, Colorado, USA, and will be
governed by the laws of the State of Colorado. This contest is void where prohibited.
QUESTIONS & ANSWERS

All information can be found at www.fentressglobalchallenge.com.
Additional questions should be emailed to: info-fgc@fentressarchitects.com
5
ETHICS
[UNIT III - TENDER & CONTRACT]

ARCHITECTURE
TOPICS:
TENDER
 Definition -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 02
 Types of Tenders ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 02
 Open and closed tenders---------------------------------------------------------------------- 04
 Conditions of tender ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 05
 Tender Notice --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 05
 Tender documents ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 06
 Concept of EMD ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 08
 Submission of tender------------------------------------------------------------------------- 09
 Tender scrutiny ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
 Tender analysis ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
 Recommendations ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
 Work order ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 12
 E-tendering (advantages, procedure, conditions) ---------------------------------------- 13
CONTRACT
 Definition -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21
 Contract agreement - its necessity --------------------------------------------------------- 22
 Contents (Articles of Agreement, Terms and Conditions, Bills of Quantities and
specifications, Appendix) --------------------------------------------------------------- 34/43
 Certification of Contractors Bills at various stages-------------------------------------- 39
 New trends in project formulation and different types of execution (BOT, DBOT,
BOLT, BOO, etc.),Execution of projects & The process (Expression of interest,
Request for Proposal, Mode of Evaluation of Bids, Award of work)----------------- 40
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 1
ARCHITECTURE
TENDER
 DEFINITION
A tender or a quotation is a written offer to execute a work or to supply materials required for
construction of a facility within a stipulated time under specified conditions of tender or
quotation.
 TYPES OF TENDERS
Tenders based on economic classification
1. Tenders based on measurement (item rate and % rate)
2. Lump sum tenders
3. Cost plus fee tenders
4. Turkey tenders
5. Tenders based on Build-own-operate and transfer (BOOT) concept.
6. Tenders based on Labour component and miscellaneous material required for the
work.
i. Fixed price tenders without provision for escalation: Major risk is borne by the
contractor.
ii. Fixed price tenders with provision for escalation: Risk is limited to difference
in market rates and factors considered in escalation formulate.
1. Tenders based on measurement (item rate and % rate)
The tender form contains all items of work included in bill of quantities excluding lump sum
items and those items which are to be executed through another agency.
In percentage rate tender, the owner gives both rates and quantities and amount. The
contractor quotes % above or at par or % below the estimated cost.
2. Lump sum tenders
The tenderer quotes a fixed price. However, if the quote is varied, it involves contractual
problems and methodology to arrive at the rates for addition, deletion and alterations would
be necessary and it is to be built in tender document. This is to facilitate release of interim
and final payments.
3. Cost plus fee tenders
Cost + (%) of total cost with or without a ceiling cost + fixed fee cost + incentive fee.
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 2
ARCHITECTURE
4. Tenders based on turnkey concept

In this type of contract, contractors take full responsibilities for design, construction,
commissioning of the facilities. The scope of the facility is described in detail and a fixed
lump sum price is paid to the contractor. There may or may not be a provision for escalation.
5. Tenders based on Build-Own-Operate and Transfer (BOOT) concept
It is adopted for infrastructure projects (highways, bridges, airports, water supply and
sewerage projects) Private sector is involved in these projects. Entrepreneur invests, builds,
and maintains these structures, they collect toll for a specific period based on approved tariff.
6. Tenders based on Design-Finance-Build-Own-Operate and Transfer (DFBOOT)
concept
This is a concession contract. The project is based on the granting of a concession by the
principal, usually a Government to a entrepreneur (known as the concessionaire) who is
responsible for design, financing, construction, operating and maintaining the facility over a
period of concession before finally transferring the facilities at no cost to the principal, as a
fully operational facility.
7. Tenders based on Labour component and miscellaneous materials required for
the work
In this type of work, the owner supplies all the materials and the contractor provides only the
labour component, i.e. not just labour but also all the required plant and machinery required
for construction work. They are responsible for execution of work. Payments are restricted to
labour charges only. This contract at the tender stage can be based on square meter/ cubic
meter of construction for the entire work. It is suitable for all types of buildings, extensions
work, alterations and repair of works.
8. Other works
Piece work or days’ work cannot be strictly classified as tenders. They do not involve
security deposit or penalty as they do not involve large sums of money.
9. Day work
This method of execution is good for small works, which cannot be measured or valued, (e.g.
decorative work, craftwork, artwork, etc.). Payment for the same shall be decided on the basis
of site observation plus reasonable profit.
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 3
ARCHITECTURE
10. Tender based on demolition concept

This involves demolition of existing building/ buildings completely and removal of the debris
safely away from the site. The contractor takes away all the materials that are salvages from
building and pays for the same to the owner.
11. Consultancy Assignments
Consultancy is a service and not like a work’s contract. They should be selected based on
professional capacity desired, experience in similar type of tasks, by advertising and then
shortlisting for two cover system.
12. Proof consultant
Least cost option may not result in service expected. Engineering is a vast field and with
many branches and they may not have in-house professionals. They have to be engaged for a
specific period and circumstances. Proof consultancy system has no controversial provisions.
Both main and proof consultants should work in cohesion without their internal ego
problems.
Selection of consultants is based on the following criteria:
 Quality based selection (QBS): adopted for highly specialized assignments such as
urban master plan and finance sector reforms.
 Best expert advice: feasibility and structural engineering in major projects, such as
dams, etc.
 Assignments which can substantially be carried out in different ways (management
advice and sector in policy study).
 Selection under Fixed Budget (FBS): For simple and precisely defined assignments.
 Selection on Basis of Least Cost (LCS): Adopted for standard or routine nature
assignments (audits, design of non-complex engineering works).
 Selection Based on Consultant’s Qualification (CQS): For small assignments where
evaluation of competitive proposal is not justified.
Consultants are paid on-job basis, lump sum basis, on0call basis, or on-retainer ship basis
depending on situation and considering several factors.
 OPEN AND CLOSED TENDERS
An open tendering process is an invitation to tender by public advertisement. There are no
restrictions placed on who can submit a tender, however, suppliers are required to submit all
required information and are evaluated against the stated selection criteria.
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 4
ARCHITECTURE
When a tender is called out by private invitation, the tenders are opened in the presence of the
owner or committee members. The contractors are generally not asked to remain present at the
time of opening of tenders. This is known as ‘closed tender’.
 CONDITIONS OF TENDER
1. Rebate on prompt payment of
(a) Running bills
(b) Final bills and
(c) Settlement of rates for variation items
2. Validity of tenders
3. Secured advance on perishable items
4. Secured advance up to 90% in lieu of 75%
5. Steel to be measured and paid as per actual weight
6. Water and construction power to be made available
7. Composite work to be awarded and not in parts
8. Stipulated materials to be supplied in time or permitted to procure from market with
prior approval and cost difference to be reimbursed
 TENDER NOTICE
NIT (notice inviting tenders) should be clear, brief, and should contain the following salient
points. Besides the brief press notice, a detailed NIT is appended to contract documents.
1. Brief description of the work on perusal of items and contractor will decide whether
to tender for this work or not by considering type of work, value of work, time given
for completion, location, present work load on hand.
2. Estimated cost put to tender
3. Period completion of work
4. Earnest money deposit
5. Cost of tender documents
6. Eligibility criteria for tendering
7. Production of documents for obtaining blank tender documents
8. Last date for issue of blank tender forms
9. Place and period of issues of tender documents
10. Last date for receipt of tenders and places of submission
11. Date, time, and place of opening of tenders
12. Validity of tenders ….. days
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 5
ARCHITECTURE
13. Client reserves a right to reject or to accept any tender without assigning any reason
 TENDER DOCUMENTS
1. Brief press Notice and NIT in elaborate form
2. General Conditions of Contract (GCC)
Brief summary of GCC adopted by Central PWD is given below:
Clause 1 – Performance Guarantee
The contractor shall submit an irrevocable Performance Guarantee of … (5%) of the tendered
amount in addition to other deposits mentioned elsewhere in the contract for their proper
performance of the contract agreement valid up to stipulated date of completion + 60 days.
1. A Security Deposit
Deduction @ 5% gross of each running bills till the sum along with the sum already
deposited as EMD, will amount to security deposit of 5% of the tendered value of the work.
 Cl 7: Payment of interim bills: For work done exceeding Rs.20, 000 based on
certification.
 Cl 9: Payment of Final bill:
i. If the tendered value of the work is up to Rs.15 lakh 3 months.
ii. If the tendered value of the work exceeds Rs.15 lakh 6 months
 Cl 10: Materials to be supplied by Government: Stipulates the quantum, place of
issue, and the rates to be charged are given in relevant schedule of the contract
document.
 Cl 10 B: Payment of Advances:
i. Secured advance
ii. Mobilisation advance
iii. Plant & machinery and shuttering material advance
 Cl 10 C: Payment on Account of increase in prices/wages due to statutory orders.
 Cl 10 CA: Payment due to variation in prices of materials after receipt of tenders
 Cl CC: Payment due to increase/decrease in prices/wages (excluding material
covered under CL 10 CA after receipt of tender for works).
 Cl 12: Deviations/variations extent and pricing
 Cl 12.1: Additional cost
 Cl 12.2: Deviations, extra items and pricing
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 6
ARCHITECTURE
2. Extra Items
a. If the market rate for the substituted item so determined is more than the market rate
of the agreement item (to be substituted), the rate payable to the contractor for the
substituted item shall be the rate for the agreement item (to be substituted), so
increased to the extent of the difference between the market rates of substituted item
and the agreement item (to be substituted).
Substituted Items
b. If the market rate for the substituted item so determined is less than the market rate of
the agreement item (to be substituted), the rate payable to the contractor for the
substituted item shall be the rate for the agreement item (to be substituted) so
decreased to the extent of the difference between the market rates of substituted item
and the agreement item (to be substituted).
 Cl 13: Foreclosure of contract due to abandonment or reduction in scope of work.
 Cl 17: Contractor liable for damages, defects during maintenance period
 Cl 25: Settlement of disputes and Arbitrations
 Cl 45: Release of Security Deposit after labour clearance.
3. Special Conditions of Contract (SCC)
4. Pro-forma for Bill of Quantities (BOQ)
5. Tender Drawings (TD): To enable the contractor to understand the scope of work
6. Specifications: Specification embraces endless details. It should be as simple as
possible, be exact, and be capable of verification. It should be such that a number of
vendors and sub-contractors can meet it so as to have sufficient competition. Legally,
it forms an integral part of the construction contract. Specification shall mean the
technical specifications forming a part of the contract and such other schedules and
drawings as may be mutually agreed up on. Specifications are the most detailed
method of describing requirements. Specifications play an important role in the search
for the right quality and the right value. They also assist in resolving the design
conflicts which exist between engineering, manufacturing, marketing and
procurement.
Sub – Contractor: Contractor sub-lets part of the work for execution with prior
approval of owner. Contract conditions will be same as those applicable to main
contractor.
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 7
ARCHITECTURE
Particular specifications: Besides general specifications particular specifications

stipulated for this work are to be compiled with (use of local materials, etc.)
7. Form of Agreement
8. Formats and Statements: Various formats and statements required for the contract
are appended. Some of them are listed below:
i. Safety code
ii. Model rules for the protection of health and sanitary arrangements
iii. Contractor’s labour regulations
iv. Pro-forma of registers
v. Sketch of cement go down
vi. Bank guarantee format
vii. Performance bond. As regards contents of tender document in private sector the
following items should be furnished by the owner:
viii. Press notice
ix. NIT in detail
x. Conditions of contract relating to:
a. Performance guarantee
b. Security deposit
c. Payment of running & final bill
d. Escalation clause
e. Method of payment for variation items
f. Dispute resolution clause
g. Validity of tenders
h. Payment of advances
i. Time limit for releasing Performance guarantee & Security deposit
j. Defect liability period
k. Any other stipulation relevant to this work
 CONCEPT OF EMD
- It is the amount of money to be deposited along with the tender document to the
department by the contractors quoting a tender. This money is a guarantee against the
refusal of any contractor to take up the work after the acceptance of their tender. In
case of refusal, this amount is forfeited.
- EMD of contractors whose tenders are not accepted will be refunded.
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 8
ARCHITECTURE
- 1% - 2% of the estimated cost of work is the Earnest Money Deposit.

 SUBMISSION OF TENDER
Construction bidding is the process of submitting a proposal (tender) to undertake, or

manage the undertaking of a construction project. The process starts with a cost estimate
from blueprints and material take offs.
The tender is treated as an offer to do the work for a certain amount of money (firm price), or
a certain amount of profit (cost reimbursement or cost plus). The tender, which is submitted
by the competing firms, is generally based on a bill of quantities, a bill of approximate
quantities or other specifications which enable the tenders to attain higher levels of accuracy,
the statement of work.
Pre- bid conference
For specialised works and major works, owners convene a pre-bid conference at about half of
the bidding time given to tenderers. It is held to confirm both parties understanding of what is
required and what is offered. Bidders are expected to visit the site and study tender
documents prior to attending this conference. Bidders are given an opportunity to seek
clarification on scope, stipulation, constrains, time frame for completion and further
assistance required from owner, etc. All important provisions made in the tender documents
are explained to tenderers. If any change is considered necessary as a result of pre-bid
conference, it is made exclusively through issuance of corrigenda which becomes a part of
the tender document. The minutes of the pre-bid conference is circulated to all bidders who
have responded to tender invitation. The conference helps in the projection of realistic bids
by the tenderers. Since clarifications are given to bidders prior to submission of bids, bid
evaluation would be easy for the owner’s team. For best results, owner and his consultant
should be fully prepared and empowered to answer the questions raised by the bidders.
Bid rates
Before finalizing bid rates, contractor is required to visit the site, study tender documents and
to do market survey for assessing prevailing rates of required materials. In practice, factors
such as owner’s promptness in making payments and giving decisions will have a reflection
on bid rates. All bidders will work out bid rates considering market rates of materials, labour
and hire charges, contractor’s profits and overheads. Provisions are made for contingencies to
cover unforeseen items and slight increase in scope of work, etc.
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 9
ARCHITECTURE
MARKET RATES OF
MATERILAS, LABOURS & HIRE
CHARGES OF MACHINERY
CONTRACTOR'S PROFIT
BID RATE
OVERHEADS
CONTIGENCIES
FIGURE 3.1 COMPOSITIONS OF BID-RATES
Contractor’s Profit
It reflects rate of return on his investment. It is affected when work is delayed, claims are
disallowed and when escalation is more than that reimbursed by the owners. If overhead
increase, profit is reduced. It is generally a practice in private sector to provide for
contractor’s profit @ 25% of estimated cost put to tender. Out of this 25%, 10% is said to be
contractor’s profit and about 10% accounts for profit earmarked for sub-contractors and
vendors. Thus it leaves only 5% for overheads, which provision may be realistic for large
value works. If the scope of work is reduced such provision for overheads is not realistic
since some fixed costs may not be amenable for proportionate reduction.
Bidders may provide around 25% in their bid estimate while submitting their bids. However,
it depends on several other factors, viz. extent of competition, their work load on hand, etc.
Overheads
Overheads are defined as all administrative or executive costs incident to the management,
supervision or conduct of the capital outlay on project and are distinguished from operating
costs. These are general charges which cannot be charged upon as belonging exclusively to
any particular item or part of the work. Provision for overheads varies from one work to
another, as it is dependent on several factors. For major works lesser percentage provision
may be feasible. It is not realistic to specify any uniform percentage for overheads, they
include:
1. Interest and bank guarantee charges

2. Supervision
RCHITECTURE
3. Insurance and taxes

4. Infrastructure
5. Labour welfare
6. Litigation
7. Liquidated damages
8. Extra escalation
9. Idle labour and machinery
10. Security
11. Mobilization and storage
Provision of 5% for overheads may be realistic only for large value works. However, it would
be much more for smaller works.
 TENDER SCRUTINY
Twelve steps to be considered before bidding by the tenderers

1. Study tender document
2. Inspect the site again. Note the extent of infrastructure existing/ to be done.
3. Note nearest market place to procure material and labour for the work.
4. Decide what are the works to be done by main contractor and what works can be
entrusted to sub-contractors.
5. Shortlist reliable, reputed vendors and sub-contractors.
6. Requirement of field investigations. Is not required if data is made available by the
client
7. Obtain quotation from the sub-contractors and vendors and freeze their costs.
8. Plan to complete the job, within stipulated schedule. Draw network chart and check
their feasibility.
9. Prepare a bid estimate.
10. Add realistic overheads and profit as to be decided by the client.
11. Check the bid estimate again and revise, if necessary.
12. Who are the likely competitors? If the bid is too high the tenderer may lose the
opportunity to get the work. If it is too low it may reduce profitability.
 TENDER ANALYSIS - RECOMMENDATIONS
For evaluation of tenders, it is a practice both in government works and private sector works
to constitute a committee consisting of Architect/Engineer, finance representative and another
nominated person. The following steps are involved in the evaluation of tenders.
(i) Arithmetical accuracy is checked. Qty X Rate = Amount for each item and Sum of
Tendered amounts all items is computed.
ARCHITECTURE
(ii) Consider the effect of conditions, if any, stipulated by tenderers. Financial loading is
done over their quoted amount.
Normally, conditional tenders are treated as non-responsive.
However, certain conditions are considered after adding or subtracting their financial effect.
(iii) Evaluated bids are arranged from LI (First Lowest), L2, L3 and so on.
 Market Rate Analysis Prepared by the Owner
Market rate analysis is prepared on the basis of market rates at site of work or on the eve of
opening of tenders. This can be done by adopting one of the two methods:
- For all items tendered, work out material requirements and labour requirement
category-wise and add equipment required and multiply by respective market rates.
To this, add overheads, contractor’s profit and contingencies. This gives justifies
amount required to execute the work.
- Analyse the market rate for each item by adopting constant in data book and by
substituting market rates in place of estimated rates. The justified amount to execute
the work is worked-out based on the quantities given in the schedule of quantities and
market rates worked out as above.
- Then compare quoted amount of the lowest acceptable tender with justified amount
worked out as above in the light of market rates. If the difference is within 5% for
normal works and within 10% for emergency works, the tender may be recommended
for acceptance, if all other factors are favourable. If the difference is more than these
limits, attempt may be made to negotiate the offer. The lowest tenderer may also be
asked to furnish bid rate analysis. By comparing, it would be possible to reconcile the
difference between the lowest quoted amount and justified amount.
If there are no other issues in the scrutiny of tenders, the above procedure can be
adopted for evaluation of tenders.
 WORK ORDER
When a decision is taken to award the contract to a particular tenderer, the next step is to
issue a work order. As per the standard practice, it is common to intimate the tenderer by a
fax and follow it up by a detailed work order. It is necessary for the owner to ensure that
intimation is given to the successful tenderer well before the expiry of validity period or
extended validity period. Before communicating decision to award the contract, owner should
discharge his obligations which are prerequisites for tendering.
Points to be incorporated in work order:
ARCHITECTURE
1. Tendered amount in case of item rate tenders or percentage above/below the estimated
cost in case of percentage tenders. Lump sum amount in case of lump sum contracts or
turnkey contracts.
2. Reference to:
- Letters exchanged with the tenderer subsequent to receipt of tenders.
- Summary of negotiations
- Letter enclosed with the tenders indicating conditions or any stipulation
On award of contract the following activities merit consideration:
i. Obtain programme for execution of work (bar chart or network chart)
ii. Conduct periodic progressive meeting with cietn and contracts
iii. Set time schedule for procurement of material
iv. Deploy site staff for measurements of work done
v. Approve sub-contractors and vendors
vi. Focus on quality assurance and safety matters
vii. Progress as per the programme. Compare fiscal progress with financial progress
viii. Analyse causes for cost and time overrun and suggest methods to overcome them or
minimise them
ix. Certify payments interim and final
x. Settle disputes amicably
xi. Consultants should serve as a catalyst between client and contractor and ensure progress.
 E-TENDERING (ADVANTAGES, PROCEDURE, CONDITIONS)
An internet based process wherein the complete tendering process; from advertising to
receiving and submitting tender-related information are done online. This enables firms to be
more efficient as paper-based transactions are reduced or eliminated, facilitating for a more
speedy exchange of information.
The detailed procedure adopted is given in Appendix 01.
As regards, the procedure adopted to award the contract, there is no uniformity in practice
adopted in various organisations. Some of them are given below:
1. Award of tender to the lowest evaluated tenderer.
2. Award of work to the lowest evaluated tenderer after negotiations. In this process,
negotiation is done with a few or all tenderers which are kept confidential. Tenderers
will not know the negotiated bid of other competitors. However, all the negotiated
bids are known to the client only.
ARCHITECTURE
3. Award of work done after giving an opportunity to all tenderers or few tenderers to
lower their bids. This is done confidentially and it is known only to owner, but not
known to other competitors.
APENDIX 20
Introduction
The Government has decided to implement a state-wide e-procurement portal. The new e-
Proc portal will act as an end-to-end system, wherein government agencies can handle their
procurement activities entirely online starting from Indent generation, tendering, contract
management, catalogue management and payments. The end-to-end e-Proc portal has been
divided into the following key modules:
1. Supplier registration
2. Indent management
3. E-tendering – Bid creation and submission
4. E- auctions
5. Contract management
6. Catalogue management
This user guide focuses on Bid submission for works.
Pre-requisites
You must have the following:
1. A broadband Internet connection. This is important for quicker access, processing
and uploading of files. Some of the common broadband (or high speed Internet)
provides are BSNL, Airtel, etc.
2. A digital certificate on your PC or on a thumb drive. You cannot proceed with your
registration or edit your profile without a digital certificate. A list of the approved
vendors is available on the e-Proc portal. This is the link to the e-proc portal:
http://eproc.karnataka.gov.in
A digital certificate helps keep your information and your transactions completely safe.
3. Internet Explorer 6.0 or above. No other browsers are supported at the moment.
4. A valid email account with enough space to receive email. If you are a regular
supplier to the government, we recommend a dedicated email account. There are
many free mail services available on the internet today:
Gmail – ---------------http://www.gmail.com
Hotmail – ------------ http://www.hotmail.com
ARCHITECTURE
SIFY ---------------- http://www.sify.com

Rediff --------------- http://rediffmail.com
Yahoo -------------- http://www.yahoo.co.in
You can also opt for paid service with your domain.
5. WinZip installed on your system to compress large files into smaller sized files. Get
this from: http://www.winzip.com
6. On the e-Proc portal, all fields marked with a red asterisk indicate that it is
compulsory to enter/provide that information. You cannot proceed with registration
without entering those details.
Bid submission for works
Logging in
1. In your Internet Explorer address bar, type the URL http://epro.karnataka.gov.in
2. The procurement portal home page appears. As a registered contractor, you can log
in to the portal to access your profile, view and bid for tenders for the categories you
are registered to receive.
Example: You can view tenders for works, goods, or services, or any combination of these
categories.
3. Your user ID and password were emailed to you when you signed up for this paid
service.
As per process, you would then have changed the mailed password to a new one that was
more convenient and personal to you.
Enter your registered user ID and your password.
Click Login.
Inside the e-Procurement portal
You are now logged into the e-Procurement Portal. There are 2 main menu options
available:
1. My Profile: Here you can change details (such as address, phone number, others) to
update your profile.
2. Tender Management: With the Search Tenders you can search for tenders released by
the Government of Karnataka through a criteria-based search. My Bids display all
bids for works that you have submitted.
Click on Search Tenders to open the Search Tenders screen.
ARCHITECTURE
Searching for tenders

1. This is the Search Tenders screen where you can search for works tenders by specifying one
or more criteria.
The search criteria can be the tender category, publishing department (Works), number,
tender and/or the invitation strategy.
There are 2 types of tenders:
I. Open tenders are for all Contractors.
II. Pre-Qualified tenders are only for successfully pre-qualified contractors who will
go through the qualification process.
2. The Department dropdown list displays a detailed list of all the participating departments of
the Government of Karnataka.
3. There are 3 ways to search of tenders:
I. Simply click on search without specifying criteria. Not recommended because it
will display a long list of all tenders.
II. Specify the Tender Number by copying it from the email notice you received. This
is the quickest way.
III. Specify multiple criteria to narrow down a range of tenders. Specify your criteria
and click on Search.
4. The Search Tenders screen is the initial point for viewing Open or Pre-Qualified tenders for
works published by the Government of Karnataka.
Actions
1. You can perform the following actions on published tenders:
a. Clicking the View Details icon of a tender brings up this view-only screen which
displays the selected tender’s details:
 Procurement entity details
 Tender value, earnest money deposit and documentation fees details
 The dates and times of the tender schedule
Remember, you cannot modify any tender details here.
b. Download Tender documents: You can download tender documents here for
viewing/re-viewing.
c. View Queries for this Tender: You can view/submit queries for this tender.
d. Submit the bid for this Tender: You can submit your bid for this tender.
ARCHITECTURE
2. The status of the works tenders you searched for is displayed here. A tender can have
the following status:
a. Published
b. Tendered
c. Submitted
d. Awarded
Bid submission summary/overview
1. Clicking the Submit Bid for this Tender icon brings you to the bid submission
summary/overview screen.
Here, you must click on the options and follow the steps through to achieve a green checked
status against all the eight actions to submit you bid for a tender successfully. A yellow icon
indicates a warning status which means the process has not been completed.
 View tender details
 Download tender documents
 View items in tender
 Tender processing fee
 EMD payment
 General conditions of eligibility
 Technical qualification criteria
 Upload bid documents
 Item-wise bid commercial offer
 Declaration
2. Click tender processing fee
 Credit card/online payment
 Direct debit using online banking/online payment
 NEFT/Offline payment
 Remittance at the bank counter – Challan (offline Payemnt)
3. Click EMD
Earnest Money Deposit (EMD) is required as a security deposit from a contractor.
The tendering authority will set a percentage of the ECV as the Earnest Money Deposit.
When the percentage is put in, the value is calculated automatically and displayed on the
screen.
ARCHITECTURE
The Earnest Money deposit (EMD) amount is automatically displayed on the payment
information screen.
You cannot modify this amount. The exact amount must be submitted to proceed successfully
in this process.
Select your Mode of payment from the four options listed on the screen.
4. The green checked status indicates that your EMD payment is processed successfully
General conditions of eligibility are norms or a level of standard that must meet the
qualification requirements set by the GoK. Compliance with these standards is important for
you to reach the end of the bidding process.
Non-compliance can lead to disqualification of your bid at the end of the process. If you
select NO in the compliance dropdown list, then your bid will be disqualified by the system.
These compliance criteria must be met for successful bid submission.
Enter a brief description or any additional information about your compliance with the
eligibility criteria in the Remarks text boxes. Clicking on SAVE will return you to the Bid
summary/overview screen.
5. The green checked status indicates that your eligibility criteria were processed
successfully. The next action to be executed in Technical Qualification criteria.
 View tender details
 Download tender documents
 View items in tender
 Tender processing fee
 EMD payment
 General conditions of eligibility
 Technical qualification criteria
 Upload bid documents
 Item wise bid commercial offer
 Declaration
The technical qualification criteria screen displays the required criteria to qualify technically
to submit a particular bid.
Technical criteria may be specific to the nature and quantity of the Works being tendered and
your capability as a contractor to meet the demands of the tender.
As with eligibility criteria, you must meet the technical qualification criteria laid down for a
tender to successfully qualify for bid submission.
ARCHITECTURE
Click the pointing finger icon to access the compliance screen for those technical criteria.
Specify if your compliance to each technical criterion is Yes or No. enter your remarks and
upload the required documents.
Click save and continue.
The green checked status indicates successful processing of your technical qualifications
criteria.
6. Upload bid documents is the halfway point in this series of actions. Click upload bid
documents to upload and submit mandatory certificates and documentation.
Various departments within Government of Karnataka attach different certification and
documentation requirements to their tenders. The set of certifications and documentations
required for a bid will be listed in the tender itself.
You must attach these documents and certificates during the submission process. Ensure that
all required documentation and certification is available in a scanned/electronic format, on
your desktop at the same time of submission. Clicking Browse brings up the Choose file
window. Select the directory and file and click Open.
7. Click Item-wise Bid commercial offer
The next option is item-wise bid commercial offer. All line items in this option must be
quoted.
These line items are numbered serially and require the following actions:
I. Enter the rate for the goods
II. Enter the amount in words
Note: Great care must be taken to enter the rate correctly
All the line item for a works tender are listed serially and NOT grouped as they are for goods
tenders.
Unlike the item-wise bid commercial offer for goods, you do NOT have to specify any tax
components for works tenders.
Next, click Declaration to complete the bid submission process.
8. Declaration is an online declaration from you or your organisation enclosing the
financial proposal for selection of your firm to execute that particular tender as per
the stipulations of the contract.
Click I agree…. Check box. Click the Encrypt… checkbox if you want to secure the bid.
Click Save & Continue.
If you choose to encrypt your tender, then this screen appears.
ARCHITECTURE
Click Submit Bid.

In the screen that follows, click Submit Bid.
9. Once all the requirements and conditions have been submitted and met, a Bid
Reference Number is generated.
This submitted bid will be available to you in the My Bid option under Tender management.
10. Click my Bids and enter the Tender Number or selection the Department.
Click Search.
A list of tenders’ issued by the selected department is displayed.
Click Logout to exit from the e-Procurement Portal.
Increased Efficiency
 Shorten the procurement cycle when processes are automated with tender analysis,
allowing users to allocate resources and time for other critical issues. 
 Automate the entire tendering lifecycle for procurement of goods and services starting
from creation of a purchase requisition through to the award of contract with strict
control.
 Streamline last minute tender changes.
 Faster response to questions and points of clarification during tender period.
 Remote office operation is made possible as all authorized parties can access Tender
Tailor via a secured channel. Cross border tendering process can be achieved. 
 Better communications between departments, as the alerting system would remind
users about critical issues and tasks that have been completed by different teams,
minimizing human errors, as well as to route documents to appropriate parties or
alerts individuals of actions in the system.
 Single point of access for both vendors and purchasers to do business efficiently in a
convenient and user-friendly manner.
 Better access to procurement spending information and analytical reports 
Reduced Cost
 Result in more profitable contracts

 Reduce take-off costs and errors with direct digitizer input
 Minimize paper trail on tendering exercises
ARCHITECTURE
 Reduce costs of participation for purchasers and vendors

 Reduce fulfilment and rework costs
 Reduce advertisement cost
 Reduce cost to obtain detailed analysis of costs and mark-up
 Reduce labour intensive tasks of receipt, recording and distribution of tender
 Less manual forms filling on tender preparation and data re-entry when upon
receiving the tender
 Reduce hassles involved in communication and administration, achieving higher
accuracy
 Fair, Free and fearless participation of Tenderer become possible
Improved Quality
1. Users can visualize the status on each tendering process by the comprehensive
progress tracking function, reducing time for keeping track of status.
2. Streamlined workflow is realized with faster tender and document submission; hence
improved information distribution is achieved.
3. Better integrity of goods, services, works and vendor information as a provision of
quality management of centralized repository facilitates instant access to both current
and historical tender information
4. Detailed purchase history for efficient negotiation with vendors
5. Real time updating, eliminate obsolete information
6. Improved audit trail increasing integrity and transparency of the tendering process
7. Improved quality of tender specification and supplier response
8. Provision of quality management information
9. Database of goods, services, works and contractors gets build up
10. Gives critical lead over the competitors
CONTRACT
 DEFINITION
The word contract is derived from the Latin word contractor meaning drawing together.
There are many definitions for the word ‘contract’. Some of them are given as follows:;
1. An agreement enforceable by law is a contract of the Indian Contract Act, 1872.
ARCHITECTURE
FIGURE 3.2 VARIATIONS IN SCOPE OF WORK
2. When two or more persons have a common intention communicated to each other to
create some obligation between them, there is said to be an agreement. An agreement
which is enforceable by law is a contract. (CPWD)
3. An agreement between two or more parties which is intended to be enforceable at
law and is constituted by acceptance by one party of an offer made by the other party
to do or abstain from doing the act. (Halsbury)
 CONTRACT AGREEMENT - ITS NECESSITY
Objective
The primary objective of contract management is completion of work entrusted to the
construction agency with least complications (ideally without any complication) within
specified time, within specified (approved cost) and conforming to specified quality without
loss of harmony among key participants.
FIGURE 3.3 OBJECTIVES OF CONTRACT MANAGEMENT
ARCHITECTURE
Management of contract should be done in such a way that the construction agency gets what
is due to the agency and owner gets full value for the investment, all within the perimeter of
conditions of contract.
to understand the scope of work specified in the contract agreement, complete the work as
scheduled, invoice per instructed to do so and finally it will be the tool used so to get paid.
ARCHITECTURE
THE INDIAN CONTRACT ACT, 1872

The Indian Contract Act is the basic document governing all types of contracts including
bailment and agency. Contracts should be properly administered, governed, and controlled as
per the act. A good contract should not be spoiled by bad administration.
The India Contract Act uses the word ‘promise’ to indicate a party’s obligation. The word
‘promise’ in common parlance means ‘an engagement to do or keep from doing something.’
In law, however, it means a proposal made by one person which is accepted by another
person to whom it is made. Some of the clauses are given below.
 Every promise and set of promises, forming the consideration for each other, is called
reciprocal promises. Vide Sec 2 (e)
 An agreement not enforceable is said to be void vide Sec 2 (g)
 An agreement which is enforceable by law at the option of one or more of the parties
thereto, but not at the option of other or others, is a voidable contract vide Sec 2(i) a
 A contract which ceases to be enforceable by law becomes void when it ceases to be
enforceable vide Sec 2 (j)
 There are several types of contracts. They involve issues relating to (i) Technology
(ii) Finance (iii) Administration and Management. Contracts involve high monetary
stakes. Contracts should be properly administrated, governed and controlled as per
provisions of Indian Contract Act 1872.
All contracts if they are to be valid and enforceable at law must have certain ingredients, viz.
(i) Mutual agreement between the contracting parties as to the terms and conditions
of the contract.
(ii) Genuine intention of the parties to accept and fulfil their respective rights and
duties under the contract.
(iii) Legal capacity of the parties to make a valid contract.
(iv) Consideration of some value (such as payment for construction work done)
exchanged by the parties.
(v) Lawful nature of the object of the contract (e.g. to build a structure that conforms
to all laws and regulations).
(vi) When the person to whom the proposal is made, signifies his/her assent thereon,
the proposal is said be to accepted, and it becomes a ‘promise’. The person
accepting the proposal is called the ‘promise’ (owner).
ARCHITECTURE
(vii) Consideration is the price in terms of money, goods or services paid for the thing
that the promisor wishes to have.
(viii) An agreement enforceable by law is a contract: an agreement not enforceable by
law is said to be void.
(ix) An agreement which is enforceable by law at the option of one or more parties
thereto, but not at the option of other or others is a voidable contract.
Types of contract
There are several types of contracts. One of the following five types of contracts indicated in
figure is adopted for execution of works by Government Departments or by private owners
on the nature of work.
FIGURE 3.6 TYPES OF CONTRACT
Classification of engineering contracts

(A) Based on purpose
1. Full contracts – Contracts for entire scope of work (e.g. building with all internal and
external services).
2. Labour contracts – Owner supplies all materials and the contractor provides labour
and required petty materials.
ARCHITECTURE
3. Turnkey contracts – Adopted for complex and specialized works. Entire responsibility
rests with the contractor for design, construction, and commissioning.
4. There may or may not be provision for escalation.
5. There may be provision for maintenance.
6. There may be provision beyond normal defect liability period.
7. Procurement contract – For procurement of materials for a work. It may be fate
contract for a year or specific period.
8. Transport contract – For transport of materials from rail head to works site or owner’s
warehouse.
9. Erection contract – For installation erection and commissioning of plant & machinery
given by the owner.
10. Consultancy contracts – To avail the services of a consultant for project formulation,
DPR, construction supervision and progress monitoring, etc.
(B) Based on economic classification
1. Measurement contracts (item rate and % rate)
2. Lump sum contracts
3. Cost + fee contracts
4. Turnkey contracts
5. Build-own-operate and transfer (BOOT) contracts
6. Labour contracts
7. Demolition contracts
8. Others – piece work contracts
9. Day work
10. Consultancy contracts
i. Fixed price contracts without provision for escalation (major risk is borne
by the contractor).
ii. Fixed price contracts with provision for escalation (risk is limited to
difference in market rates and factors considered in escalation formulae).
A. Measurement contracts (item rate and % rate):
(i) Percentage contracts: For small works and works of repetitive nature,
percentage rate contracts are adopted. Owner indicates quantities and estimated
rates for all items of work. The estimated cost is reflected in the tender
schedule. The tenderer will quote above or below the estimated cost in per-cent to
ARCHITECTURE
put for tender. Payment is made on the basis of actual quantities executed and
measured. In percentage rate tender, the owner gives both rates and quantities
and amount. The contractor quotes % above or at par or (%) below the
estimated cost. It is generally adopted for small works and repetitive works. This
type of tender is also suitable for repair and maintenance works.
(ii) Item rate contracts: For major works, item rate contracts are adopted.
Owner indicates quantities and units only for all items of work and the tenderer
quotes rates for each individual item. Payment is made for the actual work done
based on measurements. This type of contract is useful for works where all items
are not finalized at the beginning. Item can be modified within certain limits on the
basis of detailed planning and design. The tender form contains all items of work
included in bill of quantities excluding lump sum items and those items which are
to be executed through another agency. The tenderer quotes rates for each item.
Payment is made on the basis of measurements of work done. The quantities
included in the tender schedule are approximate and some variation within
deviation limits is permissible. This is said to be a balanced method of execution.
B. Lump sum contract:
Scope of work, construction drawings and detailed specifications are given to
tenderer along with terms and conditions of contract. Schedule of quantities
may or may not form a part of tender documents. Even if they are supplied
they are not contractually operative and informative only. The tenderer quotes
a fixed price for the whole work tendered. If this type of contract is adopted,
the owner will know cost of work on the eve of award of contract. However,
this is subject to the condition that there is no-variation in scope of work
subsequently. It is normal practice to agree on a method to regulate payments
for additions and alterations. Provision can be made for escalation in this type
of contract also. Detailed measurement of work done may not be necessary
when contract specifies stage payment to effect interim payments. This type
of contract can be considered when scope of work is frozen; planning,
designing and working drawings are completed before inviting tenders.
ARCHITECTURE
Contractor quotes one lump sum amount for the work/job assigned. This type of
contract is suitable when planning, construction, drawings, and
specifications are finalized before inviting tenders. The tenderer quotes a fixed
price. In this method owner knows the probable cost of work. However, if the
quote is varied, it involves contractual problems and methodology to arrive at
the rates for addition, deletion and alterations would be necessary and it is to
be built in tender document. This is to facilitate release of interim payments.
C. Cost plus fee contract
COST + PERCENTAGE (%) OF TOTAL COST WITH OR WITHOUT A CEILING COST + FIXED FEE COST + INCENTIVE FEE
This method of contract is adopted for:
(i) emergency works

(ii) for miscellaneous works and
(iii) For works for which scope cannot be defined properly at tender stage.
Contractor is paid his actual cost of materials labour, hire charges of
machinery and a fee towards his profit and overheads. This fee may be a
percentage of total cost with or without a ceiling or a lump sum amount. Here
contractor's risk is less and owner's liability is not known on the eve of
commencement of works. Under some circumstances, this type of contract is
adopted in government or private sector works.
D. Turnkey Contract
In a turnkey contract, the contractor takes full responsibility for design, construction and
commissioning of the facility of defined scope for a fixed lump sum price. This is an area
of high risk for the contractor. The contractor has to bear the normal risk of unforeseen
site conditions, poor weather and foundation problems. For turnkey contractor, time is
truly equal to money and schedule slippage may adversely affect his profitability
particularly in cases where there is no provision for escalation. A bonus or penalty clause
may be included as an incentive or disincentive to the contractor to complete the work
on time. This type of contract is suitable for projects where all the functional parameters
are finalized and changes and extras are not made later. Such type of contracts is seen
more in commercial, defence and interior projects of multidisciplinary character and
when timely completion is important.
In this type of contract, Contractor takes full responsibility for design, construction,
commissioning of the facilities. The scope of the facility is described in detail and a
fixed lump sum price is paid to the contractor. There may or may not be a provision
for escalation. The number of responsibility centres is reduced to only one. It eliminates
coordination problem. In a liberalized regime Indian entrepreneurs are inclined to start
considering the implementation of their projects following the turnkey concept. This type
of project is suitable for scheduling critical commercial and defence projects of multi-
disciplinary character. The contractor has to bear the normal risk of unforeseen site
conditions, poor weather and foundation problems. Schedule slippage may adversely
affect his profitability in the absence of escalation clause. A
ARCHITECTURE
bonus clause may be included as an incentive to the contractor to complete the work
even before stipulated period of completion.
E. BOOT contract
With the liberalization and opening up of the economy, private sector is encouraged to
execute public works, own them, operate for a specific period and transfer the same to
public authority. The entrepreneur will recover his investment during the period he
owns and before the transfer of asset. This type of contract is adopted for highway
projects, airports, convention centres, IT parks, power plants and bridges. Government
avoids funding and allows a private person or a group to invest, build and transfer the
facility after recovering their investment. The government acts as a facilitator in terms
of legal issues, acquisition of land and enforcement of issues. This type is desirable
where the government itself is unable to raise huge resources to take up such big
projects. Further the government can also join with private companies or consortia in
the form of separate holding company specifically constituted for the purpose. Build—
own—operate—and transfer contracts adopted for infrastructure projects (highways
bridges, airports, water supply and sewerage projects) private sector involves in these
projects. Entrepreneur invests and maintains these structures and collect toll for specific
period based on approved tariff. Government acts as a facilitator and provides and
approvals. On expiry of contract period the facility is transferred to government.
Deletion and alterations would be necessary and it is to be built into tender document.
This is to facilitate release of interim payments. DFBOOT Contract: It is similar to
BOOT Contract except the entrepreneur will also be responsible for the designing and
financing of the project. Government's responsibilities remain same as in BOOT
contract described above.
 Quality Based Selection (QBS): Adopted for highly specialized assignments
such as urban master plan and finance, etc., reforms. * Best Expert Advice
(feasibility and structural engineering in major projects such dams, etc.
Assignments which can substantially carried out in different ways (management
 Selection under Fixed Budget (FBS): For simple and precisely defined
assignments.
 Selection on Basis of Least Cost (LCS): Adopted for Standard or routine nature
assignments (audits, design of non-complex engineering works)
 Selection Based on Consultant's qualifications (CQS): For small assignments
where evaluation of competitive proposal is not justified.
Consultants are paid on job basis, lump sum basis, on call basis, or on retainer ship basis,
depending on situation and considering several factors. This is a concession contract. The
project is based on the granting of a concession by the principal, usually a Government to
an entrepreneur (known as the concessionaire) who is responsible for design, financing,
construction, operating and maintaining the facility over a period of
ARCHITECTURE
concession before finally transferring the facilities at no cost to the principal, as a fully
operational facility. During the concession period the entrepreneur collects toll fee to
recover the cost of investment and maintenance which results in a margin of profit.
F. Labour contract
In this the owner supplies all the materials and the contractor provides only, the labour
component, i.e. not just labour but also all plant and machinery required for
construction work. He is responsible for execution of the work. As contractor is not
responsible for materials; he may misuse and waste materials. This is a popular type of
contract as both materials and workmanship will be of high standard. Payments are
restricted to labour charges only. In case of extras too only labour charges need to be
paid. Problems relating to escalation, cost variation relating to materials will not affect
work progress. This contract at the tender stage can be based on cubic foot construction
for the entire construction project (excludes drainage, plumbing and electric, AC
works). It is suitable for all types of buildings, extension work alterations and repair of
works. Advantages include cost saving aspect, reduction in disputes, effective
supervision in use of materials and workmanship and use of quality materials. The
contractor is responsible for execution of work; Payments are restricted to labour
charges only. This contract at the tender stage can be based on square meter/cubic meter
of construction for the entire work. It is suitable for all types of buildings, extension
work, alterations and repair of works. Advantages include cost saving aspect, reduction
in disputes, effective supervision in use of materials and good workmanship and use of
quality materials.
G. Demolition contract
This involves demolition of existing building/ buildings completely and removal of the
debris safely away from the site. The contractor takes away all the materials that are
salvaged from building and pays for the same to the owner. For this contract, the highest
bidder is awarded the work. A specified depositing (EMD) needs to be made by
contractor which he will forfeit in case of non-completion of work for any reason,
e.g. non-carting away of materials from site completely. The owner can use the deposit,
for such purposes. The whole tendered amount needs to be collected from the contractor
before the commencement of work. Owner should not accept any part payment as there is
a chance of contractor abandoning the work in between. The contractor has to take out
insurance for accidents, compensation (to workers). Further permission to cut the road for
water, electricity supply drainage connections, etc., is to be obtained by the contractor.
The contract should specify whether the demolition work is totally up to the ground of
the whole building or only a part. In such a case, part demolition should not affect the
structural strength of the rest of the building. Further, the contractor should make good
any damages to the existing part of the building if required. Also, the items the owner
wants to retain post demolition are to be clearly mentioned in tender and later in contract,
otherwise the same have to be purchased from contractor. A tenderer before submitting
the bid should inspect the building to assess the salvage value of items of
ARCHITECTURE
recovery. The earnest money deposit is returned to the contractor only after successful
completion of demolition work and carting away all debris to the satisfaction of the
owner.
This involves demolition of existing building/buildings completely and removal of the

debris safely away from the site. The contractor takes away all the materials that are
salvaged from building and pays for the same to the owner.
For this contract the highest bidder is awarded the work. Contractor shall deposit EMD
which will be forfeited in case of non-completion of entire work for any reasons (namely, non-
carting away of dismantled materials from site completely. The whole tendered amount shall
be collected from the contractor before commencement of the work. It is advisable for
contractor to take an insurance policy for accidents, damages, etc.
H. Other works
Works of nature: Piece work or days’ work cannot be strictly classified as contracts as
they do not involve security deposit or penalty; as they do not involve large sums of
money.
Piece work contracts are common with agencies, like CPWD/PWD or public sector
units. This involves splitting up of a large work of similar nature, e.g. canal work or
metro rail construction, etc., into smaller sections as packages and contracts are awarded
based on tenders (public) if the amount is substantial (to be decided by the agencies like
PWD for execution). In case of small works the concerned Chief Engineer may be
empowered to take decision (as per the agencies guidelines). This type of execution works
out well where large scale work of similar/repetitive work is present and which needs to
be completed fast, e.g. road work in large township projects or services like electrical
work or sanitary/water supply lines. Rates and items are fixed and are paid after
execution of work.
Piece work or days’ work cannot be strictly classified as contracts. They do not involve
security deposit or penalty as they do not involve large sums of money.
I. Day work
It is not a contract at all. But this method of execution is good for works of small nature
which cannot be measured or valued, e.g. decorative work, craftwork/artwork, etc.
Payment for the same includes cost of material and hire charges of machinery, labour
charges and contractor's profit. It does not involve tendering, security or earnest money
deposit, etc. It is the architect or engineer who has to decide and select the individual
or agency and commission the work. The clerk of works or (site engineer) has to
supervise the work and report to the architect or engineer. Wages paid to labourers should
conform to government guidelines. Any trade discounts allowed are to go to the owner.
If the main contractor has supplied materials, like cement or sand, the same are to be
deducted from the contractor's payment who is doing the day's work.
Day work's commencement and completion statement are to be certified by the
architect/engineer. Day work items are to be preferably avoided in design as
ARCHITECTURE
they increase cost due to difficulty in measurement and lump sum nature of payment.
This method of execution is good for small works, which cannot be measured or valued
(e.g. decorative work, craftwork, artwork, etc.). Payment for the same shall be decided on
the basis of site observation along with reasonable profit.
J. Consultancy contract
 Quality based Selection (QBS): Adopted for highly specialized assignments
such as urban master plan and finance, etc. reforms.
 Best Expert Advice: Feasibility and structural engineering in major projects
such as dams, etc.
 Assignments which can substantially carried out in different ways (management
 Selection under Fixed Budget (FBS): For simple and precisely defined
assignments.
 Selection on Basis of Least Cost (LCS): Adopted for standard or routine
nature assignments (audits, design of non-complex engineering works).
 Selection Based on Consultant's qualification (CQS): For small assignments
where evaluation of competitive proposal is not justified.
Consultants are paid on-job basis, lump sum basis, on-call basis, or on-retainer ship
basis depending on situation and considering several factors.
SELECTION OF CONTRACTORS
It is recognized that the most important part of contract management is the selection of
contractor(s). Critical factors, such as quality, speed, economy and harmony are all dependent
on selection of a suitable contractor. Selection should also satisfy the principle of equity and
fair play. Contractor is selected by the owner through any one of the following processes after
conducting negotiations if required.
 Public tenders
 Pre-qualification
 Post-qualification
 Limited tenders
 Single Tender
 Nomination
Public Tenders
For government works, invariably public tenders are invited from registered contractors of
appropriate class. A stipulation is made in the tender notice regarding work experience,
ARCHITECTURE
financial solvency, and annual turnover in addition to registration. His general reputation is
also taken into consideration before the award of contract.
Pre-qualification of Contractors
For major works, specialized works, and for works of multi-disciplinary involvement,
contractors are pre-qualified to ensure that competition is only among bidders who are
capable of executing the work. The basic requirement of pre-qualification is not the
selection of the best contractor, but to eliminate incompetent and insincere contractors. Pre-
qualification notice is published in newspapers with relevant details, such as name of work,
location, estimated cost, period allowed for completion, eligibility criteria of contractors,
etc. Contractors are pre-qualified on the basis of financial solvency, work experience,
quality of works executed, organization and plant and machinery possessed. It is a normal
practice to constitute a committee, to evaluate their suitability. The works are inspected for
quality and their present workload is also taken into account. Suitable weightages are
assigned for each of the criteria and the assessment is made accordingly. Suitable number of
contractors (not too small or too large) is pre-qualified. Thereafter, the tender notices are
sent to such pre-qualified contractors only. There will not be a press notice thereafter. Only
pre-qualified contractors are allowed to tender for the work. Further selection of contractors is
based on the processes after conducting negotiations.
Post Qualification
In this method, three cover systems are followed. Earnest Money Deposit receipt, Technical
bid and financial bid are submitted in separate covers. If the tenderer does not submit Earnest
Money Deposit in prescribed form acceptable to the client, there is no need to open other two
covers containing technical and financial bid. The technical bid containing all particulars
required to evaluate contractor's suitability except price is opened first and contractors are
post-qualified. Price bids of only such post-qualified contractors are opened and evaluated at a
later date or on the same day. Price bids of other contractors (not qualified) may be returned
or retained with the owner without opening. If two cover systems are followed, the first cover
contains Earnest Money Deposit receipt in approved form along with technical bid
particulars. The procedure for opening of price bid is same as above. EMD in approved form
is a pre-requisite for evaluation of technical bid.
Limited Tenders
In this method, tender notice is sent to some selected contractors of repute, and no press
notice is issued. The lowest tenderer may be called for negotiations. The number of
contractors in the select list is generally, not too small to avoid formation of a cartel. This
method is adopted in private sector in some cases as an alternative to other methods. For
government works, this method is restricted to emergency works only and the decision is
taken at the higher level of hierarchy.
ARCHITECTURE
Single Tender
In response to Notice Inviting Tenders (NIT), only one tender is received. Even after
liberalizing tender conditions, there is no response to secure additional tender. In such a
situation, single tender with approval of higher level of hierarchy is accepted. It is also
adopted for small value works or for works from manufacturer (specified brand) where choice
is not available in the market.
Nomination
Selection of a contractor by nomination is adopted for works of small magnitude or for

emergency works. The contract is awarded based on prevailing market rates. In private sector,
this method is sometimes adopted to select a contractor. The rates are negotiated keeping in
view the trend of market such works may also relate to special skills or construction which are
normally available.
 CONTENTS (ARTICLES OF AGREEMENT, TERMS AND CONDITIONS,

BILLS OF QUANTITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS, APPENDIX)
Articles of agreement (as per Indian Institute of Architects)
Made the day of 20 between
(hereinafter called
`the owner') of the one part and
of (or whose registered office is
situated at)
(hereinafter called "the Contractor") of the other part.

WHEREAS the Owner is desirous of
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(hereinafter called "The Work") at
and has
caused Drawings and Bills of Quantities showing and describing the work to be done to be
prepared by or under the direction of
AND WHEREAS the Contractor has supplied the Owner with a fully priced copy of the said
Bills of Quantities (which copy is hereinafter referred to as "the Contract Bills") AND
WHEREAS the said Drawings (hereinafter referred to as "the Contract Drawings") and the
Contract Bills have been signed by or on behalf of the parties hereto: AND WHEREAS the
Contractor has deposited the sum of Rupees
with the
Architect/Owner for the due performance of this Agreement.
NOW IT IS HEREBY AGREED AS FOLLOWS:
ARCHITECTURE
1. For the consideration hereinafter mentioned the Contractor will upon and subject to the
Conditions annexed carryout and complete the Work shown upon the Contract Drawings and
described by or referred to in the Contract Bills and in the sand Conditions.
2. The Owner will pay the Contractor the sum of Rupees
(hereinafter referred
to as "The Contract Sum") of such other sum as shall become payable hereunder at the times
and in the manner specified in the said Conditions.
3. The term "the Architect in the said Conditions shall mean the said
or in the event of his death or

ceasing to be the Architect for the purpose of this Contract, such other person as the Owner
shall nominate for that purpose, not being a person to whom the Contract shall object for
reasons considered to be sufficient by an arbitrator appointed in accordance with the said
Conditions. Provided always that no person subsequently appointed to be the Architect under
this Contract shall be entitled to disregard or overrule any certificate or opinion or decision or
approval or instruction given or expressed by the Architect for the time being.
4. The said Conditions and appendix thereto shall be read and construed as forming part of
this Agreement, and the parties hereto shall respectively abide by, submit themselves to the
Conditions and perform the agreement on their parts respectively in such Conditions
contained.
AS WITNESS the hands of the said Parties
Signed by the said Owner
in the presence of
Witness:
Name:
Address:
Signed by the said Contractor
in the presence of
Witness:
Name:
Address:
For extra reading:

Appendix 21(3)
Extracts of some clauses incorporated in K/W-3 tender form of Government of
Karnataka is given below. Other States/private organizations may incorporate such
or similar or modified clause(s) suitable to their future contract document.
Compensation Events
The following are Compensation events unless they are caused by the contractor.
* The employer does not give access to a part of the site by the site possession date
stated in the contract data.
* The employer orders a delay or does not issue drawings, specifications or
instructions required for execution of work on time.
ARCHITECTURE
* The employer instructs the contractor to uncover or carry out additional tests upon
work which is then found to have no defects.
* The employer gives an instruction for dealing with an unforeseen condition caused
by the Employer or additional work required for safety or other reasons.
* The effect on the contractor of any of the Employer's risks.
* The employer unreasonably delays issuing a Certificate of Completion
* Other compensation events listed in the contract data or mentioned in the contract.
* If a compensation event would cause additional cost or would prevent the work
being completed before the intended date of completion, the contract price shall be
increased and/or the intended completion date is extended. The employer shall decide
whether and by how much the contract price shall be increased and whether by how
much the intended completion date shall be extended.
* As soon as the information demonstrating the effect of each compensation event
upon the contract's forecast has been provided by the contractor, it is to be assessed
by the employer and the contract price shall be adjusted accordingly. If the
contractor's forecast is deemed unreasonable the employer shall adjust the contract
price based on employer's own forecast.
* The employer will assume that the contractor will react competently and promptly
to the event.
* The contractor shall not be entitled to the compensation to the extent that the
employer's interests are adversely affected by the contractor not having given early
warning or not having cooperated with the employer.
Banker's Certificate
This is 'to certify that M/s is a reputed company with a good financial standing.
If the contract for this work, (name of the work) is awarded to the above firm,
we shall be able to provide overdraft/credit facilities to the extent of Rs. to meet
the working capital requirements for executing the above work.
(Sd)
Name of the bank.... Senior Bank Manager
Address of the bank
Bill of Quantities
S. No. Description of Quantity Unit Rate (Z) Amount

Agreement items in figures in words
Total Tender Price (in figures)

(in words)
ARCHITECTURE
Note:
(1) Items for which no rate or price has been entered in will not be paid by the employer
when executed and shall be deemed covered by the other rates and prices in the bill of
quantities.
(2) Unit rates and prices shall be quoted by the tenderer in Indian Rupees.
(3) Where there is a discrepancy between the rate in figures and words, the lower of the two
will govern.
(4) Where there is a discrepancy between the unit rate and the line item, the total resulting
from multiplying the unit rate by quantity, the unit rate quoted shall govern.
The tender shall contain no alterations or additions except those to comply with instructions
issued by the employer or as necessary to correct errors made by the tenderer in which case
such corrections shall be initialled by the person signing the tender.
 TERMS AND CONDITIONS (SUMMARY OF SOME CRITICAL CLAUSES

ADOPTED BY IIA)
The contracting system in private sector is not yet fully organised. The practice of
requisitioning the services of an architect for the management of engineering contracts has
recently gained its foothold, and is yet to receive wide acceptance. In this background the
salient features of conditions of Contract adopted by Indian Institute of Architects are
discussed below.
(i) Performance bond (Security deposit): Sum to be deposited as security is
mentioned in the appendix to each contract. This deposit is to be made with an
architect within 10 days of signing the contract in the form approved by the
architect and it shall remain till the defect liability period expires. Earnest money
will become a part of security deposit. Owner may retain from interim payments
some percentage as retention percentage till full deposit is recovered.
(ii) Damages for non-completion: Liquidated damages as mentioned in the
Appendix to the contract shall be recovered.
(iii) Determination of contract: Owner can determine the contract if contractor (i)
suspends the work, (ii) fails to give regular progress, (iii) fails to remove or rectify
defective work or materials, (iv) sublets the work without written permission,
(v) Bankruptcy Notice period is 14 days.
Contractor can determine the contract if the owner (i) fails to make payment
within specified period, (ii) interferes or obstructs issue of certificate for payment,
(iii) suspends work for a continuous period, (iv) force majeure, (iv) fails to issue
necessary instructions and drawings, and (v) fails to decide extension of time, etc.
(iv) Interim payment: To be issued by the architect within the period and payment to
be made by the owner as mentioned in the appendix to the contract.
(v) Completion certificate: The Architect is required to give several certificates
during the execution of work. These certificates mentioned below are of special
significance.
(vi) Virtual completion certificate: (Building is fit for occupation though some
minor works are yet to be completed)
ARCHITECTURE
(vii) Penultimate certificate: This certificate is issued to enable collection of fee by a

consultant from the contractor as prescribed in the agreement.
(viii) Interim and final certificates: Interim certificate provides for interim payment to
the contractors. It is to be honoured within specified period. Retention money is
recovered from interim payments vide clamed. Final certificate is issued to the
contractor after expiry of defect liability period reckoned from date of virtual
completion of work. On expiry of defects liability period plus one month for
notice and rectification of defects, contract can be rescinded.
Submission of all documents containing measurements and valuation• within a
reasonable time from the date of virtual completion of work whichever is later.
The final certificate may also authorise release of balance retention money.
(ix) Materials: Within 30 days of signing of agreement contractor shall submit for
approval of the Architect a complete list of all materials he and his sub-contractors
propose to use in the work of definite brand or make which differ in any respect
from those specified.
(x) Fluctuations: The contractor shall not claim any extras for fluctuation of price
and the contract price shall not be subject to any rise or fall of prices.
(xi) Variations: The Architect may issue instructions requiring a variation. Rates
applicable are, quoted rates of similar items, based on fair valuation, day work
rates or market rates.
(xii) Defective work: All materials and workmanship shall be subject to inspection,
examination and test by the Architect at any or all times during manufacture
and/or construction. The Architect shall have the right to reject either defective
materials or workmanship or work which requires any correction.
(xiii) Defect Liability Period: The contractor shall make good at his own cost and to
the satisfaction of the architect; all defects, shrinkages or small faults, arising in
the opinion of architect from work or materials not being in accordance with
drawings or specifications or schedule of quantities or the instructions of the
architect, which may appear within. Defects Liability Period (12 months) referred
to in the Appendix.
(xiv) Arbitration: All disputes shall be referred to and settled by the architect who then
states his decision in writing. Such decision may be in the form of a final
certificate or otherwise. The decision of the architect with respect to any of the
excepted matters shall be final and without appeal. If the decision of the architect
is not acceptable to either party, a notice shall be given within 28 days after
receiving the notice of the decision. The disputes or differences shall be referred
to sole arbitration of a fellow of Indian Institute of Architect mutually agreed by
the parties. In case of disagreement, each party shall appoint one architect (Fellow
of IIA) and both the arbitrators select an umpire. They shall have the power to
open up, review, and revise any certificate, opinion, decision requisition or notice
except excepted matters. The arbitration shall be conducted as per the Act in
force. (The Arbitration and Conciliation Act 1996).
ARCHITECTURE
(xv) Excepted Matters: The decision, opinion, certification (except for payment) with
respect to all or any of the matters mentioned below are final and without appeal.
These are termed as excepted matters:
Interpretation of drawings, specifications and bills of quantities
a) Architect's instructions in writing
b) Contractor's field organisation and equipment
c) Assignment or subletting
d) Approval of sub-contractors
e) Approval of materials and workmanship
f) Extension of time due to force majeure, inclement weather strike or lockout; an act of
God.
g) Delay caused by nominated sub-contractors or nominated suppliers.
h) Delay by persons engaged by the owner in executing the work not forming part of
contract.
 APPENDIX REFERRED TO IN GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
ADOPTED BY IIA
The Architect is required to fill in particular stipulation in the following clauses as applicable
to each tendered work.
37 (1) Defects liability period: 12 months
31 (5) Period of final measurement and valuation: 3 months
38 (1) Date of commencement
Date of completion
41 Agreed liquidated damages
31 (1) Value of work for interim certificate
31 (3) Retention percentage Limit of retention fund
31 (6) Instalment after virtual completion
31 (1) Period of honouring certificate - 15 days
Rate of interest for delayed payment 7%
 CERTIFICATION OF CONTRACTORS BILLS AT VARIOUS STAGES
Payment on intermediate certificates to be regarded as advance
Interim or running payments are made for works whose estimated cost is more than
Rs.20,000 provided that value of the bill is more than specified amount in the contract.
Payment of advances and recovery
(a) Secured advance on non-perishable materials: This advance is admissible on non-
perishable, non-fragile and non-combustible materials brought to site for bonafide use on
work. Advance is given up to 75% of its assessed value on signing of an indenture. For
perishable fragile and combustible material, comprehensive insurance cover for full cost of
materials is necessary. After the materials are incorporated in the work recovery is made from
the next running bill based on theoretical consumption.
(b) Mobilisation advance: Admissible for works whose estimated cost put to tender is rupees
two crores and above. Maximum advance is 10% of the tendered value of work. Advance is
paid in two or three instalments. Proof of utilisation of first instalment is necessary before
obtaining second instalment and so on. Advance is given against Bank guarantee bond.
ARCHITECTURE
Simple interest @ 10% per annum is to be paid. Recovery is made from deductions from the
running bills on pro rate percentage basis to the gross value of the work billed beyond 10% of
tendered value in such a way that entire advance including interest is recovered by the time
80% of the gross value of the contract is executed and paid.
(c) Plant & Machinery and shuttering material advance: Advance is restricted to 5% of
tendered value. Advance admissible is further restricted to 90% of price of new plant and
machinery on production of evidence and to 50% of depreciated value for second hand and
used plants. Valuation by an approved person may be insisted in respect of old plant and
equipment. Around 75% of advance is paid when the plant is brought to site and 25% when it
is commissioned. Steel scaffolding and form work shall be treated as plant and equipment.
Recovery of advance is similar to that of mobilisation advance.
 NEW TRENDS IN PROJECT FORMULATION
BOT (build–operate–transfer)
BOT finds extensive application in infrastructure projects and in public–private partnership.
In the BOT framework a third party, for example the public administration, delegates to a
private sector entity to design and build infrastructure and to operate and maintain these
facilities for a certain period. During this period the private party has the responsibility to
raise the finance for the project and is entitled to retain all revenues generated by the project
and is the owner of the regarded facility. The facility will be then transferred to the public
administration at the end of the concession agreement, without any remuneration of the
private entity involved. Some or even all of the following different parties could be involved
in any BOT project:
 The host government: Normally, the government is the initiator of the infrastructure
project and decides if the BOT model is appropriate to meet its needs. In addition, the
political and economic circumstances are main factors for this decision. The
government provides normally support for the project in some form. (provision of the
land/ changed laws)
 The concessionaire: The project sponsors who act as concessionaire create a special
purpose entity which is capitalised through their financial contributions.
 Lending banks: Most BOT projects are funded to a big extent by commercial debt.
The bank will be expected to finance the project on "non-recourse" basis meaning that
it has recourse to the special purpose entity and all its assets for the repayment of the
debt.
 Other lenders: The special purpose entity might have other lenders such as national or
regional development banks.
 Parties to the project contracts: Because the special purpose entity has only limited
workforce, it will subcontract a third party to perform its obligations under the
concession agreement. Additionally, it has to assure that it has adequate supply
contracts in place for the supply of raw materials and other resources necessary for the
project.
ARCHITECTURE
FIGURE 3.7 – PROJECT TRENDS
A BOT Project (build operate transfer project) is typically used to develop a discrete asset
rather than a whole network and is generally entirely new or Greenfield in nature (although
refurbishment may be involved). In a BOT Project the project company or operator generally
obtains its revenues through a fee charged to the utility/ government rather than tariffs
charged to consumers. A number of projects are called concessions, such as toll road projects,
which are new build and have a number of similarities to BOTs.
In general, a project is financially viable for the private entity if the revenues generated by the
project cover its cost and provide sufficient return on investment. On the other hand, the
viability of the project for the host government depends on its efficiency in comparison with
the economics of financing the project with public funds. Even if the host government could
borrow money on better conditions than a private company could, other factors could offset
this particular advantage. For example, the expertise and efficiency that the private entity is
expected to bring as well as the risk transfer. Therefore, the private entity bears a substantial
part of the risk. These are some types of the most common risks involved:
 Political risk: especially in the developing countries because of the possibility of

dramatic overnight political change.
 Technical risk: construction difficulties, for example unforeseen soil conditions,
breakdown of equipment
 Financing risk: foreign exchange rate risk and interest rate fluctuation, market risk
(change in the price of raw materials), income risk (over-optimistic cash-flow
forecasts), cost overrun risk
BOOT (build–own–operate–transfer)
A BOOT structure differs from BOT in that the private entity owns the works. During the
concession period the private company owns and operates the facility with the prime goal to
recover the costs of investment and maintenance while trying to achieve higher margin on
ARCHITECTURE
project. The specific characteristics of BOOT make it suitable for infrastructure projects like
highways, roads mass transit, railway transport and power generation and as such they have
political importance for the social welfare but are not attractive for other types of private
investments. BOOT & BOT are methods which find very extensive application in countries
which desire ownership transfer and operations including. Some advantages of BOOT
projects are:
 Encourage private investment

 Inject new foreign capital to the country
 Transfer of technology and know-how
 Completing project within time frame and planned budget
 Providing additional financial source for other priority projects
 Releasing the burden on public budget for infrastructure development
BOO (build–own–operate)
In a BOO project ownership of the project remains usually with the project company for
example a mobile phone network. Therefore, the private company gets the benefits of any
residual value of the project. This framework is used when the physical life of the project
coincides with the concession period. A BOO scheme involves large amounts of finance and
long payback period. Some examples of BOO projects come from the water treatment plants.
This facilities run by private companies process raw water, provided by the public sector
entity, into filtered water, which is after returned to the public sector utility to deliver to the
customers.
BLT (build–lease–transfer)
Under BLT a private entity builds a complete project and leases it to the government. On this
way the control over the project is transferred from the project owner to a lessee. In other
words, the ownership remains by the shareholders but operation purposes are leased. After
the expiry of the leasing the ownership of the asset and the operational responsibility are
transferred to the government at a previously agreed price. For foreign investors taking into
account the country risk BLT provides good conditions because the project company
maintains the property rights while avoiding operational risk.
DBFO (design–build–finance–operate)
Design–build–finance–operate is a project delivery method very similar to BOOT except that

there is no actual ownership transfer. Moreover, the contractor assumes the risk of financing
till the end of the contract period. The owner then assumes the responsibility for maintenance
and operation. Some disadvantages of DBFO are the difficulty with long term relationships
and the threat of possible future political changes which may not agree with prior
commitments. This model is extensively used in specific infrastructure projects such as toll
roads. The private construction company is responsible for the design and construction of a
ARCHITECTURE
piece of infrastructure for the government, which is the true owner. Moreover, the private
entity has the responsibility to raise finance during the construction and the exploitation
period. The cash flows serve to repay the investment and reward its shareholders. They end
up in form of periodical payment to the government for the use of the infrastructure. The
government has the advantage that it remains the owner of the facility and at the same time
avoids direct payment from the users. Additionally, the government succeeds to avoid getting
into debt and to spread out the cost for the road over the years of exploitation.
DBOT (design–build–operate–transfer)
This funding option is common when the client has no knowledge of what the project entails.
Hence they contract the project to company to design, build, operate and then transfer.
Example of such project is refinery construction
DCMF (design–construct–manage–finance)
Some examples for the DCMF model are the prisons or the public hospitals. A private entity
is built to design, construct, manage, and finance a facility, based on the specifications of the
government. Project cash flows result from the government's payment for the rent of the
facility. In the case of the hospitals, the government has the ownership over the facility and
has the price and quality control. The same financial model could be applied on other projects
such as prisons. Therefore, this model could be interpreted as a mean to avoid new
indebtedness of public finance.
BILL OF QUANITITES
The bill of quantities (sometimes referred to as 'BOQ' or 'BQ') is a document prepared by

the cost consultant (often a quantity surveyor) that provides project specific measured
quantities of the items of work identified by the drawings and specifications in the tender
documentation.
The quantities may be measured in number, length, area, volume, weight or time. Preparing
a bill of quantities requires that the design is complete and a specification has been prepared.
The bill of quantities is issued to tenderers for them to prepare a price for carrying out the
works. The bill of quantities assists tenderers in the calculation of construction costs for
their tender, and, as it means all tendering contractors will be pricing the same quantities
(rather than taking off quantities from the drawings and specifications themselves), it also
provides a fair and accurate system for tendering.
The contractor tenders against the bill of quantities, stating their price for each item.
This priced bill of quantities constitutes the tenderer's offer. As the offer is built up of
prescribed items, it is possible to compare both the overall price and individual items directly
ARCHITECTURE
with other tenderers' offers, allowing a detailed assessment of which aspects of a tender may
offer good or poor value. This information can assist with tender negotiations.
The priced bill of quantities will also:
 Assist with the agreement of the contract sum with the successful tenderer.
 Provide a schedule of rates assisting with the valuation of variations.
 Provide a basis for the valuation of interim payments.
 Provide a basis for the preparation of the final account.
PROJECT:
INTERIOR DESIGN WORK OF
ELECTORAL EDUCATION AND INFORMATION
CENTER (EEIC)
BIRATNAGAR, NEPAL
BILL OF QUANTITIES, SPECIFICATION

AND
DRAWINGS
MARCH, 2016
Client:
UNDP
ELECTORAL SUPPORT PROJECT, Nepal
Election Commission Bulding, Kantipath, Kathmandu, Nepal
ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS
2
16784 [55'-1"]
5485 [18'] 4196 [13'-9"] 2972 [9'-9"] 3749 [12'-4"]
1753 [5'-9"]
4267 [14']
4267 [14']
6416 [21'-1"]
3367 [11'-1"]
3814 [12'-6"]
15110 [49'-7"]
8085 [26'-6"]
3234 [10'-7"]
3234 [10'-7"]
13357 [43'-10"]
LOBBY
3
8466 [27'-9"]
466 [27'-9"]
8
5474 [18']
5474 [18']
6467 [21'-3"]
5485 [18'] 4196 [13'-9"] 2972 [9'-9"] 3749 [12'-4"]

17521 [57'-6"]
GROUND FLOOR PLAN

Total Builtup area = 2025.71 Sq. Ft. PROPOSED EEIC AREA
Carpet area for EEIC =594.7 Sq.Ft
PROJECT: TITLE: Revision No: 0

Designed by: Drawing No.
ELECTORAL EDUCATION AND INFORMATION CENTRE (EEIC) GROUND FLOOR LAYOUT PLAN []
1
BIRATNAGAR Scale 1:100 Date: March 2016
16784 [55'-1"]
5485 [18'] 4196 [13'-9"] 2972 [9'-9"] 3749 [12'-4"]
1753 [5'-9"]
4267 [14']
4267 [14']
6416 [21'-1"]
3367 [11'-1"]
3814 [12'-6"]
15110 [49'-7"]
8085 [26'-6"]
3234 [10'-7"]
3234 [10'-7"]
13357 [43'-10"]
LOBBY
4
466 [27'-9"]
8466 [27'-9"]
8
5474 [18']
5474 [18']
6467 [21'-3"]
5485 [18'] 4196 [13'-9"] 2972 [9'-9"] 3749 [12'-4"]

17521 [57'-6"]
GROUND FLOOR PLAN

Total Builtup area = 2025.71 Sq. Ft. PROPOSED EEIC AREA
Carpet area for EEIC =594.7 Sq.Ft

ELECTORAL EDUCATION AND INFORMATION CENTRE (EEIC) GROUND FLOOR LAYOUT PLAN []
1
16784 [55'-1"]
5485 [18'] 4196 [13'-9"] 2972 [9'-9"] 3749 [12'-4"]
3967 [13']
1753 [5'-9"]
4436 [14'-7"]
2758 [9'-1"]
1500 [4'-11"]
2845 [9'-4"]
2811 [9'-3"]
4267 [14']
4267 [14']
2845 [9'-4"]
2258 [7'-5"]
3578 [11'-9"]
6594 [21'-8"]
1426 [4'-8"]
15110 [49'-7"]
3234 [10'-7"]
3234 [10'-7"]
3132 [10'-3"]
13357 [43'-10"]
5
466 [27'-9"]
8
5207 [17'-1"]
5474 [18']
5474 [18']
3809 [12'-6"]
2654 [8'-8"] 3663 [12']
Storage rack
5485 [18'] 4196 [13'-9"] 2972 [9'-9"] 3749 [12'-4"]

17371 [57']
FIRST FLOOR PLAN Proposed area for ECN staff

Total Builtup area = 2025.71 Sq. Ft.)

ELECTORAL EDUCATION AND INFORMATION CENTRE (EEIC) FIRST FLOOR LAYOUT PLAN []
2
17446 [57'-3"]
5410 [17'-9"] 4346 [14'-3"] 3208 [10'-6"] 4099 [13'-5"]
1753 [5'-9"]
4117 [13'-6"]
5283 [17'-4"]
INTERACTIVE AREA
3735 [12'-3"]
4267 [14']
4267 [14']
10 Stations
1200 [3'-11"]
9215 [30'-3"]
1011 [3'-4"]
1318 [4'-4"]
1200 [3'-11"]
15110 [49'-7"]
3234 [10'-7"]
3234 [10'-7"]
13357 [43'-10"]
LOBBY
Information Board
6
DISPLAYS
Mock polling (4 nos -

2 manual and
2electronic)
Seating for
40 persons
MINI THEATRE
5207 [17'-1"]
5474 [18']
5474 [18']
7053 [23'-2"]
MAIN ENTRANCE
GROUND FLOOR PLAN

Total Builtup area = 196.72 Sq. M (2128.75 Sq. Ft.)
Carpet area for EEIC = 78.96 Sq.M. (850 Sq.Ft.)
5410 [17'-9"] 4346 [14'-3"] 3208 [10'-6"] 4099 [13'-5"]

17446 [57'-3"]
TITLE: Revision No: 0 Designed by:
PROJECT: Drawing No.
[]
ELECTORAL EDUCATION AND INFORMATION CENTRE (EEIC) GROUND FLOOR LAYOUT PLAN
Scale 1:100 3
BIRATNAGAR Date: March 2016
17446 [57'-3"]
5410 [17'-9"] 4346 [14'-3"] 3208 [10'-6"] 4099 [13'-5"]
1753 [5'-9"]
4117 [13'-6"]
5283 [17'-4"]
INTERACTIVE AREA
3735 [12'-3"]
4267 [14']
4267 [14']
10 Stations
1200 [3'-11"]
9215 [30'-3"]
1011 [3'-4"]
1318 [4'-4"]
1200 [3'-11"]
15110 [49'-7"]
3234 [10'-7"]
3234 [10'-7"]
13357 [43'-10"]
LOBBY
Information Board
7
DISPLAYS

2 manual and
2electronic)
Seating for
40 persons
MINI THEATRE
5207 [17'-1"]
5474 [18']
5474 [18']
7053 [23'-2"]
MAIN ENTRANCE
GROUND FLOOR PLAN

5410 [17'-9"] 4346 [14'-3"] 3208 [10'-6"] 4099 [13'-5"]

17446 [57'-3"]
[]
ELECTORAL EDUCATION AND INFORMATION CENTRE (EEIC) GROUND FLOOR LAYOUT PLAN
Scale 1:100 3
17671 [58']
5485 [18'] 4346 [14'-3"] 2972 [9'-9"] 4486 [14'-9"]
4117 [13'-6"]
1753 [5'-9"]
4436 [14'-7"]
2758 [9'-1"]
1500 [4'-11"]
2845 [9'-4"]
GENTS TOILET
2811 [9'-3"]
4267 [14']
4267 [14']
2845 [9'-4"]
2258 [7'-5"]
LADIES TOIL ET
3728 [12'-3"]
5680 [18'-8"] 1416 [4'-8"]
1426 [4'-8"]
15110 [49'-7"]
3234 [10'-7"]
3234 [10'-7"]
3132 [10'-3"]
3132 [10'-3"]
DATA
MAIN ENTRANCE
13357 [43'-10"]
LOBBY
8
66 [27'-9"]
PARTITION 4FT HIGH
2517 [8'-3"]
84
5207 [17'-1"]
5474 [18']
5474 [18']
2089 [6'-10"] RACK 4FT HIGH
3809 [12'-6"]
2564 [8'-5"]
2654 [8'-8"] 4399 [14'-5"]
2089 [6'-10"]
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
Storage rack
FIRST FLOOR LAYOUT PLAN [Biken N Pradhan ]
ELECTORAL EDUCATION AND INFORMATION CENTRE (EEIC)
4
BIRATNAGAR Scale 1:100 Date: MAR 2016
17671 [58']
5485 [18'] 4346 [14'-3"] 2972 [9'-9"] 4486 [14'-9"]
4117 [13'-6"]
1753 [5'-9"]
4436 [14'-7"]
2758 [9'-1"]
1500 [4'-11"]
2845 [9'-4"]
GENTS TOILET
2811 [9'-3"]
4267 [14']
4267 [14']
2845 [9'-4"]
2258 [7'-5"]
LADIES TOIL ET
3728 [12'-3"]
5680 [18'-8"] 1416 [4'-8"]
1426 [4'-8"]
15110 [49'-7"]
3234 [10'-7"]
3234 [10'-7"]
3132 [10'-3"]
3132 [10'-3"]
DATA
MAIN ENTRANCE
13357 [43'-10"]
LOBBY
9
66 [27'-9"]
PARTITION 4FT HIGH
2517 [8'-3"]
84
5207 [17'-1"]
5474 [18']
5474 [18']
2089 [6'-10"] RACK 4FT HIGH
3809 [12'-6"]
2564 [8'-5"]
2654 [8'-8"] 4399 [14'-5"]
2089 [6'-10"]
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
Storage rack
FIRST FLOOR LAYOUT PLAN [Biken N Pradhan ]
ELECTORAL EDUCATION AND INFORMATION CENTRE (EEIC)
5
BIRATNAGAR Scale 1:100 Date: MAR 2016
17446 [57'-3"]
5410 [17'-9"] 4346 [14'-3"] 3208 [10'-6"] 4099 [13'-5"]
1753 [5'-9"]
4117 [13'-6"]
5283 [17'-4"]
INTERACTIVE AREA
3735 [12'-3"]
4267 [14']
4267 [14']
10 Stations
1200 [3'-11"]
9215 [30'-3"]
1011 [3'-4"]
1318 [4'-4"]
1200 [3'-11"]
15110 [49'-7"]
3234 [10'-7"]
3234 [10'-7"]
13357 [43'-10"]
LOBBY
Information Board
10
DISPLAYS

2 manual and
2electronic)
Seating for
40 persons
MINI THEATRE
5207 [17'-1"]
5474 [18']
5474 [18']
7053 [23'-2"]
MAIN ENTRANCE
GROUND FLOOR PLAN

FLOORING TYPE
5410 [17'-9"] 4346 [14'-3"] 3208 [10'-6"] 4099 [13'-5"]
17446 [57'-3"]
INDIAN MARBLE FLOORING
[]
ELECTORAL EDUCATION AND INFORMATION CENTRE (EEIC) FLOORING LAYOUT PLAN
Scale 1:50 6
1200 1200 1200
877
150 140
4117 [13'-6"]
877
1200 1200 1200
5283 [17'-4"]
356
1868
3600
INTERACTIVE AREA
3735 [12'-3"]
10 Stations
1200 [3'-11"]
1868
9215 [30'-3"]
1200
282 318
1011 [3'-4"]
1318 [4'-4"]
1200 1200 1200 1200 1417 1197
382
1200 [3'-11"]
LOBBY
Information Board
11
600 600 600 600

DISPLAYS

2 manual and
2electronic)
729
Seating for
40 persons
MINI THEATRE
5207 [17'-1"]
300
7053 [23'-2"]
MAIN ENTRANCE
1800
729 300
GROUND FLOOR PLAN

ELECTORAL EDUCATION AND INFORMATION CENTRE (EEIC) []

LAYOUT PLAN - DETAIL DIMENSION 7
12
R2
T1 T1 T1 T1
R2
R2
R1
R1
T2
GROUND FLOOR PLAN

R3


FURNITURE LAYOUT PLAN 8
INTERACTIVE AREA
10 Stations
LOBBY
Information Board
13
DISPLAYS

2 man ual and
233 2elect ronic) 6584
1200
Seating for
40 persons
MINI THE ATRE
4800
1200
1200
MAIN ENTRANCE
12 00
GROUND FLOOR PLAN

CEILING TYPE
Modular Acoustic False ceiling
Gypsum false ceiling
PROJECT: BIRATNA TITLE: CEILING Revision

Desig
No: 0
ELECTORAL EDUCATION AND INFORMATION CENTRE (EEIC) GAR ned
FALSE
by: [ ]
Scale 1:50
Drawing No.
9
Date: March 2016
1275 1197 1418 318 1200 1200 1200
NORTH WALL ELEVATION
14
245 1200 1200 1200 1200 356 1200 1200 1200

150 140
SOUTH WALL ELEVATION

PARTITION DETAIL 10
23739 22258668 1200 1200 668 876 877
EAST WALL ELEVATION
952 1200 1200 1200 1318

WEST WALL ELEVATION

PARTITION DETAIL 11
15
10MM COMMERCIAL PLY
FINISHED WITH 1MM THICK
APPROVED COLOR LAMINATE
PLAN
A
2400
60MMX60MM HALDU WOOD
1200
FRAME NOT LESS THAN
400MM C/C. THE FRAMES
ARE TO BE FIXED IN HALVED
JOINTS AND SHALL BE
PLANNED AND LINED
PROPERLY.
16
19mm BOARD TO BE FIXED IN

THE PARTITION FRAME
WHERE TABLET FRAME IS TO
2400
BE INSTALLED.
10MM COMMERCIAL PLY

APPROVED COLOR LAMINATE
SECTION AT A-A FRAMING DETAIL

A


PARTITION DETAIL 12
5538 A
50MMX50MM HEAVY
600
SQUARE PIPE FIXED

ON FLOOR WITH HILTI
BOLT FIXED ON 8MM
THICK BASE PLATE
600
2400
TREAD= 600
600
RISER =225
600
PLAN
A BASE FIXING PLAN
17
620
25
50MMX50MM HEAVY
200
SQUARE PIPE
40MMX40MM SQUARE PIPE

25MM THICK SEASONED PINEWOOD
PLANKS FIXED OVER METAL FRAMES
WITH BOLTS. THE SURFACE SHALL
BE PLANE AND FINISHED WITH HIGH
QUALITY ENAMEL PAINT.
225 225 225 225
50MMX50MM HEAVY
SQUARE PIPE FIXED
WITH NUT BOLT
SECTION AT A-A FRAMING DETAIL
PROJECT: BIRATNAGAR TITLE: DESIGN: HOLDER

ELECTORAL EDUCATION AND INFORMATION CENTRE (EEIC) FURNITURE PAMPHLET
ision No: 0 Designed by: [ ]
Drawing No.
Scale 1:50
13
Date: March 2016
1MM THICK LAMINATE
FINISH(DAARK COLOR)
1MM THICK LAMINATE

FINISH(LIGHT COLOR)
250 479 2400 479 250 1299
TV WALL DETAIL

ELECTORAL EDUCATION AND INFORMATION CENTRE (EEIC) Wall Cladding for TV Backing
[]
14
18
ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS
19
GENTS TOILET
ALL TABLET 2T r C ei
ling cassette
AT 1M
HEIGHT
INTERACTIVE AREA S
2T r Ceil in g cassette 10 Stations
LADIES TOILET
S
S
LOBBY
Information Board
20
AT 2.4M
HEIGHT
DISPLAYS

2 manual and
2electronic)
S
FIR E
Seating for
40 persons
MINI THEATRE
2Tr Ceiling cassette
1.5 Tr Ceiling
cassette
MAIN ENTRANCE
AT 1.5M HEIGHT
S
AND SWITCH
TV
SHALL BE ABOVE
RACK FOR ALL
POWER SOCKETS
GROUND FLOOR PLAN
PROJECT: ELECTORAL EDUCATION AND BIRATN TITLE: L

ELECTRICA
INFORMATION CENTRE (EEIC) AGAR LAYO
UT PLAN Revision No: 0 Designed
Drawing No.
by: [ ]
Scale E1
1:50 Date: March
2016
GENTS TOILET
2T r Ceiling cassette
INTERACTIVE AREA
2 Tr C eil in g cassette 10 Stations
LADIES TOILET
21
LOBBY
Information Board
DISPLAYS

2 manual and
2electronic)
Seating for
40 persons
MINI THEATRE
1.5 Tr Ceiling
cassette
MAIN ENTRANCE
GROUND FLOOR PLAN

PROJECT: ELECTORAL EDUCATION AND INFOR MATION CENTRE (EEIC)

BIRATNAGAR TITLE: Revision No: 0 Designed by:
Drawing No.
[]
LIGHTING PLAN WITH CEILING
Scale 1:50 E2
Date: March 2016
GENTS TOILET
ALL TABLET
AT 1M
HEIGHT
INTERACTIVE AREA
10 Stations
LADIES TOILET
LOBBY
Information Board
22
AT 2.4M
HEIGHT
DISPLAYS

2 manual and
2electronic)
Seating for
40 persons
MINI THEATRE
MAIN ENTRANCE
AT 1.5M HEIGHT
AND SWITCH
TV SHALL BE ABOVE
RACK FOR ALL
POWER SOCKETS
GROUND FLOOR PLAN

Designed by: Scale 1:50
POWER/DATA/COMMUNICATION
BIRATNAGAR
Date: March 2016
Drawing No.
E3
GENTS TOILET
INTERACTIVE AREA S
10 Stations
LADIES TOILET
S
S
LOBBY
Information Board
23
DISPLAYS

2 manual and
2electronic)
S
FI R E
Seating for
40 persons
MINI THEATRE
MAIN ENTRANCE
GROUND FLOOR PLAN



SECURITY SYSTEMS WITH CEILING E4
GENTS TOILET
2T r Ceiling cassette
INTERACTIVE AREA
2 Tr C eil in g cassette 10 Stations
LADIES TOILET
24
LOBBY
Information Board
DISPLAYS

2 manual and
2electronic)
Seating for
40 persons
MINI THEATRE
1.5 Tr Ceiling
cassette
MAIN ENTRANCE
GROUND FLOOR PLAN

PROJECT: ELECTORAL EDUCATION AND INFOR MATION CENTRE (EEIC)

BIRATNAGAR TITLE: Revision No: 0 Designed by:
Drawing No.
[]
HVAC PLAN WITH CEILING
Scale 1:50 E5
Date: March 2016
LEGENDS
Electrical connections 2' x 2' Recessed LED lights
Distribution Box 2' x 2' Surface mounted LED lights
Manual Call Point LED Down lights
FIRE FIRE Panel Dome lights
Data Socket 2'/4' wide tubes

25
DATA DATA Panel Exhaust fan with louvers
USB Charging outlet Spot lights
Power Socket CCTV CC TV Panel
Power Socket (Flat pin

from UPS)
CC TV - Fixed
Switch AC - Ceiling mounted


LEGENDS E6
FURNITURE DETAILS
26
900
600
27
PLAN 12MM THICK GLASS TOPWITH

MACHINE POLISHED EDGE
PUSH MAGNET AND LOCK

FOR GLASS SHUTTER
PATCH FITTING FOR

GLASS SHUTTER
37
INTERIORS AND EXTERIORS

LAMINATES
8MM THICK GLASS SHUTTER
653
750
WITH MACHINE POLISHED EDGE
SKIRTING
60
FRONT ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION

ELECTORAL EDUCATION AND INFORMATION CENTRE (EEIC) FURNITURE DESIGN: []

DISPLAY CABINET F1
A
700
450
600
125
A
25
PLAN
EDGE FINISHED WITH
SISHAM WOOD LIPPING
FINISHED WITH HIGH
QUALITY FRENCH
200
POLISH
INTERIOR AND
28
EXTERIOR FINISHED
WITH 1MM THICK
LAMINATE
550
TOP FINISHED WITH
1MM THICK LAMINATE
1500
60690
BUFFER
SECTION AT A-A FRONT ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION


VOTING BOOTH F2
A
1500
100
MOVABLE PEDASTAL
600
PLAN A REAR ELEVATION

29
FRONT MODESTY
FINISHED WITH 1MM
THICK LAMINATE
(LIGHT)
EDGE FINISHED WITH

SISHAM WOOD LIPPING
FINISHED WITH HIGH
QUALITY FRENCH
POLISH
688
FRONT MODESTY
750
FINISHED WITH 1MM

THICK LAMINATE
(LIGHT)
62
BUFFER
PROJECT: BIRATNAGAR TITLE: DESIGN: TION DESK

ELECTORAL EDUCATION AND INFORMATION CENTRE (EEIC) FURNITURE REGISTRA
sion No: 0 Designed by: [ ]
Drawing No.
Scale 1:20
F3
Date: March 2016
A
1800
450
PLAN A
30
25
CABINET LOCK
STAINLESS STEEL HANDLE

INTERIOR FINISHED WITH HIGH
QUALITY FRENCH POLISH
EXTERIORS FINISHED WITH 1MM
750
825
449 449 449 449

THICK LAMINATES
WOODEN SHUTTER WITH 1MM

THICK LAMINATE
50
SKIRTING
PROJECT: BIRATNAGAR TITLE: DESIGN: CABINET

ELECTORAL EDUCATION AND INFORMATION CENTRE (EEIC) FURNITURE STORAGE
sion No: 0 Designed by: [ ]
Drawing No.
Scale 1:20
F4
Date: March 2016
1350 WOODEN
FRAME
SOFT BOARD
915
750
31
12MM DIA STAINLESS

1150 STEEL ROD
30
235
235
125
95
FRONT ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION


INFORMATION BOARD F5
375
140
PLAN
30 30
20 275 20
32
74
279
200
FRONT SIDE ELEVATION
SECTION AT A-A ELEVATION
TION

Designed by: Scale 1:10
BIRATNAGAR PAMPHLET HOLDER
Date: March 2016
Drawing No.
F6
A
700
LIGHT
450
600
125
A
25
PLAN
33
TOP FINISHED WITH

DARK
140
200
200
1MM THICK LAMINATE DARK
LIGHT
60
75
200
INTERIOR AND LIGHT
200
EXTERIOR FINISHED
WITH 1MM THICK
75
75
DARK
LAMINATE
1200
LIGHT
1000
438
438
EDGE FINISHED WITH

SISHAM WOOD LIPPING 250
FINISHED WITH HIGH
QUALITY FRENCH
75
75
POLISH
BUFFER 400
200
212
SECTION AT A-A REAR ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION FRONT ELEVATION
BIRATNAGAR DESIGN:
PROJECT: TITLE: PAMPHLET Revisio
n No: 0
Desig
ELECTORAL EDUCATION AND INFORMATION CENTRE (EEIC) FURNITURE HOLDER ned
by: [ ]
Scale 1:20 Drawing No.
F7
Date: March 2016
BILL OF QUANTITIES
34
Client: UNDP
Project : Interior Design Works of the EEIC
Location : Election Commission Building, Biratnagar, Nepal
SUMMARY OF COSTS
Sl. Description Total Amount
A Civil Works
B Carpentry Works
C Furnishing works
D Electrical and Allied Works
E Air-conditioning system
Sub-Total
VAT
TOTAL
Amount in words: ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………
Authorised Signature
………………………………… …………………………………
Name of the Company Company Seal
Notes:
1. All Materials brought on site of works and meant to be used in the same shall be the best of their respective kinds
and to the approval to the architects/Employer.
2. Samples of all materials shall be got approved by the Architects/Employer and shall be deposited with him before
the order for the material is placed with the suppliers. The material brought on the works shall confirm in every
respective with approved samples.
3. Any material that have not been found to confirm to the specification will be rejected for which shall be removed
from the site by the contractors within 48 hours at their own cost.
4. The contractor shall provide the mateials as mentioned in the specification.
5. Workmanship: All works shall be to level plumb and square comers, edges and arises in all cases shall be unbroken
and finished neat.
35
Client: UNDP
Bill No. A: Civil Works

Rate Amount
S.No Description of Works Unit Quantity
(NRS)
1.0 Dismantling
Dismantling Brick wall, partitions(low and high),furniture, ceiling, slabs
required for new construction using cutter on both side of wall for minimum
disturbance to the structure retaining its services like sewer, drainage,
electricity, etc. including collection transportation and disposal of
dismantled debris off the site as per drawing, specification and direction of
Architect.
1.1 Wall Sq.M. 26.00
2.0 Plaster Sq.M. 12.00

Supplyng, laying and fixing plaster including supply of materials, labour,
mixing, making grooves, strengthening joints, curing and scaffolding where
required all complete as per drawing, specification and direction of
Architect.
12.5 mmthick 1:4 cement sand mortar
3.0 Marble Works
Providing and Laying approved quality, pattern and colour (Similar as existing
marble) 19mm thick pink indian marble on floor with cement mortar of
mix 1:4 (1 Cement: 4 Coarse Sand) backing and filling joints with
necessary screeding works at necessary space with white cement slurry all
complete as per the technical drawings and specification and instructions.
3.1 Flooring Sq.m 45.00
3.2 100mm high skirting R.m 20.00
4.0 Marble Polishing works Sq.m 85.00
Clean and mirror polish the existing indian marble flooring without affecting
other existing structures including cutting, grinding, polishing and cleaning
all complete as per specification and instruction of Architect.
36
Rate Amount
(NRS)
5.0 False Ceiling (Modular) Sq.M. 85.00
Supplying and installing Acoustic Board False Ceiling: 600 x 600 ceiling tile of
dune or classic lite or fine fissured micro finish acoustic board false ceiling
with 44 mm high Silhoutte black groove main Runner and Cross Tee with
3mm reveal each, with suspension hangers with spacing no larger than
400mm and as per attached catalogue, drawing, specification and direction
of Architect.15mm width Shilloutte Black groove Channel and Dune or Classic
lite or Fine fissured Micro look Board
Make: ARMSTRONG OR EQUIVALENT
6.0 False Ceiling (Gypsum) Sq.M. 20.00

Providing and fixing suspended Boral or equivelant gypsum board ceiling
(straight, vertical & curved) , with thickness no less than 12mm with exterior
surface duly taped at all joints, leveled with calcium silicate compound, with
surface prepared with POP/putty along entire area to receive two coats of
Primer and three coats of Emulsion Paint. frames with suspension hangers
with spacing no larger than 400mm screwed to the ceiling/walls as per
attached catalogue,design, drawing, specification/schedule of finishes and
direction of Architect.
Make: BORAL or EQUIVALENT
7.0 Wall putty Sq.m 110.00

Providing and applying wall putty work in order to make the total plastered
wall surface perfectly leveled , including cost of all materials,labour,
conveyance, scaffolding, watering, curing, etc., as per drawing,
specification/schedule of finishes and direction of Architect.
MAKE: JK/BIRLA/ASIAN or equivalent
8.0 Paint
8.1 Plastic Emulsion Sq.m 192.00
Supply and applying one coat primer and two coats of anti fungus, anti stain
plastic emulsion paint in wall surfaces above wall putty , at any level, finished
smooth including supply of materials, labour, preparation of base etc. all
complete as per drawing, specification/schedule of finishes and direction of
Architect.
MAKE: ASIAN/BERGER or euivalent
8.2 Enamel Sq.m 20.00

Supply and applying one coat primer and two coats of anti fungus, anti stain
enamel paint in wall surfaces above wall putty , at any level, finished smooth
including supply of materials, labour, preparation of base etc. all complete
as per drawing, specification/schedule of finishes and direction of Architect.
MAKE: ASIAN/BERGER or equivalent
9.0 Stepped Seating Sq.m 21.00
Fabricate, supply and install raised seating in mock polling area made up of
min. 50mmx50mm MS square pipe steel structures and supports of
40mmx40mm square pipe and seating top and side cover of 25mm thick
seasoned pine wood planks painted with approved enamel paint with one
coat of wood primer and three coat of enamel paint. The plank shall be fixed
with nut and bolts in metal structure all complete as per drawing,
specification and instruction of engineeer.
SUB-TOTAL (A)
37
Client: UNDP
Bill No. B: Carpentry Works

Rate Amount
(NRS)
1.0 Furiture works
Fabricate, supply and fixing furnitures made of 19mm blockboard of
approved quality, brand Green or equivalent as approved with
1mm laminate finish,with high quality exclusive steel hardware fiitings
and heavy section channels, hinges, 8 mm glass, locks including all
accessories like buffers, push magnets, patch fittings, brackets etc where
necessary and all complete as approved per the drawings, specification
and instructions.
Make:
BOARD: Greenboard or equivalent
LAMINATE: GREENLAM or equivalent
1.1 Polling Booth (T1) No 4.00
1.2 Registration Desk (T2) No 1.00
1.3 Storage Cabinet (1.8m x 0.84m x 0.60m) (R1) No 1.00
1.4 Ballot Box Stand No 1.00
1.5 Museum Rack (Display Cabinet) (R2) No 3.00
1.6 Storage Cabinet (0.85m Wx 2.10m Hx 0.60m D) (R3) No 1.00
1.7 Podium (T3) No 1.00
1.8 Builtin Cabinet (R3) No 1.00
1.9 Pamplet Holder No 10.00
1.10 Information board No 1.00
2.0 Wooden partition Sq.M. 78.00

Supply and fixing Haldu wood frame 60 x 60mm in cross section with
battens no larger than 450mm c/c apart bothways horizontally and
vertically including the framing above false ceiling. The partition shall
consist of 10mm thick approved commercial ply along the straight
surface and 2 layers of flexible ply along the curve. The surface shall be
finished with 1mm thick approved Laminates on both sides to be applied
with with fevicol adhesive. The partition shall have glazings of 8mm thick
toughened glass with etching patterns where required. The glass shall be
fixed with approved quality Sisham wood moulding of size 15mm x
35mm. This moulding shall be finished with high quality french polish
over sand finished wooden surface. There shall be 4" high sisham wood
skirting flushed with the partition which shall be finished with french
polish over sand finished surface all complete as per drawing,
specification and direction of Architect. The length of the partitions shall
be verified at site
Make:
COMMERCIAL PLY:Green Board or equivalent
LAMINATE: GREENLAM or equivalent
38
Rate Amount
(NRS)
9.0 Aluminium Door No 1.00
Aluminium Door: Providing and Fixing anodised Aluminium Door
consisting of Sections 83.5 MM X 44.45 MM X 2.00 MM thick vertical, top
and middle horizontal members and bottom members of size 114.60MM
X 44.45MM X 2.00MM thickness. Bottom upto 3’ Ht will be provided with
12MM thick both side pre-laminated board as mentioned in the item 1
above and rest above provided with 5.5 MM thick transparent float glass.
Door provided with 100 MM stainless steel dead lock Godrej make,
hydraulic floor spring(godrej Make) ,(double action) heavy quality ISI
marked with SS cover plate 100 MM dia Circular plate type handles (2
nos.) tower bolt of size 250 x10 mm (Barrel Type) including cutting the
floor etc complete as directed by engineer/site Incharge.
SUB-TOTAL (B)
40
Client: UNDP
Bill No. C: Furnishing Works

Rate Amount
(NRS)
1.0 Vertical Blind Sq.M. 20.00
Supply and install Vertical Blinds made of glass fibre fabrics in width not
less than 4". Minimum overlapping of 20mm in fabric. Top aluminium
anodized rail of 1.4 mm thickness. 40mm wide channel with front
lamination of same fabric. Runners having stainless steel hooks with
built-in shock spring and self aligning slip clutch. End control box
composed of double gear system. Botton weight fully plastic covered
linked with plastic bead chain. Approved colour and pattern as per
attached drawing, specification/schedule of finishes and direction of
Architect.
MAKE: VISTA OR EQUIVALENT
2.0 Staff Chairs Nos. 2.00
Provide revolving chair: Thick Padded Contoured Fabric/PU Seat and

Mesh Back with Lumbar Support. Pneumatic Seat Height Adjustment.
Height Adjustable Lower Lumbar Support. Tension Adjustable Lumbar
Support. Locking Tilt Control Mechanism. Tension Control.
 Stainless steel Chrome

 High quality black net/mesh finished on back
 Black PU on seat.
 Fine hard plastic on armrest.
 Stainless steel Chrome Base
 Size approximately: Chair H 86.5cm, Seat H: 46cm, Seat D: 49.5cm,
Seat W.: 46cm
MAKE: KIVIK/KTM/FEATHERLITE or equivalent
3.0 Stainless Steel Hook for headset No 20.00

Provide and install stainless steel hook of 3kg capacity with stainless
screws for Headset including all accessories and hardware required as
per instruction of engineer.
SUB-TOTAL (C)
41
Client: UNDP
Bill No. D: Electrical and Allied Works

Rate Amount
(NRS)
1 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
Supply, delivery, installation of distribution Board wall mountable,
push button lock and made of 16 SWG MS metal sheet including
neutral bar and phase bar and adequate space for incomming and
outgoing cable with all the chiselling of wall fixing mortar and
civil works with complete internal wiring as per the drawing,
specification, instruction , electricity rules all complete.( Make: MCB
Seimens,ABB or equi.)
a DISTRIBUTION BOARD-DB-EEIC Set. 1

FDB-GF Box
City Supply Section
Circuit Breakers:
Incoming : 1 nos 20 A TP MCB ( 10 kA, BC)
Outgoings:
2 nos. of 16 Amp DP MCB ( 10 kA)
10 nos. of 6/10/16 Amp SP MCB ( 10 kA, BC)
2 nos. of 20 Amp DP MCB( 10 kA, BC)
100A TPNE Copper Busbar with accessories
AC Supply Section
Circuit Breakers:
Incoming : 1 nos 16 A TP MCB ( 10 kA, BC)
Outgoings:
5 nos. of 16/20 Amp DP MCB( 10 kA, BC)
Meters:
1 set. 0-500V Voltmeter with selector switch
1 set. 0-50A Ammeter with selector switch
1 set. of 50/5A ring type CT coil
Indicator Lamps
b UPS-DB Set. 1
DB Box
Circuit Breakers:
Incoming : 1 nos.20 A DP MCB ( 10 kA, BC)
Outgoings:
4 nos. of 16/20 Amp SP MCB ( 10 kA, BC)
c Manual Changeover Switch for Standby Generator

Supply, installation and connection of 63A TPN Manual Changeover (
HAVELL'S / BENTEX or equivelent ), (Based on 60 amp Mains incoming Set 1
connection and 25 ~ 30 KVA Genset)
2 LOW TENSION FEEDER CABLES / WIRES/CONDUITS

Supply, delivery, laying, connecting, testing and commissioning of
the following Armoured
/unarmoured PVC insulated and sheathed power cables and wires
through HDP pipe/Listic (whichever applicable) including cable
shoes/sockets cable clamps and necessary connecting, fixing,
earthing, , chiselling of existing wall / ceiling and redoing the
chiselled area with cement and sand mortar as per the drawings, site
conditions, specifications, electricity rules and instructions all
complete.( Cable Make: Prakash/Litmus/Pioneer or NS mark )
a. 4 core, 25 sq.mm armoured. Cu cable rm 100

(main connection)
42
Rate Amount
(NRS)
b. 4 core, 10 sq.mm unarmoured. Cu cable rm. 35
(MDB to FDB )
c. 3 x6 sq.mm unarmoured. Cu cable rm. 65

(FDBs to UPS DB to UPS DB & UPS )
c. 1c, 6 sq.mm multistrand Cu cable (E) rm. 45
3 LIGHT POINTS WIRING THROUGH CONDUIT/LISTIC for UPS

a Supplying the materials and concealed wiring through ceiling, false pt. 41
ceiling, wall of light points ( the point wiring should include light, fan
outlet of required length from control devices/switches to a point )
using 2 x 2.5sq.mm Multistrand Flexible wire in a hard HDP
pipe of size 20/25 mm. copper WIRE including cable shoes/sockets
cable clamps and necessary connecting, fixing, chiselling of
existing wall / ceiling and redoing the chiselld area with cement and
sand mortar as per the drawings, site conditions
,specifications and instruction all complete. (Make: Cables-
prakash/Litmus/Pioneer or NS:344/2052 , HDP-NS)
4 13AMP/15 AMP POWER POINT WIRING

(For all the general power sockets, server and computer power sockets)
4a Supplying the materials and concealed wiring through ceiling, false pt. 25
ceiling,tables wall of power points ( the point wiring should include
wiring between the power points ) using 2 x 4 +1x2.5 sq.mm Cu
wire in a HDP pipe of size 20/25 mm. dia. including cable
shoes/sockets cable clamps and necessary connecting, fixing,
earthing, chiselling of existing wall / ceiling and redoing the chiselled
area with cement and sand mortar as per the drawings, site
conditions ,specifications and instruction all complete. (Make: Cables-
5 AC POWER POINT WIRING

(For Air Conditioner)
5a Supplying the materials and concealed wiring for single phase AC pt. 4
units through ceiling, false ceiling wall of power points ( the point
wiring from nominated DB to indoor AC units and outdoor to indoor
units interconnection ) using 2 x4 sq. mm
+ 1x2.5 sq.mm Flexible multistrand in a HDP pipe of size 25 mm.
dia. including cable shoes/sockets cable clamps and necessary
connecting, fixing, earthing, chiselling of existing wall / ceiling and
redoing the chiselled area with cement and sand mortar as per the
drawings, site conditions ,specifications and instruction all complete.
(Make: Cables- prakash/Litmus/Pioneer or NS:344/2052 , HDP-NS)
6 LIGHT FIXTURES
Supply, delivery, installation, testing and commissioning of the
following light fixtures with all the acessories including the
necessary connection, fixing and insulating materials as per the
electricity rule, drawings, site conditions, specifications and
instructions all complete.
a 6" Dia downlighter with 12w LED lights set. 20

Wipro, Legero (LVT 6512) or equivalent
b 36 watt recessed mounted LED luminaire with complete prismatic set. 14

difuser suitale for modular ceiling. Size : 570mmx570mm
Wipro(Pure LED - LM 14)/Legero (LRP 1236 or equivalent
43
Rate Amount
(NRS)
e 2" dai Spot Light with 3 W LED warm set. 3
( Make: Wipro/Philips/GEor equivalent )
f 1x40W FTL with Acrylic cover set. 2

( Make: Wipro/Philips/GEor equivalent )
g 9" dia Exhaust Fan set. 2

(Polar, Usha, Crompton or equivalent)
7 SWITCHES,SOCKETS ,PLUG WITH PLATES

Supplying and fixing of following switches, sockets including metal
boxes concealed inside wall and accessories with necessary civil
works as per drawings, specifications, electricity rules and
instructions all complete.
MODULAR SWITCHES
MAKE: CLIPSAL/ORANGE/OR EQUIVALENT
a 1- gang one way switch no. 2

c 2-gang one way switch no. 1
e 3- gang one way switch no. 1
f 4-gang one way switch no. 5
g 6-gang one way switch no. 1
k 16 A, 6 pin, power socket coupled no. 3
l 13 A, 3 pin, power socket coupled no. 22
m TV Socket no 1
n 2A output USB Charger Outlet (Make: Northwest or equivalent) no 11
8 2amp USB CHARGING POINTS WIRING pt. 11

Supplying the materials and concealed wiring through ceiling, false
ceiling, wall of USB charging points using 2 x 2.5sq.mm Multistrand
Flexible wire in a hard HDP pipe of size 20/25 mm. copper WIRE
including cable shoes/sockets cable clamps and necessary connecting,
fixing, chiselling of existing wall / ceiling and redoing the chiselld
area with cement and sand mortar as per the drawings, site
conditions ,specifications and instruction all complete. (Make: Cables-
9.00 Networking/Data Points Wiring Per Point 3.00
Supply, delivery, wiring, conduit laying of computer networking

points with cat 6 UTP cable (from switch to individual points) through
16 / 20mm dia. HDP pipe concealed in ceilings, walls and floors
including heavy type metal box and all necessary connecting, fixing,
insulation all complete. (IT ROOM TO EEIC PREMISES)
CABLE MAKE: NEX-1/D-LINK/AMP or equivalent
10.00 Single Gang Face Plate with Information Outlet Nos. 3.00
Supply and installation of Computer Outlets RJ 45 , CAT 6 , single ,
with required facia plate and flush mounting GI boxes
MAKE: D-LINK/LINK-BASIC or equivalent
11.00 Category 6 Patch Panel

a.
Supply and Installation of 24-ports, rack mounted, Highimpact, flame
retardant,thermoplastic or Powdercoated steel, 22/24 AWG, CAT 6a
Nos. 1.00
RJ-45 patch panel for Data as per specification/schedule of finishes.
(MAKE: LINK BASIC, NEX-1 or equivalent)
44
Rate Amount
(NRS)
12.00 9U Wall Mount Rack with FAN Nos. 1.00
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of 9U rack with fan
designed to integrate wall-mounting, easy equipment access, and
cable management in IT network. Adjustable rack rails with square
mounting holes accommodate up to 12U of standard 19" rackmount
equipment; adjustable front and rear vertical rackmount rails;
Locking, reversible Plexiglas® front door (2.7mm thick) and locking,
removable side panels.
MAKE: LINK BASIC or Equivalent
13.00 Supply and installation of following switches:

c. Cisco SG100-16 16-port Gigabit Switch Nos. 1.0
14.00 TV Point wiring Per Point 1.00
Wiring for TV Point from System Room to respective locations with

RG6 Coaxial Cable and Power supply wires through in 20mm HDP pipe
including MS box, juntion box, pull boxin with all required materials
with necessary distributor terminal in between the TV Terminals.
15 EARTHING set. 2
Supplying materials, installation, testing, commissioning of earthing
for Building earthing / equipments body earthing / system earthing,
consisting following specified parameters: ( provisional - to be
installed if the existing ssystem does not have required
minimumEarth resistance of 4-6 Ohms for Mains and 1 Ohms for
System)
Plate Earthing
* Earthing with COPPER earth plate 600 mm x 600 mm x 6 mm thick

including accessories, and providing masonry enclosure with cover
plate having locking arrangement and watering pipe ect. (but without
charcoal or coke and salt) complete as required.
* 150mm thick alternate layers of Salt and Charcoal covering earth
electrode completely.
* Brazed jointing of earth electrode with earthing conductor including
copper nut-bolts.
* Providing of perforated 25mm. dia. GI watering pipe including earth
excavation, refilling with compacted soil in layers of maximum
300mm. thickness all complete. The contractor should responsible to
maintain earthing resistance less than 5 Ohm.
* Supply and installation of SWG no 8 gauge bare copper conductor
from Earthing Stationss 3 Phase Main DB, Generator neutral and body
and System
16 SECURITY SYSTEMS
16.1 CC Camera point wiring pt. 4
Supplying and laying of CAT-6 UTP cable made of Cu with 23/60 twin
dc wire inside 20/25 mm. dia. HDP materials including labour
charge for laying CCTV cables with pull boxes, metal box all
complete and concealed wiring through ceiling, false ceiling, wall,
table whichever applicable including cable shoes/sockets cable
clamps and necessary connecting, fixing, chiselling of existing wall /
ceiling and redoing the chiselld area with cement and sand mortar
as per the drawings, site conditions ,specifications and instruction all
complete. All point wiring from each CCTV (IP cameras) to be
terminated to HUB switch (Make: HDP-NS) From server room to
specified location
CABLE BRAND: PIONEER, PRAKASH OR NS:344/2052
CABLE MAKE: NEX-1/D-LINK/AMP or equivalent
45
Rate Amount
(NRS)
16.2 UPS Output Power points for NVR and switch set 2
Supply and installatiopn of UPS Output Power points for cameras with
2 x 4 sq. mm. + 1 x 2.5 sq. mm. multistrained PVC insulated copper
conductor in a hard HDP pipe of size 20/25 mm from UPS DB to
various points.
16.3 Supply Delivery, Installation Testing and Commissioning of CCTV

camera/ HDVR system as per the drawing, specification all
complete.
a Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of 2 MP Full HD set. 6
Network Small IR Dome Camera. 1/3” 2 Megapixel progressive scan
Aptina CMOS, H.264 & MJPEG dual-stream encoding, 25/30 fps@
1080P (1920×1080), DWDR, Day/Night(ICR), AWB,AGC,BLC, Multiple
network monitoring: Web viewer, CMS (DSS/Smart PSS) & DMSS,
3.6mm fixed lens (2.8mm, 6mm optional), Max. IR LEDs Length 30 m,
Micro SD memory(-S), IP66, IK10, PoE.
Make: DAHUA 1200 model or equivalent
b 8 Channel Network Video Recorder (NVR) with 2 TB Hard Disk
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of 8Channel Network set. 1

Video Recorder (NVR) with 6 TB Hard Disk.
>Max 256Mbps incoming bandwidth
>Up to 8ch@1080P(4ch @H.265 + 4ch @H.264) realtime live-view
>Up to 12Mp resolution live-view & playback
>2HDMI/1 VGA simultaneous video output
>8 channel synchronous realtime playback, GRID interface
>Support Multi-brand network cameras: Dahua, Arecont Vision, AXIS,
Bosch, Brickcom, Canon, CP Plus, Honeywell, Panasonic, Pelco,
Samsung, Sanyo, Sony, Videotec, Vivotek and etc.
>ONVIF Version 2.4 conformance
>3D intelligent positioning with Dahua PTZ camera
>Support 4 SATA HDDs up to 24TB, 3 USB(2 USB3.0), 1 eSATA port
>Support IPC UPnP, 8PoE ports
>Support P2P, QR code scan & add
>Multiple network monitoring: Web viewer, CMS(DSS/Smart PSS) &
Smart Phone(DMSS)
>2 TB HDD
MAKE : DAHUA or quivalent
c 24" LED Monitor for display - Dell or equivalent No 1

Optimal Resolution:1920 x 1080 at 60 Hz
Aspect Ratio:Widescreen (16:9)
Pixel Pitch:0.2745mm x 0.2745mm
Brightness:250 cd/m2 (typical)
Color Support:16.7 million colors
Contrast Ratio:1000: 1 (typical), Dynamic Contrast Ratio : 8 Million:1
(Max)
Backlight Technology:LED
e. Category 6 Patch Panel Nos. 1.0

Supply and Installation of 24-ports, rack mounted, Highimpact, flame
retardant,thermoplastic or Powdercoated steel, 22/24 AWG, CAT 6a
RJ-45 patch panel for Data as per specification.
(MAKE: LINK BASIC/DIGI-LINK) or equivalent
46
Rate Amount
(NRS)
f. 8 Port POE Switch Nos. 1.0
16-Port Desktop Gigabit PoE Switch - 8 Ports - 10/100/1000 Base -T -

2 Layer Supported - Wall Mountable IEEE 802.3, 802.3u, 802.3x,
802.3ab,802.3az, 802.3af, and 802.3at (PoE+) Full line rate and
forwarding rate of 64B frame at: 1.488 Mpps for 1000M port, 0.1488
Mpps for 100M port, 0.01488Mpps for 10M port
16.4 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INSTALLATION WORKS

A Supply , delivery, installation testing and
commission of following accessories as per the instruction,
specification, drawing all complete.
a Smoke Detectors
nos. 6
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Optical smoke
detector with base; auto compensation; digital processing algorithm;
protected area - up to 120 sq. m.; low profile design; LED indication
with 360 visibility; sensor status indication every 8 seconds.
Make: TELETEK EECTRONICS/HORING LIH/SYSTEM SENSOR or

equivalent
b Fire Indication Lamp

nos. 2
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of fire remote
indicator with 1 input. The device repeats the status of 1 or several
automatic fire detectors (up to 3 SensoMAG detectors series). The
remote indicator operates with limited current detectors.

equivvalent
c Hooter with flash light

nos. 2
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of indoor conventional
piezo siren (sound output - 105 dB) with red flash (LED strobe).

equivalent
d Manual Call Point

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of surface mounting nos. 2
Manual Call Point with resettable flexible element, LED indication and
special tool for resetting after alarm event.
equivalent
e 4 zone Fire Alarm Control Panel

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of 4 zone fire panel, nos. 1
12 Volt battery back-up; One man test function; 4 fully monitored fire
zones with up to 32 fire alarm detectors per zone and unlimited
number of call points; 2 monitored siren outputs 300 mA each; 1
“fire” and 1”fault” relay output; Active EOL allowing continuous
monitoring of inputs; Walk test; Multilanguage support LED indication;
Security key; Metal box.
Make: TELETEK EECTRONICS (MAG 4M)/HORING LIH (AH-00212
)/SYSTEM SENSOR or eequivalent
47
Rate Amount
(NRS)
f SMOKE DETECTOR/HEAT DETECTOR/ MCP/RESPONSE INDICATOR POINT WIRING
Supplying the 2x1 sq.mm Flexible Cu wires materials and concealed pt. 11
wiring through ceiling, false ceiling, wall, table whichever
applicable in a hard PVT conduit of size 20/25 mm. dia. as per
drawing specifications and instruction all complete.
g SOUNDER POINT WIRING pt. 2

Supplying the 2x1.5 sq.mm Flexible Cu wires materials and
concealed wiring through ceiling, false ceiling, wall, table
whichever applicable in a LISTIC/HDP pipe of size 20/25 mm. dia.
as per drawing specifications and instruction all complete.
h FIRE EXTINGUISHER
nos. 2
Supply, delivery and installation of 5 Kg ABC Stored Pressure Multi-
purpose type Fire Extinguisher having glow sign on cylinder with fixing
accessories per the drawings, specification/schedule of finishess,
electricity rules and instructions all complete.
Make: NAFCO or equivalent

SUB-TOTAL (D)
48
Client: UNDP
Bill No. C: Furnishing Works

Rate Amount
(NRS)
1.0 PART A
Supply, installaton, testing and commissioning of heat pump type split
HVAC system inlcusive with fully charged refrigerant (R-410A) inclusive
of interconnicting power and control cables, individual wired/wireless
remote contrllers and supports made of MS angle/ rods as per
specifications and drawings of following capacity
MAKE: MITSUBISHI/LG or equivalent
1.1 4-Way Ceiling Cassette Type Indoor & Outdoor Unit with Drain Pump. set 1.00
Nominal cooling capacity: 5.8 kW

Nominal heating capacity: 6.3 kW
Refrigearnt: R410A
Sound Pressure Level at high speed: 32 dBA
Air flow rate at high speed: 477 CFM
Electrical power source: 1 Ph, 220-240V, 50 Hz
Liquid line pipe diameter: 6.4 mm
Gas line pipe diameter: 12.7 mm
Type: Heat Pump

Capacity: 1.5 Ton ± 5%
1.2 4-Way Ceiling Cassette Type Indoor & Outdoor Unit with Drain Pump. set 3.00
Nominal cooling capacity: 7.1 kW

Nominal heating capacity: 8 kW
Refrigearnt: R410A
Sound Pressure Level at high speed: 50 dBA
Air flow rate at high speed: 741 CFM
Electrical power source: 1 Ph, 220-240V, 50 Hz
Liquid line pipe diameter: 9.5 mm
Gas line pipe diameter: 15.9 mm
Type: Heat Pump

Capacity: 2.0 ± 5%
2.0 PART B
Installation between indoor to outdoor unit including all required
installation materials like copper tube, gas, insulation tube, electrical
wiring of the following capacity:
2.1 Installation charges for Ceiling Cassette units Nos. 4.00
2.2 Outdoor supporting angles Nos. 4.00
2.3 Extra piping M. 40.00
SUB-TOTAL (E)
49
Client: UNDP
S.No Description Qty Capacity/Size Make

A Samples to be provided
1 Wood
2 Marble
3 Block Board
4 Ply
5 Laminate
6 Blind
7 Gypsum board
8 Frame of grid ceiling
9 Board of grid ceiling
10 Light fixtures
11 Switches
12 Power sockets
13 USB charging outlet
14 Switch gear
15 House wires
16 Network cables
B Catelogue to be provided
1 Security systems
2 Fire alarm system
3 Survelliance system
4 HVAC System
5 Network switch
6 FIre Extinguishers
50
SPECIFICATIONS
51
Specifications - CIVIL WORKS
1. Whenever the specifications are not given or when the specifications are ambiguous, the
relevant Nepalese standard or Indian Standard or British Standard and further
amendment will be considered as final and binding.
2. The work shall be related to the drawing that the Contractor is presumed to study.
Nothing extra to be paid for any item because of its shape, location, or other difficult
circumstances, even if the schedule makes no distinction, as long as the item is shown
in the drawing.
3. The sources of material stated in the specifications are those from which materials
are generally available. However, material not confirming to specifications shall be
rejected even if they come from the stated sources. The Contractor should satisfy him
that sufficient quantity of material of acceptable specification from the stated or other
sources.
4. "Site Engineer" shall mean the employees deputed by the Employer.
5. The requirements of the specifications under (A) General, (B) Materials shall be fulfilled
by the contractor without extra charge i.e. the item rate quoted shall be deemed to have
taken these specifications into account.
A). GENERAL
This section of the Specifications covers the removal of existing concrete, reinforced
concrete, masonry, existing buildings or steel structures or partitions or part of the structures
which interfere with the construction and installation of new facilities.
Existing structures which are to remain in place shall be protected from damage,
removed facilities shall be salvaged or disposed of as specified herein.
Executio
n
1.
Precautions
The contractor shall exercise due care to avoid damage to existing structures and facilities
that are not to be removed. Fences, conduits, water lines~electrical lines shall be
protected by the contractor from injury. He shall be entirely responsible for damage to
the persons or property caused by his operation. The contractor shall plan his work to
minimize interference with road traffic.
2. Drawing, Instruction, Measurements:

All the works shall be done according to the drawing and instruction of the site Engineer
and the contractor shall arrange to test materials and portion of the work at his own
costs in order to prove their soundness and sufficiency. If any work and portion of work
is found to be defective or unsound, the contractor shall pull down and re-executes the
same at his own costs. The defective material shall be removed from the site.
52
3. Dismantling of Existing Structures:
The contractor shall dismantle existing structures in such a manner as to avoid damaging
them to permit their reuse. Reusable materials shall be removed with care, not to
damage them. Removed material to be salvaged shall be stockpiled by the Contractor at
Locations approved by the Engineer and shall be properly protected from damage.
4. Rate for Materials, Equipments and Labor:

The unit rates quoted by the contractor for the agreed works shall be inclusive of supply
of materials, overhead as well as transport and unloading, storing, hire and use of
the equipments and tools to be employed and cost of the wages of labour, local taxes
and levies other than VAT, price escalation risk, loss, wastage, to fulfil all the duties
and liabilities as specified in the conditions of Contracts.
All the works shall be carried out during normal working hours and the contractors
shall be responsibly supervise all the works. In special, if the works demand the
continuous or further time requirements to execute and complete the works, even after
it is late in evening or unfavourable condition, the contractor shall continue or execute
the work with the approval and as directed by the Engineer even up to late or start at
night in the Contractor’s own risk and cost.
5. Construction Schedule:
Along with the Bid, the contractor shall submit detail Construction schedule meeting the
requirements of the Employer to complete the scope of Work within Thirty days (30
days) from the date of agreement. Any Quotations with construction schedule exceeding
Thirty days (30 days) will be rejected.
6. Variation:
The Quantity provided in BoQ are estimated only. Due to difference between the actual
condition and the minor change in scope or minor design change, the quantity may vary
up to 15% of the total amount. The Contractor shall be not entitled to claim for any loss
or profit due to such variations in quantity.
7. Measuring Materials:
Materials requiring measuring shall be measured separately in boxes of appropriate sizes
before being mixed.
8. Temporary Protection:
All walls, newly laid concrete or other works requiring protection from weather or
accidental injury shall be protected by means of tarpaulin or in any other way so as to
keep the work immune from damage. Nothing extra shall be paid for on this matter.
9. Quality of Works:
Materials, tools and plants and workmanship shall be the best of several kinds obtainable
in the market and as approved by the site Engineer.
10. Leave Clean:

On completion, all works must be clean down, rubbish removed and the works and land
cleared of rubbish, surplus materials, debris and other accumulations and everything left
in a clean and orderly condition.
53
11. Sample:
Sample of each type of construction materials required, shall be submitted by the
contractor for the approval of the site Engineer. The Contractor will be required to
perform all work under the contract in accordance with these approved samples.
12. Storage
Safe dry and proper storage shall be provided for all materials, particularly for cement.
For cement storage capacity should be equal to at least one fourth the total quantity to
be used but may not exceed 2 ton (i.e. 40 bags) or as directed by the site Engineer.
13. Curing of works:

All the concrete works, pointing works, plastering work, punning, or any other similar
concrete works should be cured by clean water at least for 7 days after application under
the direct supervision of site representative of Employer with contractor’s own cost.
14. Electricity:
The Contractor shall make his own arrangement for Electricity required for the execution
of the works
(B) MATERIALS:
1. Water:
Water shall be clean and free from oil, waste, acid and other organic matter in solution
or suspension. Water shall be from municipal main or tank or well or river water
source (fresh and drinkable water). Storage for the water shall be of the sufficient size
and as directed by the site Engineer. The Contractor shall make his own arrangement
for storage and supply of water.
2. Sand:
The fine aggregate (sand) shall confirm to either I.S 383-1970 or IS.515-1959. Sand shall
be clean river or pit sand of approved quality and free from salt, earth, dust and other
impurities. Sand containing more than 4 to 6 % of clay, dust and silt shall be washed with
clean water. Sand to be used for all cement concrete works must be the coarse sand.
Medium sand may be used in cement mortar for masonry, plastering, pointing etc. Sand
filling in plinth, where specified may bedone with fine sand. The fineness modulus of
sand should not be less than one. Size of measuring box for the purpose of mix
proportion, shall be 30 x 30 x 38 cm.
3. Portland Cement:
Ordinary Portland cement shall confirm to IS 269-1976. Cement shall be fine and its
chemical composition, consistency, tensile & compressive strength, soundness,
setting times must be according to IS. It shall be packed in gunny bags or weatherproof
paper bags and shall be free from lumps. Cement shall be stored in waterproof building
at 300 mm above plinth level and shall be stacked 600 mm clear from the walls and
stored in such a manner that permits of easy access of inspection. Layer of cement in
each stacking shall not exceed 6 (six) to prevent bursting of bottom bags.
4. Cement Mortar:
Cement mortar shall be of proportions as specified in Bill of quantities for each type of
work. It shall be composed of Portland cement and sand. The ingredients shall be
54
accurately gauged by measure and shall be well and evenly mixed together in a
mechanical plant mixture or as directed by the site Engineer. If hand mix is allowed then
it shall be done in brick platform. The gauged ingredients of the mortar shall put in the
platform and mixed dry first and then water shall be added and mixed again until it is
homogeneous and of uniform colour. Required quantity of cement shall be used at one
time and shall not be such to exceed mortar amount that can be consumed within half
an hour of its mixing.
5. Coarse Aggregate:
Aggregate shall be crushed hard rock and shall be free from vegetable matter, loam, clay,
dust and other impurities. If required, aggregate shall be thoroughly washed in clean
(potable) water. The stone ballast shall be of 20mm size and down for building works.
Size of measuring box for the purpose of mix proportion, shall be 30 x 30 x 38 cm.
6. Bricks:
All bricks shall be of first class of good quality, approved by the site Engineer. The
brick shall be free from grit and other impurities such as lime, iron, and other deleterious
salt, well-burnt, copper coloured, sound, hard, rectangle with sharp edges and shall
give ringing sound when struck with each other. They shall be of uniform size. Brick
masonry work shall be either in English or Flemish bond.
7. TMT - Steel / Deformed Bar:

The reinforcements shall be free from fillings, loose rusts, mill scales, paints, oil, grease,
adhering earth, or any other material that, in the option of the site Engineer may impair
the bond between the concrete and the reinforcement or that causes corrosion of the
reinforcement or disintegration of the concrete. The certificate shall be required from
the suppliers for each lot of the reinforcement purchased and in addition the contractor
must undertake tensile and bending tests on random samples of the reinforcement
delivered to the site. All steel, which is represented by a sample, which fails
to reach the minimum requirements as per schedule, is to be removed from the site
immediately.
8. Vitrified Tile, Porcelain glazed Tile and Granite:

Vitrified Tile, Porcelain glazed Tile and Granite shall be of smooth surface, shinning,
durable and of sizes and colour as approved by the site Engineer. The samples of each
type of tile shall be presented for approval before commencement of the work.
9. Scaffolding:
Scaffolding shall consist of wooden bales (props) and necessary plywood. All the
scaffolding members shall be checked before installation for their strength and stiffness
and tied up properly. In case of finished works such as plastering, painting and
distempering, no part of scaffolding should touch the structure. Where ladders are used,
gunny bags shall be tied up at the ends to prevent any damage to the work by sliding or
tipping. No extra payment shall be made for scaffolding.
10. Timber:
Timber shall be of the type as stated in the schedule and of the best kind available,
perfectly dry, well seasoned, and free from knots, cracks, shakes and other defects and
any appearance of rot.
11. Glass:
55
Sheet or plate glass shall be of approved mark and 5 mm thicknesses as stated in the
Bill of quantities and visually clear when viewed from any direction. It shall
be free from bubbles, waves and all other defects.
12. Oil paints and Primer:

These shall be only of readymade mixed type in sealed tins of approved colour and marks
as specified/ instructed by the site Engineer.
13. Plastic Emulsion paint and Primer:

These shall be only of readymade mixed type in sealed tins of approved colour and marks
as specified/ instructed by the site Engineer. First a pest is made by adding little hot
water to the distemper power and stirred thoroughly, and pest is allowed stand for a few
minutes. The pest is then thinned with water to have a thin cream to the consistent
of oil paint and stirred thoroughly all the time while applying. If the surface is rough, it
should be smoothened by sandpaper. The surface must be perfectly dry before paint is
applied (commenced). In new cement plaster areas, the new surface shall be washed
over with a solution of zinc sulphate. The number of coats shall be two or as specified.
14. Enamel paint:

These shall be only of approved brand in sealed tins or packages as specified/ instructed
by the site Engineer. The contractor should submit the specification and method
statement for painting for prior approval.
15. Plaster of Paris:

These shall be made out of best Plaster of Paris powder of approved quality to be applied
in wall surfaces above cement plaster and ceiling at any level, finished smooth, plane
and in level including supply of material, labor, preparation of base etc.
16. Chapra polish:

These shall be only of approved brand in sealed packages as specified/ instructed
by the site Engineer. The contractor should submit the specification and method
statement for painting for prior approval.
17. Waste water pipes and fittings:

All waste water pipes and fittings shall be of standard marks according to I.S.I subject to
the approval of the site Engineer. These must be free from flaws and the interior surface
shall be cleaned / smooth.
18. Special Material:

If material of a particular brand is specified in the schedules of Quantities, these shall
be produced accordingly from the particular manufacturer. These shall
include materials such as bricks, tiles, waterproofing and hardening compounds,
special paints, acoustic and insulation boards and other finishing materials of
approved marks.
The responsibility for the use of these materials lies with the contractor and he should
avail himself of necessary guarantees from the manufacturer. Such guarantees as may
be required by the owner shall be obtained by the contractor and deliver to the Site
Engineer. Special brand names have been avoided, where possible.
56
Where brand names have been used merely to describe the nature of described
materials and not used to endorse or indicate preference for a particular product
or manufacturer. Goods, which have similar characteristics and provide performance and
quality at least equal to those specified and confirming to IS standard, are acceptable.
19. Test of Materials:

The Contractor shall at his own cost, arrange and carry out the tests of materials to be
used in the works or any other tests as deemed necessary by the site Engineer. No extra
payment shall be made for tests of materials. (C) SPECIFICATIONS OF WORK
ITEMS:
I. CIVIL WORKS
1. Lean Concrete
The "lean concrete" means plain cement concrete with the ratio of cement: sand: coarse
aggregate equals to 1:2:4 by volume. Lean concrete shall be laid to the thickness of
minimum 7.5-cm. or as specified in the Bill of Quantities or drawing.
Measurement for payment of 'Lean concrete work' shall be made on the basis of
actual placed volume of lean concrete in cubic feet. Payment shall be made for the
number of cubic metermeasured as per unit rate quoted in the Bill of Quantities. The
unit rate shall include full cost of labor, tools/equipment, materials, transport and
all other costs necessary for the performance and completion of the Works in the
workmanlike manner.
2. Brick Masonry Work

The Brick Masonry shall be for the foundation and superstructure wall works. The
masonry wall shall be constructed with 1:6 cement sand ratio with vertical joints as
mentioned in the provided approved drawing and the gap between the each block of
vertical joints should be 10 to 20 mm.
All the brick shall be thoroughly soaked in water before use till bubbles cease to come
up. The brick shall be laid in cement-mortar on the bed with ratio as specified in the
Bill of Quantities to make it properly bonded. When bonding each brick unit must be set
back in every course and the joint shall be broken vertically. Each course shall be in
true line, horizontal and plumb.
The mortar thickness shall not exceed 10 mm nor shall be not less than 6 mm. The
Contractor shall make curing of the brick masonry work and the curing period of
the masonry wall shall be as per weather conditions and as per instruction of the site
Engineer. In general, the masonry surface shall be water sprayed at least twice daily for
a period of at least ten days. The masonry wall shall be considered to be set after forty-
eight (48) hours.
Measurement for payment of 'Brick work' shall be made on the basis of actual
constructed volume of Brickwork in cubic feet. Payment shall be made for the number
of cubic metermeasured as per unit rate quoted in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rate
shall include full cost of labor, tools/equipment, materials and all other
57
costs necessary for the performance and completion of the Works in the workmanlike
manner.
3. Concrete Work
Concrete work shall mean and include all and every concrete works, for the civil works.
The Contractor shall perform the concrete work in strict conformity to the Specification
and as directed by the Employer and shall inform Employer, at least
24 hours in advance, of the times and places which he intends to place concrete.
Composition of Concrete
G eneral Mix Composition: The concrete shall be composed of cement, fine aggregate,
coarse aggregate, water and admixtures as specified. All materials shall be well mixed
and brought to the proper consistency. The mix proportions shall be as follows:
F or
concrete
1 :1½:3
Minimum compressive strength (28 days) 220 kg/cm2
Minimum cement content 410 kg/m3
Maximum water cement ratio 0.6
Maximum slump 5 - 10 cm.
F or Concrete
1:2:4
Minimum compressive strength (28 days) 160 kg/cm2
Minimum cement content 300 kg/m3
Maximum water cement ratio 0.6
Maximum slump 5 - 10 cm.
The detailed concrete mix design shall be submitted to the Employer for approval on the
basis of producing concrete, having suitable workability, consistency, density,
impermeability, durability, and required strength with concrete compressive strength
test records. If 160 kg/sq. cm., strength of 28 days, cannot be achieved with the above
cement content, more cement shall be used for which the Contractor will not receive
any extra payment.
C onsistency: The detailed mix proportions shall be submitted to the Employer for
approval to secure concrete of the proper consistency and to adjust for any variation in
the moisture content or grading of the aggregate as they enter the mixer. Addition
of water to compensate for stiffening of the concrete before placing will not be
permitted. Uniformity in concrete consistency from batch to batch will be required.
Ceme
nt
Q uality: The Contractor shall furnish normal Portland cement in fifty (50) kg net- weight
sacks. The cement for the civil work shall conform to the requirements of "Portland
cement, Type I" designated in ASTM C150.Where conditions require the
58
use of high sulphate resistance cement, cement conforming to the requirements of
ASTM CISO Type V shall be used without any cost to Employer.
Coarse Aggregate
G rading: Coarse aggregate shall be graded for each maximum size within the
standard limits specified as follows:
Percentage passing by weight
Designation of size in inch 2 1½ 1 ¾ 3/8 No.

(sieves with square inch inch inch inch inch 4
openings)
40 mm (1 ½ to ¾ inch) 100 90 to 20 to55 0 to15 0 to5 -
100
20 mm (3/4 inch to No. 4) - - 100 90 to 20 to 55 0 to
100 10
Fine
Aggrega
te
Q uality: Fine aggregate shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C33 and
shall be natural sand or manufactured sand. It shall consist of clean, hard, dense
and durable rock particles, free from injurious amounts of dust, silt, stone
powder, pieces of thin stone, alkali, organic matter and other impurities.
Grading: The fine aggregate as batched shall be well graded, and when tested shall
conform to the following limits:
Sieve size Percentage passing by weight

9.51mm (3/8 inch) 100
4.76 mm (No.4) 95 to 100
2.38 mm (No.8) 8 0 to 100
1.19 mm (No.16) 50 to 85
595 micron (No.30) 25 to 60
297 micron (No.50) 10 to 30
149 micron (No.100) 2 to 10
Concrete Construction
Tolerance
Variations in alignment, grade and dimension of the structures from the
established alignment, grade and dimensions shall be remedied or removed and
replaced by the Contractor at his own expense as directed by the Employer.
Repair of
Concrete
The Contractor shall repair at his own expense the imperfections of concrete
surfaces and the irregularities which do not meet the specified dimensions.
Repairing work shall be performed and completed within 24 hours after the
removal of forms, in accordance with the direction of the Employer.
59
Curing
Prior to placing concrete, the Contractor shall obtain Employer's approval in
respect of the method to protect and cure concrete and the facilities he proposes
to use. After concrete has been placed, it shall be protected and cured strictly in
accordance with the method approved by the Employer. All costs for the curing
of concrete shall be included in the unit price bid for the concrete work.
Tests
The Contractor shall make all necessary tests for determining the mixed proportions of
each type of concrete, including tests of aggregates, so as to produce the concrete
specified below In order to control the quality of concrete to be placed, the Contractor
shall perform the following field tests:
Measurement for payment of Concrete (1:1½:3), Concrete (1:1:2) work and Concrete
1:2:4 shall be made on the basis of actual placed volume of Concrete in cubic feet.
Payment shall be made for the number of cubic metermeasured as per unit rate quoted
in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rate shall include full cost of labor, tools/equipment,
materials and its transport to site and all other costs necessary for the performance and
completion of the Works in the workmanlike manner.
4. TMT steel reinforcement

The Contractor shall place all the TMT steel reinforcement bars in the structures as
shown on the approved working drawings, bar-bending schedule or as instructed by the
site Engineer.
Reinforcement bars shall be accurately placed and special care shall be exercised
to prevent the reinforcement bars from being displaced during the placement of
concrete. Intersecting points and splices of the reinforcement bars shall be fixed by using
suitable clips or annealed wires, the diameter of which shall be not less than No. 16
gauge. The reinforcement bars in structures shall be placed and supported by use of
concrete blocks, metal spacers, metal hangers, or other satisfactory devices to ensure
required coverage between the reinforcement bars and the surface of concrete as per
the instruction at site by the site Engineer.
Drawings of bar lists/ bar bending schedule shall be prepared by the contractor and
submitted for approval.
Measurement for payment of 'TMT steel Reinforcement Bars' shall be made on the
basis of actual weight of TMT steel Reinforcement Bars in kg. Payment shall be made for
the number of kg measured as per unit rate quoted in the Bill of Quantities. The unit
rate shall include full cost of labor, tools/equipment, materials, transport to site and
all other costs necessary for the performance and completion of the Works in the
workmanlike manner.
5. Plaster work
This section covers the furnishing and installation of exterior part and cement plaster
and all accessories associated with the installation of this item complete, and in place as
shown on the drawings or as directed by Engineer. Thickness of the plaster will be as
per specified in Bill of Quantities or as directed by site Engineer. Material shall be
delivered in original package containing the manufactures trademark and shall be
60
stored in moisture proof store. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed
from the jobsite. Temperature adequate for proper setting and curing of the work shall
be maintained. No plaster shall be applied over surface containing excessive moisture.
Masonry surface to be plastered shall be cleared and free from loose partial grease,
oil, acid or similar foreign matter. When necessary, excessive suction of masonry shall
be reduced by wetting the masonry structure.
Before installing plaster, surface shall be inspected and any defects or deficiencies, which
would interfere with or prevent a satisfactory plaster installation, shall be corrected. All
plastering shall be executed in a workmanlike manner, leaving all finished plaster
surfaces free from waves or imperfection. All works shall be performed in accordance
with best trade practices, the instructions and recommendation of the materials
manufacture, and the requirements of codes and regulations applicable to the work.
Particular care shall be taken to protect adjoining surfaces and material from any damage
by the plastering operation. Damage caused by any plastering operation shall be
repaired without additional cost to the employer.
Thickness of the plaster should be as per shown in Bill of quantities. In case of the
20 mm thick plaster, plastering should be done in two coats of 10 mm thick each.
The second coat should be applied after the proper setting of the first coat.
P ercentage retained by weight plus or minus 2% on each sieve size is given in t
able
Sieve size min max
4.75mm (S. No. 4) 0 0
2.4 mm (S. No.8) 0 10
1.2 mm (S. No.16) 10 40
600 micron (S. N0.30) 30 65
300 micron (S. No.50) 70 90
150 micron (S. No. 100) 95 100
The surface to be plastered shall be cleaned of all projections, dust, loose particles,
grease, bond breakers, oil, and other foreign matter. Do not apply plaster directly to
Surface of masonry or concrete that has been coated with bituminous compound or
other waterproofing agents or in case Surface that has been painted or previously
plastered. Before plasterwork is started, wet masonry surfaces thoroughly with a fine fog
spray of clean water to produce a uniformly moist condition. Check metal grounds,
corner beads, screeds, and other accessories carefully for alignment before the work is
started.
The mix proportion for plaster (1:4) shall be as specified in Bill of Quantities. Cement and
sand for each batch shall be accurately measured and mixed dry until evenly mixed and
until the mass is uniform in color. The water content shall be maintained at a minimum;
continue mixing until plasticity is obtained. Mortar that has begun to set shall not be
used. Retempering of mortar will not be permitted.
Upon completion of the work, cut out and patch loose cracked, damaged or defective
plaster. Patching shall match existing work in texture, color and shall be finished flush
61
with plaster previously applied. Do all pointing and patching of plasterwork adjoining any
other finish work in a neat and workmanlike manner. Leave clean exposed surfaces, in
condition ready to receive paint or other finish.
Measurement for payment of 'Plaster work' shall be made on the basis of actual
plaster area in square feet. Payment shall be made for the number of square
metermeasured as per unit rate quoted in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rate shall
include full cost of labor, tools/equipment, materials and all other costs necessary for
the performance and completion of the Works in the workmanlike manner.
6. Painting works:
All surfaces shall be painted except the following:
(a)
Exterior:
Roofing, paving, concrete, nonferrous metals, glass, pre-finished items.
(b)
Interior:
Ceramic tile, glass, pre-finished surfaces, non-ferrous metals, stainless steel,
attic surfaces.
A list of the painting materials and their colors which are to be applied to the specified
surfaces shall be submitted to the site Engineer for approval. The finished surface
shall be free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, pales, brush marks, and variations in
color, texture, and finish. The hiding shall be complete, and coat shall be so applied as to
produce firm of uniform thickness. Special attention shall be given to insure that all
surfaces including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and rivets receive a film thickness
equivalent to that of adjacent painted surfaces.
Adjacent areas and installations shall be protected by the use of drop clothes or
other approved precautionary measures.
Metal or wood surfaces adjacent to surface to receive water-thinned paints shall be

primed and/or touched up prior to the application of water-thinned paints. The first coat
on plaster shall include such repeated touching up of suction spots or overall applications
of primer sealer as necessary to produce a uniform color and gloss. The first coat on both
faces of wood doors shall be applied at essentially the same time.
Coating Progress
Sufficient time shall elapse between successive coats to permit proper drying. This period
shall be modified as necessary to suit adverse weather conditions. Oil base or oleo
resinous solvent-type paints shall be considered dry for recoating when the paints
feel firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate pressure of the thumb,
and the application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or less of adhesion
of the undercoat.
62
Coating shall be as
follows:
(1) All Plaster Surface shall be given two coat of water proof snowcem paint over
one coat of white cement
(2) Gloss Finish

Wood:
First coat: 1 coat of Wood Primer.
Second coat: 2 coats of Enamel paint.
(3) Metal
Surface:
First coat: 1 coat of Metal Primer Chromate
Second coat: 2 coats of Aluminum Paint
Storage, Mixing and thinning

At time of application, paint shall show no signs of hard settling, excessive skinning,
levering, or other deterioration. Paint shall be thoroughly stirred, strained, and kept at
a uniform consistency during application.
Where necessary to suit conditions of surface, temperature, weather, and
method of application, package paint may be thinned immediately prior to
application in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, but not excess of
0.5 liter of suitable thinner per 4
liter.
The use of thinner for any reason shall not relieve Contractor from obtaining complete
hiding.
Samples shall be clearly identified by designated name, specification number, batch

number, project Contract number, intended use, and quantity involved. At the discretion
of the Employer, samples may be tested before approval, or materials may be approved
for use based on the test reports furnished. In the latter case, the samples will be
retained by the site Engineer for possible future testing should the material appear to be
defective during or after application.
Measurement for payment of Painting Works each shall be made on the basis of
actual area in square feet. Payment shall be made for the number of square
include full cost of labor, tools/equipment, materials and all other costs necessary for
7. False Ceiling:
False ceiling shall be done with 12mm thick Gypsum board or Acoustic Board whichever
is mentioned in bill of quantities with GI concealed framing, joints shall be covered with
UB 888 compound and paper tape to give a monolithic finish.
Measurement for payment of 'False Ceiling' shall be made on the basis of actual
area in Square Feet. Payment shall be made for the total area measured as
63
per unit rate quoted in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rate shall include full cost of labor,
tools/equipment, materials, paint, transport to site and all other costs necessary for the
performance and completion of the Works in the workmanlike manner.
8. Gypsum Partition:
Gypsum Partition works shall be done with 12mm thick Gypsum board with GI concealed
framing, joints shall be covered with UB 888 compound and paper tape to give a
monolithic finish.
Measurement for payment of 'Gypsum Partition' shall be made on the basis of actual
area in Square Feet. Payment shall be made for the total area measured as per unit
rate quoted in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rate shall include full cost of labor,
tools/equipment, materials, transport to site and all other costs necessary for the
9. Aluminum Partition:
Aluminum Partition shall be made of approved color minimum 60mmX30mmX
.9mm thick anodized Aluminum section or more as per requirement of the drawings with
minimum 1.2 mm thick aluminum section and shall be fitted with 5 mm clear glass, 9mm
thick high pressure pre-laminated board and good quality hardware all complete shall be
fabricated, supplied, and installed as per drawing or as per instruction given by the site
Engineer.
Measurement for payment of Aluminum Partition’ shall be made on the basis of

actual area in Square Meter as per Bill of Quantities. Payment shall be made for the total
area measured as per unit rate quoted in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rate shall
include full cost of labor, tools/equipment, materials, transport to site and all other
costs necessary for the performance and completion of the Works in the workmanlike
10. Aluminum works in Doors:

Aluminum Doors shall be semi glazed door/full glazed or opaque, made of approved
color anodized Aluminum section of minimum 1.2 mm thick section and shall be fitted
with 5 mm to 12 mm thick clear glass as per type of door required in the design may
be normal single panel, double panel, sliding or swing type door, 9mm thick high
pressure pre-laminated board and good quality necessary hardware including floor
spring, handle, door closure, door stopper, locks etc. all complete shall be fabricated,
supplied, and installed as per drawing or as per instruction given by the site Engineer.
Measurement for payment of 'Aluminum Door' shall be made on the basis of actual
area in Square Meter. Payment shall be made for the total area measured as per unit
rate quoted in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rate shall include full cost of labor,
tools/equipment, materials, transport to site and all other costs necessary for the
11. Rolling Shutter work:

Rolling Shutter of approved pattern and manufacture, finished of one coat of red oxide
primer followed by two coat of aluminum paint etc. all complete shall be
64
fabricated, supplied, and installed as per drawing or as per instruction given by the
site Engineer.
Measurement for payment of 'Rolling Shutter' shall be made on the basis of actual
weight of finished goods in Square Feet. Payment shall be made for the total weight
measured as per unit rate quoted in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rate shall include
full cost of labor, tools/equipment, materials, paint, transport to site and all other costs
necessary for the performance and completion of the Works in the workmanlike manner.
12. Tile Paving:

a) Vitrified
Tiles:
Vitrified tile shall be laid in proper line and level as instructed by the site Engineer. The
tiles are laid with close joints, which shall be filled up with white cement slurry as
specified. The sample of Vitrified tile shall be produced for the approval of site
Engineer before laying it.
The Vitrified tile shall be laid over the bedding course cement mortar (1:4) with
cement slurry on its backing.
Measurement for payment of 'Vitrified Tile' shall be made on the basis of actual
area in square meter. Payment shall be made for the number of square meter
measured as per unit rate quoted in the Bill of Quantities. The unit rate shall include
full cost of labor, tools/equipment, materials, transport to site and all other costs
necessary for the performance and completion of the Works in the workmanlike
manner.
b) Porcelain Glazed Tile:

High density glazed ceramic tiles shall be installed in toilet, bathroom, and kitchen.
Ceramic floor shall be a pre-cast tile as specified herein. Manufacturer's original
containers, bundles, or packages shall be delivered to the site unopened with seals
unbroken and labels intact. Floor-tile operations in spaces requiring wall tiles shall
not be started until after the wall-tile installation has been completed.
Ceramic tiles shall be installed in walls of bathroom up to the height as instructed by

the site Engineer. The size of tiles shall not be less than 20 x 300 cm.
The ceramic tile shall be laid over the bedding course cement mortar (1:4) with
cement slurry on its backing. The interface between the tiles shall be joint filled with
proper leveling with white cement.
Surface to receive applications of materials shall be clean and free from dirt, dust, oil,
grease, and other objectionable matter. Joints shall be straight, leveled,
perpendicular, and have even width not exceeding 1.6mm. Wainscots shall be built
of full courses.
Vertical joints shall be maintained plumb for the entire height of the tile work.
Damaged or defective tiles shall be replaced.
65
Upon completion, wall surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned. Acid shall not be used for
cleaning of glazed tiles. After the grout has set, tile wall surfaces shall be given a
protective coat of a non-corrosive soap or other approved methods of protection.
13. Cement punning and Skirting:

This section covers the furnishing and installation of cement punning and skirting with
1:1 cement mortar on the plastered surface and any other part as directed by
Engineer and all accessories associated with the installation of this item complete, and
in place as shown on the drawings or as directed by Engineer.
Particular care shall be taken to protect adjoining surfaces and material from any damage
by the skirting operation. Damage caused by the operation shall be repaired without
additional cost to the employer.
The surface for skirting shall be cleaned of all projections, dust, loose particles, grease,
bond breakers, oil, and other foreign matter before application.
Measurement for payment of 'cement punning and skirting' shall be made on the
basis of actual area in square feet. Payment shall be made for the number of square
include full cost of labour, tools/equipment, materials and all other costs necessary for
II. SANITARY WORKS
1. Water supply and sanitation works: The Staff Quarter shall have an adequate water
supply and sanitation system as approved by the site Engineer. The Contactor shall submit
samples of the all fixtures, pipes and ancillaries to be installed for prior approval.
a) Water supply pipeline:

All water supply pipeline works shall be concealed and performed with PPR pipes
as directed by the site Engineer. It includes the laying of the PPR pipes of
diameter as specified in drawing or as specified by site Engineer and shall be
joined with necessary PPR nipples, tee, bends, cross, socket and all other
necessary for the completion of the works. The system shall confirm the water
tightness.
Measurement for payment of 'Water supply pipeline' shall be made on the basis
of lump sum basis. Payment shall be made on the basis of lump sum as per lump sum
rate quoted for the item in the Bill of Quantities. The lump sum amount shall include
full cost of labor, tools/equipment, materials, transport and all other costs
necessary for the performance and completion of the Works in the workmanlike
manner.
c) Supply and installation of Toilet and bathroom fixture:

The contractor shall supply and install the bathroom and toilet fixtures to the
satisfaction of the Employer. It includes supply and installation of standard English
type Commode pan with flushing cistern of approved quality shall be installed as
directed by site Engineer. Wash basin 12" x 18" (hot cold) with
25mm PVC pipe shall be connected to sewer pipe along with waste pipe and
connection pipe. Bathroom sanitary set (soap case, mirror, paper holder, etc) shall
66
be installed properly as directed by site Engineer. Tap of approved quality shall
be supplied and installed properly.
Measurement for payment of 'Supply and installation of Toilet and bathroom
fixture' shall be made on the basis of actual number of the toilet and bathroom in
number. Payment shall be made on the basis of actual number of the toilet and
bathroom fixture as per rate quoted for the item in the Bill of Quantities. The rate
shall include full cost of labor, tools/equipment, materials, transport and all other
costs necessary for the performance and completion of the Works in the
workmanlike manner.
d) Supply and installation of sanitary pipeline and ancillaries and catch pit:
50 mm diameter PVC pipe shall be connected from kitchen & bathroom to main
sewerage pipe of diameter 100mm to convey waste water. 100 mm diameter PVC
pipe shall be connected from toilet to the main sewer pipe and to the septic tank as
specified in the drawing or as directed by the Engineer. Overflow from septic tank
shall be connected to the soak pit through 50mm PVC pipe, which is ultimately drained
to the natural drainage system. All these should include fittings, cap bends, door bend,
cross, tee etc of approved quality for satisfactory completion of the works. A catch pit
of 1m x 1m x 1m shall be constructed as shown in the drawing. The system shall
confirm the water tightness.
Measurement for payment of Supply and installation of sanitary pipeline and

ancillaries and catch pit' shall be made on the basis of lump sum. Payment shall
be made on the basis of lump sum as per rate quoted for the item in the Bill of
Quantities. The rate shall include full cost of labor, tools/equipment, materials,
transport and all other costs necessary for the performance and completion of the
Works in the workmanlike manner.
Note: This specification is of a general type only and must be used in conjunction with
the drawing of the particular item being made. Anything shown on the drawing, but
not the specification must be complied and vice-versa.
67
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION
68
Technical Specification of Electrical Works
Contents
1 General .............................................................................................................................................................................. 70
2 Scope ................................................................................................................................................................................. 70
3 Rates .................................................................................................................................................................................. 70
4 Workmanship ................................................................................................................................................................... 70
6 Color Coding .................................................................................................................................................................... 72
7 Standard of Work ............................................................................................................................................................. 72
8 Quantities .......................................................................................................................................................................... 72
9 Specifications .................................................................................................................................................................... 72
10 Drawings ........................................................................................................................................................................... 72
11 Materials and Equipment ................................................................................................................................................. 73
12 Engineer and Foreman ..................................................................................................................................................... 73
13 Internal Wiring ................................................................................................................................................................ 73
14 Site Condition ................................................................................................................................................................... 78
15 Main Distribution Board .................................................................................................................................................. 78
16 Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB) ........................................................................................................................ 79
17 Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB) ................................................................................................................................. 79
18 Measuring Instruments ..................................................................................................................................................... 79
19 Earthing ............................................................................................................................................................................. 80
20 Sub Distribution Board ( SDB) ....................................................................................................................................... 81
21 Loading of MCB’s ................................................................................................................................................... 82
22 Relevant Standards ........................................................................................................................................................... 82
23 Code of Practice .............................................................................................................................................................. 83
24 Abbreviation used ............................................................................................................................................................ 83
25 Standard and Make ........................................................................................................................................................... 83
26 Samples ............................................................................................................................................................................. 84
27 Testing before installation ............................................................................................................................................... 85
28 Completion Tests .............................................................................................................................................................. 85
29 Completion Drawings ...................................................................................................................................................... 86
30 Wiring of Telephone Points............................................................................................................................................. 87
31 Wiring of Fire Alarm System .......................................................................................................................................... 88
32 Wiring of Computer Networking ................................................................................................................................... 88
35 Guarantee .......................................................................................................................................................................... 88
69
1 General
The following specification will apply under all circumstances to the electrical
installations against this contract and it is to be ensured that the contractor shall obtain
for himself at his own responsibility all the information which may be required for the
purpose of making the tender and for entering into a contract keeping in view the
specifications detail here under, drawing and design of the electrical installation and
inspection of site etc. The tender rates shall include the cost of materials, erection,
connections, commissioning, labour, supervision, testing instruments, tools transport, all
breakage, wastage sundries, scaffolding, maintenance, of all works for one year etc. The
rate in the BOQ should be for an item complete in all respects.
2 Scope
The works covered shall include supply of all materials, labour, equipment and services in
connection with the work complete as indicated. The contractor shall consult drawings,
bill of quantities and specifications all together, which gives the total scope of the works.
3 Rates
The rate quoted in the tender shall include all charges of materials, installation, testing
& commissioning, labor, tools and equipment, shed for material store, transferring
all materials from place of availability to the site, all taxes, contingencies, breakage,
wastage and maintenance of installations, equipment for one year. The rate in the
original contract shall determine the values of extra work where such extra work is of a
similar nature and has been executed under similar conditions. Whenever the extra work
is not of similar nature, the rate for the same shall be determined prior to the execution
of work and get approved by the consultant.
4 Workmanship
a. Workmanship and good appearance of the installation shall be of equal importance

with its electrical and mechanical efficiency, and all portions of the work shall be so laid
out and installed that the work as a whole is of uniform quality and shall present a neat
appearance in a manner meeting the approval of Consultant. The Contractor shall verify
in the field all measurements necessary of the electrical work and shall assume
responsibility for their accuracy.
b. Materials which are defective or damaged during the progress of work shall be replaced
or repaired in approved manner at the expenses of Contractor. The installation shall
comply with all applicable laws and ordinances and with the requirements of Indian codes
and as specified herein or shown on the drawings. The progress of the electrical work shall
be carried out so as to conform to the entire
70
installation shall be completed as soon as the condition of site and working places will
permit.
c. All cutting, drilling, channeling, patching etc., required for installation of electrical
work shall be carried out in a manner approved by the Consultant. Any defects in finishes,
plasters, wood work, metal work, masonry, concrete, or other materials resulting from
the performance of the work shall be replaced or repaired at no expense to the owner
and to be satisfaction of the Consultant.
d. Upon completion of the electrical work the Contractor shall submit to the Consultant,
reproducible drawings showing the layout, and connection of electrical system as
constructed and denoting all information pertinent to the proper maintenance of
the system.
e. If any alteration is found necessary, the Contractor will have to do the same
on mutually agreed rates.
f. The work shall be carried out in the best workman like manner and any defect or minor
changes in the design/ connection if pointed out shall be carried out by the Contractor
without any extra charges.
g. An electrical supervisor shall be employed by the Contractor and will remain at site to
receive orders or any other instructions from the Engineer.
h. Whatever recessed fittings are required to be provided the electrical Contractor shall
be responsible for informing the civil Contractor to keep the necessary recesses in the
slab and in the false ceiling.
i. The list of approved makes and manufacturers of electrical materials is attached.

Only such materials as are on the list shall be used.
5 Materials
All materials and Equipment shall be new and shall be in accordance with the standard
established by ISI. Where materials of Equipment are specified or shown on the drawings
by name of manufacturers, name plates, instruction plates, warning signs and any other
marking whatsoever on the Equipment and accessories there of shall be in English
language. Equipment or materials of other manufacturers may be considered for use if
of equal quality, appearance and, electrical and mechanical characteristics and approved
by the Engineer.
71
6 Color Coding
All outgoing and incoming power cables including point-wiring cables will follow
the following colour coding phase indicating lamps wherever recommended.
Phase - 1 - Red (R); Phase - 2 - Yellow (Y); Phase - 3 - Blue (B); Neutral - Black (B)
7 Standard of Work
The work shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Architect/ /Engineer and in
accordance with the regulations of Nepal National Building Code: 2003, IS, NS & Nepal
Electricity Authority, Electricity Rules and Regulations and the enclosed specifications.
8 Quantities
All quantities mentioned in the bill of quantities are not actual and the contractor will
get payment according to measurement of actual work. The schedule of quantities is
liable to alteration by deletion or addition as required.
9 Specifications
The specifications shall be considered as part of this contract. The drawings indicate the
extent and general arrangement of the futures, controlling switches, wiring system etc.
and are essentially diagrammatic. The drawing indicates the points of termination of
conduit runs and broadly suggests the routes to be followed.
The work shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. However, any minor changes
found essential to co-ordinate the installation of this work with other trades shall be made
without any additional cost to the Owner. The data given herein and on the drawings is as
exact as could be secured, but its complete accuracy is not guaranteed. The drawings are
for the guidance of the Contractor; exact locations, distances and levels shall be governed
by the site conditions and the Architectural drawings.
10 Drawings
The drawings provided are design drawing and generally are diagrammatic. They do not show
offsets, bends, pull box junction box, which may be required for the installation. The
contractor shall follow the drawings as closely a possible and shall provide necessary
bends, pull box etc. The contractor shall prepare and submit for approval detailed shop
drawings of all installations not detailed in the drawings provided. Some modification in
design drawings can be done during the construction time in order to overcome practical
difficulties provided the modification is approved by the
72
shall be
consultant. The shop drawing shall include the details of the following
approved by the Consultant
Main panel board and sub panel boards/distribution boards showing the details of
elements such as meters, MCCB's, CT's, incoming and outgoing cables, details of cable
and sub cable layout.
11 Materials and Equipment
All materials and equipment shall be of the approved make and design. Unless otherwise
called for, only the best quality materials and equipment shall he used. The materials and
equipment shall conform to relevant standards as listed under sub-head "Regulations and
Standard”. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safe custody of all materials and
shall insure them against theft or damage in handling or storage etc. A list of items of
materials and equipment, together with a sample of each shall be submitted to the
Architect/ Engineer within 15 days of the award of the contract. Any item, which is
proposed as a substitute, shall be accompanied by all technical data giving sizes,
particulars of materials and the manufacturer's name. At the time of submission of
proposed substitute the Contractor shall state the credit, if any, due to the Owner. In
the event the substitution is approved, all changes and substitutions shall be requested
in writing and approvals obtained in writing from the Engineer.
12 Engineer and Foreman
The Contractor shall employ a competent, qualified full time electrical

Engineer/Overseer and foreman to direct the work of electrical installation in accordance
with drawings and specifications. The electrical Engineer shall be available full time on
the site to receive instructions from the Engineer or his nominee in the day to day
activities throughout the duration of the Contract. The electrical Engineer shall correlate
the progress of the work in conjunction with all relevant requirements of the supply
authorities.
13 Internal Wiring
13.1 System of Wiring
The system of wiring shall consist of PVC insulated copper conductor wires in
HDP conduits and shall be concealed or surface mounted as called for.
13.2 General
Prior to laying and fixing of conduits, the Contractor shall carefully examine the
drawings indicating the layout, satisfy himself about the sufficiency of number and
73
sizes of conduits, location of junction boxes, sizes and location of switch boxes and other
relevant details. Any discrepancy found in the drawings shall be brought to the notice
of the Engineer. Any modification suggested by the Contractor shall be got approved
by the Engineer before the actual laying of conduits is commenced.
13.3 Conduits
Conduits and accessories shall conform to relevant IS/BS Standards. Heavy duty HDP
conduits or PVC conduits or galvanized steel conduits shall be used as called for in the
Schedule of Quantities. Buried wiring passing under floor of ground floor shall run in
HDPE /PVC conduit. Joints between conduits and accessories shall be securely made to
ensure earth continuity. Sample of HDP conduit shall be submitted before laying
for approval from Engineer.
The conduits shall be delivered to the site of construction in original bundles and
each length of conduit shall bear the label of the manufacturer.
The number of 650 / 1100 volt grade PVC insulated copper conductor wires that may be
drawn in the conduits of various sizes are given below and space factor shall not exceed
40%.
Maximum permissible numbers of 650/1100 volt grade PVC insulated wires that may be
drawn into rigid non metallic or MS conduits are given below:
Size of wire Maximum number of wires within conduit of

nominal size
Sq. mm. 16 20 25 32 40 50
1.0 5 7 13 20
1.5 4 6 10 14
2.5 3 5 10 14 -
4 2 3 6 10 14
6 2 5 9 11
10 4 7 9
16 - - 2 4 5 12
25 - 2 2 6
35 - - - 2 5
13.4 Connections
All jointing methods shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Separate conduits
shall run for all power outlet wiring. Conduit connections for PVC conduits shall be
screwed metal to metal with white lead and shall be painted with one coat of self-etching
zinc chromate primer and two coats of enamel paint.
The threads and sockets shall be free from grease and oil. Connections between screwed
conduit and sheet metal boxes shall be by means of a brass hexagon smooth bore bush,
fixed inside the box and connected through a coupler to the conduit. The
74
joints in conduits shall be free of burrs to avoid damage to insulation of conductors while
pulling them through the conduits.
13.5 Bends in Conduit
Where necessary, bends or diversions may be achieved by means of bends and / or

circular inspection boxes with adequate and suitable inlet and outlet screwed joints. In
case of recessed system each junction work shall be provided with a cover properly
secured and flush with the finished wall surface. No bends shall have radius less than 2.5
times the outside diameter of the conduit.
13.6 Fixing Conduits
All conduits shall be installed so as to avoid steam and hot water pipes. After the
conduits, junction boxes, outlet boxes and switch boxes are installed in position, their
outlets shall be properly plugged or covered so that water, mortar, insects or any other
foreign matter docs not enter into the conduit system. Surface conduits shall be fixed by
means of spacer bar saddles at intervals not more than 500mm. The saddles shall be of 3
mm x 19 mm galvanised mild steel flat, properly treated, primed and painted, securely
fixed to supports by means of nuts and bolls/rail bolts and brass machines screws.
13.7 Switch Outlets and Junction Boxes
All outlet boxes for switches, sockets and other receptacles shall be rust proof and
thickness shall be of minimum 18 swg, having smooth external and internal surfaces to
true finish.
All outlet boxes for receiving plug sockets and switches shall be fabricated to approve
sizes. All boxes shall have adequate number of knock out holes of required diameter and
earthing terminal screws.
13.8 Inspection Boxes
Rust proof inspection boxes (pull box) of min. 18 swg thick mild steel sheet having
smooth external and internal finish shall be provided to facilitate removal and
replacement of wires, where required. These shall be provided if continuous length of
conduit is more than 10 metre. The depth of the box shall be 100 mm and shall have a
hinged cover with push button lock.
13.9 Circuit for Telephone, TV, Computer Networking and Music System
Conduits and system of conduiting for telephone, TV, Computer networking and alarm
system shall be the same as far electrical system, except they shall be installed at least
150mm away from the electrical conduits.
75
13.10 Conductors
All PVC insulated copper/aluminium conductor wires shall conform in all respects to
standards as listed under sub-head "Regulations and Standards".
13.11 Bunching of Wires
Wires carrying current shall be so bunched that the outgoing and return wires are drawn
into the same conduit. Wires originating from two different phases shall not run in the
same conduit.
13.12 Drawing Conductors
The drawing and Jointing of PVC insulated copper/ aluminum conductor wires and cables
shall be executed with due regard to the following precautions. While drawing wires
through conduits, care shall be taken to avoid scratches and kinks, which cause breakage
of conductors. There shall be no sharp bends. Insulation shall be shaved off like
sharpening of a pencil and it shall not be removed by cutting it square, PVC insulated
copper conductor wire ends shall be soldered (at least 20mm length).Strands of wires
shall not be cut for connecting terminals. The terminals shall have sufficient cross sectional
area to take all strands and shall be soldered. Connecting brass screws shall have flat ends.
All looped joints shall be soldered and connected through terminal block/connectors. The
pressure applied to tighten terminal screws shall be just adequate, neither too much nor
too less. Conductors having nominal cross sectional areas exceeding 10 sq. mm shall
always be provided with cable sockets. At all boiled terminals, brass flat washer of large
area and approved steel spring shall be used. Brass nuts and bolts shall be used for all
connections.
Only certified wiremen and cable jointers shall be employed to do jointing work. All wires
and cables shall bear the manufacturer's label and shall be brought to site in original
packing. For ail internal wiring, PVC insulated wires of 650/1100 volts grade shall be
used. The sub-circuit wiring for point shall be carried out in loop system and no joints
shall be allowed in the length of the conductors. If the use of joints connections
unavoidable due to any specific reason, prior permission, in writing, shall be obtained
from the Engineer. No wire shall be drawn into any conduit, until all work of any nature,
that may cause injury to wire, is completed. Care shall be taken in pulling the wires so
that no damage occurs to the insulation of the wire. Before the wires are drawn into the
conduits, the conduits shall be thoroughly cleaned of moisture, dust, dirt or any other
obstruction by forcing compressed air through the conduits. The minimum size of PVC
insulated conductor wires for all sub-circuit wiring for light points shall be 2.5 sq.mm
copper equivalents.
76
13.13 Joints
All joints shall be made at main switches, distribution boards, socket outlets, lighting
outlets and switch boxes only. No joints shall be made in conduits and in junction boxes.
Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to inlet.
13.14 Mains and Sub-Mains
Mains and Sub-Mains cable or wires where called for shall be of the rated capacity and
approved make. Every main and sub-main wire shall be drawn into an independent
adequate size conduit. An independent earth wire of the proper rating shall be provided
for every single-phase sub-main. For every 3-phase sub-main, 2 nos. earth wires of
proper rating shall be provided along with the sub-main. The earth wires shall be fixed to
conduits by means of clips at not more than 1000mm distance. Where mains and sub- mains
cable are connected to switchgear, sufficient extra lengths of cable shall be provided to
facilitate easy connections and maintenance.
13.15 Load Balancing
Balancing of circuits in three-phase installation shall be planned before

the commencement of wiring and shall be strictly adhered to.
13.16 Colors Code of Conductors
Colour code shall be maintained for the entire wiring installation: red, yellow, blue
for three phases, black for neutral.
13.17 Switches, Receptacles and Fixtures:

13.17.1 Switches
All 5/15 amps switches shall be enclosed type flush mounted, suitable for 220/230 volts
AC. All switches shall be fixed inside the switch boxes on adjustable flat MS strips/plates with
tapped holes and brass machine screws, leaving ample space at the back and sides for
accommodating wires. Switch controlling the light/power point shall be connected to
the phase wire of the circuit. The switch shall be one way, two way or intermediate
according to the needs and referring to the drawing.
13.17.2 Wall Socket Outlet
Wall socket outlets shall be of the three-pin type. The switch controlling the socket outlet
shall be on the phase wire of the circuit. An earth wire shall be provided along with
the circuit wires and shall be connected to earthing screw inside the box. The earth
terminal of the socket shall be connected to the earth terminal provided inside the box.
77
13.17.3 Fitting of Lighting Fixtures
The light fixtures and fittings shall be assembled and installed in position complete and
ready for service, in accordance with details, drawings, manufacturer's instructions and
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
13.17.4 Fixing of Exhaust Fan
Exhaust fans shall be fixed at location shown on drawings. They shall be wired to
plug to socket outlet at a convenient location near the fan. Wires shall be connected
to all fixtures through connector blocks. All the necessary works and extra materials
for fixing shall be provided.
13.18 Cutting and Patching
Cutting and patching required for the proper installation and completion of works
including plastering, masonry work, concrete work and painting shall be done by
the contractor himself and skilled labor shall be provided for the same.
14 Site Condition
The equipment and materials to be installed should be suitable for site conditions.
It is estimated that the maximum temperature at site will be 48 0C.
15 Main Distribution Board
The main Distribution Board shall be indoor type, totally enclosed made from
16 SWG heavy gauge mild steel, dust and vermin proof suitable for floor mounting.
The depth of the board shall not be less than 6”. The steel sheet should undergo
acidation and phosphotation process before two coats of red oxide primer are
applied, then two final coats of enamel paint of approved color shall be applied.
The bus bar shall be made from high conductive electrolytically pure copper bar strips
of sufficient cross sectional area so that maximum current density of 1.2 amp. Per
sq. mm. shall not be exceeded. The neutral bus bar shall not be less than 50% of
the phase bus cross section. The bus bars shall be sufficiently supported by insulator
so that insulation resistance shall not be less than 20 mega ohms.
Arrangement shall be made at the bottom of the control panel for receiving incoming
cable. Space for outgoing cables shall be properly designed as the per the
requirement and individual buildings.
78
The interconnection of cable to the bus bars, MCCB shall be done with heavy-duty
crimping type chromium plated brass double compression cable shoe of suitable
size.
The MCCB’s shall have a breaking capacity (at 400 volts) as mentioned in BOQ for
incoming as well as for outgoing circuits. The circuit breaker shall be operated by a
toggle type handle and shall have quick make, quick break trip free mechanism. The
circuit breaker shall be of inverse time and instantaneous trip type with static trip
release. A push trip shall be provided on the cover to test the MCCB mechanically.
The ‘ON’, ‘OFF’ and ‘Trip’ positions shall be clearly marked on the enclosure.
The connections from bus bars to the incoming as well as outgoing MCCB’s shall
be done by copper strips having sufficient cross-section.
All contact surfaces in copper bus bars and strips shall have coatings of silver by
brazing.
16 Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)
Molded case circuit breakers shall be of approved make with visible contacts, large
contact separation and indication of switch position; shall have adequate breaking
capacity, fit for manual operation with a suitable handle; with automatic bimetallic
and electromagnetic tripping mechanism having adjustable setting ranges as
required. MCCB’s up to 100 A shall be suitable for a fault level of 25 KA .
17 Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)
Miniature circuit breakers shall be quick make and break type, and shall conform
to relevant Indian Standards. The housing shall be heat resistant and having high
impact strength. The breaking capacity shall not be less than 10KA at
230 volts. MCB's shall be flush mounted and shall be provided with trip free manual
operating lever and "ON" and OFF" indications. The contacts shall be provided to
quench the arc immediately. MCB shall be provided with thermal and magnetic
releases for over current and short circuit protection. The over load or a short circuit
device shall have a common trip bar in the case of DP and TPN Miniature circuit
breakers.
18 Measuring Instruments
All meters shall be housed in a separate compartment and accessible from front
only. Lockable doors shall be provided for the metering compartment. The main
Distribution Boards shall be provided with indicating panel comprising
79
one number (0-500 V) voltmeter with 3 way "ON" and "OFF" selector switch and
CT operated ammeter with 3 ways and neutral selector switch of appropriate range
and scale. Wiring for meters shall be colour coded and labelled with approved plastic
beads for identification.
18.1 Current Transformers
Current transformers shall be provided for Distribution Boards carrying current in

excess of 30 amps. All phases shall be provided with current transformers of accuracy
class 1 and suitable VA burden for operation of associated metering.
18.2 Indicating Panel
All meters and indicating instruments shall be in accordance with relevant NS Standards.
The meters shall be flush mounted and draw out type. Indicating lamps shall be
neon type and of low burden, and shall be backed up with 5 amps fuses and toggle
switch.
18.3 Testing
All the Distribution Boards shall be subject to tests specified in relevant standards
and test certificate shall be furnished.
18.4 Wiring
In wiring, a Distribution Board, it shall be insured that total load of various Distribution
Boards and/or consuming devices is divided evenly between the phases and number of
ways. Connection in the bus bars, MCCB’s, MCB’s shall be made using cable shoes with
sleeve.
19 Earthing
All the non-current carrying metal parts of electrical installation shall be earthed
properly. All metal conduits, trunking, cable sheaths, switchgear, distribution fuse boards
and all other parts made of metal shall be bonded together and connected by means of
specified earthing conductors to an efficient earthing system. All earthing shall be in
conformity with Nepal Electricity Rules.
Earthing shall be carried out as per drawing with at least 600 mm. x 600 mm. x 5 mm.
copper plate buried at least 1.5 m below ground and connecting to Main Distribution Panel
with 25 x 3 mm copper strip. The earth resistance of the earthing electrode shall not exceed
5 ohms.
The contractor shall furnish main earth connection to all electrical equipment chassis and
metallic conduit by means of appropriate sized copper wires as specified herein or shown
in drawing.
80
Earthing stations shall consist of plate or rod electrodes buried underground to specified
depth and in accordance with IS 3034-1966 and shall be as per the bill of quantities.
Earthing system shall be at least 1 meter away from the building foundation and the main
earth to the building shall be obtained by tapping this system by earth wire of appropriate
size as shown in the drawing. The connection of these earth wires by twisting shall not be
allowed. Appropriate connectors of cable shoes held fast by nuts and bolts shall make all
the wire connection.
The earthing plate or rod and earthing cable or strip shall be connected properly by
brazing using copper brazing rod. The size of the continuous earth wires used with cable
shall not be less than half the installation conductor size.
All the earth terminals of 15 A power sockets shall be connected by insulated copper
conductor with 2.5 sq. mm. Copper cable emanating from the respective distribution board.
The earth connection to the distribution board shall be obtained from the main switch
board and main switch board in turn shall be connected to the earthing system by using
copper wires of sufficient sizes a shown on the drawings.
Earthing set should consist of the following:
1 no. of 60 cm x 60 cm x 3 mm. Copper plate.

1 no. of watering GI pipe 1.8 m x 50 mm dia.
Brick masonry with RCC slab for inspection and earth connection. Charcoal and salt
filling.
Electrolytic bare copper wire secured to earth plate with cable shoe, nut bolt and
also connected to the earth pipe with nut and bolt.
20 Sub Distribution Board ( SDB)

Sub distribution board shall be made compact with 16 SWG mild steel sheet cubicle,
concealed type/surface type with double cover having locking arrangement. The depth
of the board shall not be less than 4”. The mild steel sheet shall be painted with two coats
of red oxide primer, and two final coats of steel gray color enamel. The bus bar used
shall be made from highly conductive, electrolytically pure copper bar strips of sufficient
cross sectional area so that maximum current density of 1.2 amp/sq. mm. shall not be
exceeded. Neutral bus bar shall not be less than 50 % of the phase bus cross section.
The interconnection of cable inside SDB shall be done with crimping type cable shoe of
appropriate size. The incomer MCCB shall have breaking capacity of 10 KA ( ICs) or higher
at 400 volts and outgoing MCB's shall have breaking capacity of 10 KA or higher at
380 volts. Armoured sheath of all the armoured power cables shall be properly
connected to body earth of SDB. All the connections in bus bar and MCCB’s and MCB’s
shall be made using cable shoes with sleeve.
81
21 Loading of MCB’s
S/N MCB No. of points
1 6 A SP MCB Max. 10 nos. of light

points or max 800 W
2 10 A SP MCB Max 6 nos. of

13A 3 pin for
computer
3 16 A SP MCB Max 3 nos. of 15

A 3 pin power points
22 Relevant Standards
Following specifications and code or their latest revision shall apply under
all circumstances.
i Low voltage Moulded Case Circuit Breaker - IS

ii) Transformer - IS
iii) Earthing - IS
iv) Wiring installation - IS 732,1963
v) PVC cable - IS 554,1964
vi) Distribution boards - IS
2675,1966
vii) Bus bars and Bus chambers - IS
375,1963
viii) Switch fuse units on cubicle switch boards - IS 4047-
1968
ix) Switch gear bus bars - IS 375-1963
x) H.R.C. Fuse links - IS 2208-1962
xi) Distribution fuse boards - IS 2675-1966
xii) Tubular fluorescent lamps for general
lighting service - IS 2418-1965
xiii) Tungsten filament lamps for general service - IS 418-1963
xiv) Industrial light fittings with metal reflectors - IS 17-1961
xv) Water light electric light fittings - IS 3553-1966
xvi) Switch socket outlets - IS 4615-1968
xvii) Three pin plug and socket outlets - IS 1293-1967
xviii) Switches for domestic and similar purpose - IS 3854-1966
xix) Ceiling fans - IS 374-1966
xx). 1100 volt cable - IS 692-1965
82
xxi) Low tension circuit breaker - IS 2516-1965
xxii) Steel boxes for enclosure of electrical - IS 5133-1969
accessories
23 Code of Practice
Earthing - IS 3043-1966
Electrical Wiring/ Installations - IS 732-1966
Switchgears - IS 3072-1966
Lightining protection - IS 2309-1969
24 Abbreviation used
LT - Low Tension
AC - Alternating Current MDB
- Main Distribution Board DB -
Distribution Board
KV - Kilo Volt
KVA - Kilo Volt Amp
PVC - Poly Vinyl Chloride
SWG - Standard Wire Guage ( British) IS
- Indian Standard
TPN - Three Phase Neutral
DP - Double Pole
MCB - Miniature Circuit Breaker
MCCB - Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
25 Standard and Make
All materials intended for this project shall be all new and as per specifications laid
herein. Where equivalent types are available, samples shall be submitted to the project
for formal approval before procurement is made. A brief descriptions or acceptable
brands are mentioned below for various requirements
83
Drawings and samples shall be submitted by the contractor and should not be deviated
from actual samples submitted without the written instructions from the consultants. Non
approval given by the consultants to any drawings or sample submitted by the contractor
shall in any way exonerate the contractor from his liability to carry out the work in
accordance with the terms of the contract. All the light fixtures and accessories shall be
of genuine quality and the manufacturer of the accessories shall be mentioned at the time
of bidding. The successful bidder shall submit a sample of each item for approval before
the installation of electrical fixtures.
Samples of the items whose standard and make are not indicated shall be submitted
and get approved by the consultant before installation.
27 Testing before installation

The following equipment and material shall be tested before
installation. Power cable (armoured/unarmoured)
MCCB
MCB
The insulation resistance for underground cable shall be more than 10

Megaohm.
28 Completion Tests
After completion of work, the following tests shall be performed before commissioning
the system.
28.1 Testing Insulation Resistance between Line and Earth
The insulation resistance between a line and earth shall be checked by 500 volt megger.
The phase conductor is connected to the terminal and marked "Line" on the megger and
terminal marked "Earth" is connected to the earth continuity conductor or an efficient
earth. The test shall be performed with all fuse links in place, all switches 'ON' and all
lamps in position. The result must not be less than 50 mega ohms divided by number of
outlets. The test shall be performed for all outgoing circuits of main control panel, feeder
post, MDB and DB.
85
28.2 Testing Insulation Resistance between Line to Line
The test shall be performed with all lamps removed and all switches 'ON'. The result must
not be again less than 50 megaohms divided by numbers of outlets. This test also shall
be performed for all outgoing circuits of main control panel, feeder post, MDB and DB.
Test should be made to verify that all single pole switches are on phase conductors
and not on the neutral or earth conductor.
To ensure that all the metering instruments and other accessories as MCCB, MCB,
switches work in perfect order.
The earth resistance of the earth system shall be checked with earth resistance
tester and shall not exceed 5 ohm.
If the above test results are not satisfactory, the contractor shall rectify the faults at his
own cost until the required results are obtained. The contractor in the presence of the
consultant shall carry out these tests without any charge to the owner.
28.3 Testing of Earth resistance
Resistance of earth electrode shall be measured using Earth Tester and the value
should not be greater than 5 ohm.
29 Completion Drawings
On completion of the job and before issuing of certificate of virtual completion, the
contractor shall submit to the Consulting engineer general layout drawings, drawn at
approved scale indicating panel, distribution board, diesel generating set and its
accessories AS installed". These drawings shall in particular give the following;
General Layout of fixtures and accessories.
Cable laying location with detail as size, numbers, and depth.
Locations of DB's, sub DB's, junction boxes et.
Main panel board, distribution board details.
Panel and other equipment locations and size etc.
Details of earth pits, connections and locations.
Connection drawing of all electrical connections.
86
30 Wiring of Telephone Points
Wiring of telephone points shall be done using telephone cables of various pairs in HDP
conduit of at least 12 mm. internal diameter concealed inside wall and slabs. Tapping
from one socket to other is not allowed.
Each single telephone line shall be connected to floor Distribution point by 3 pair cable.
Each telephone outlet shall be of RJ11 type 3”x 3” face plate on 18 swg metal box flushed
inside a wall. One single face plate shall serve max. of 2 separate telephone lines and
socket shall have screw type connection inside rather than by twisting of wires. At least
20% spare pair shall be provided at floor DP for future
expansion.
Floor distribution point shall consist of sufficient nos. of Krone / Pouyet type tag block with
frame inside a metal box with cover and locking arrangement. There must be sufficient space
for cable termination inside the box. DP shall be flushed inside a wall mounted at a height of
12”from finished floor level.
At least 6 inch separation shall be provided between electricity cable HDP pipe
and telephone cable pipe.
Each separate telephone line shall be considered as a point.
Cost of telephone point wiring shall include the complete labour charge and cost
of following items:
Telephone cables of appropriate pair from main exchange to DP and to each

telephone outlet including extra spare pair as per above specifications
HDP pipe of various sizes in which the telephone cables will be run. There shall be at
least 20% extra space inside the HDP pipe after the cable is run for the ease of pulling
cables.
It is the full responsibility of contractor to terminate all the cables in telephone

socket, DP and MDF and provide complete and correct tag data to the owner.
Separate Earthing for EPABX system
Separate earthing shall be provided for telephone system and the earth resistance
should not exceed 5 ohm for this purpose. Specification of earthing is same as in earthing
for electrical distribution system.
87
31 Wiring of Fire Alarm System
Each smoke detector, heat detector, response indicator, manual call point, sounder is
considered as a point and point wiring shall be done using 2 wire (single or double core)
1.5 sq. mm. dc cable in HDP conduit concealed inside RCC slab, ceiling, wall etc as per site
condition from each point to fire alarm control panel. Detectors are divided into
different zones and each zone shall have separate circuit up to the control panel. The
cables at control panel shall be properly numbered for identification. All the civil works
including chipping and finishing shall also be included in point wiring.
32 Wiring of Computer Networking
Each Computer outlet RJ-45 jack plate is considered as a point and wiring shall be done using
UTP Cat-5 networking cable from each point to the nearest hub as shown in the
drawing in a HDP pipe concealed inside RCC slab, ceiling, and wall as per site condition. All
the hubs shall also be connected by cabling. The cables shall be properly terminated at
face plate and properly numbered at hub for identification. All the civil works including
chipping and finishing shall also be included in point wiring.
33 Wiring of Access control system
Each point at door is considered as a point and wiring shall be done using 1 sq. mm 10
core copper cable from each point to the central control system as shown in the drawing in
a HDP pipe concealed inside RCC slab, ceiling, and wall as per site condition and the cables
shall be properly numbered at control room for identification. All the civil works including
chipping and finishing shall also be included in point wiring.
34 Wiring of CCTV surveillance system
Each camera point outdoor/indoor is considered as a point and wiring shall be done using
low loss RG-59 coaxial cable from each point to the central monitor room as shown in the
drawing in a HDP pipe concealed inside RCC slab, ceiling, wall, underground as per site
condition. Cable joints between camera point and central monitor system are not allowed.
The cables shall be properly terminated at the face plate and properly numbered at control
room for identification. All the civil works including chipping and finishing shall also be
included in point wiring.
35 Guarantee
After the completion of the work and before issuance of final certificate of virtual completion
the contractor shall furnish a written guarantee by his acceptance of the contract that
all work installed will be free from any defective materials and all defects and that all
apparatus will develop capacities and characteristic specified and that if during a period of
one year from date of completion and acceptance work any such defects on workmanship
or defective material, repair or otherwise correct the
88
defects of deficiency without cost to the owner within a reasonable time. In the event
of default on this guarantee by the contractor, the owner may have works done as
required and charge the cost to the contractors.
89
REGULATION
2013
YEAR: 2018
AR 6703
ETHICS
SEMSETER IX
[UNIT IV - LEGAL ASPECTS]

FACULTY IN-CHARGE: DR SHIVAJAGANATH & AR
MURALI J
ARCHITECTURE
TOPICS
ARBITRATION
 DEFINITION ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 02

 ADVANTAGES OF ARBITRATION ------------------------------------------------------ 03
 SOLE AND JOINT ARBITRATORS ------------------------------------------------------ 03
 ROLE OF UMPIRES -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 04
 AWARD ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------04
 CONDUCT OF ARBITRATION PROCEEDINGS -------------------------------------- 04
 ARBITRATION CLAUSE IN CONTRACT AGREEMENT (ROLE OF
ARCHITECT, EXCEPTED MATTERS) -------------------------------------------------- 05
EASEMENT
 MEANING -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 05

 TYPES OF EASEMENTS -------------------------------------------------------------------- 07
 ACQUISITION ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------08
 EXTINCTION AND PROTECTION ------------------------------------------------------- 08
 COPY RIGHTS AND PATENTING ----------------------------------------------------- 09

 CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT ------------------------------------------------------ 15
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 1
ARCHITECTURE
ARBITRATION
The history and origin of dispute settlement practices appear to be as old as the civilization.
In ancient India, the system was widely practised for dispensing justice. Disputes were
referred to village council or the Panchayat for speedy settlement. During the early British
period, regulations encouraged arbitration for amicable adjustment of disputes. The
Arbitration Act 1899 was passed to fill some gaps in the earlier legislations. Arbitration Act
of 1940 was enacted to be a full code on arbitration in India. This Act was replaced in 1996,
since there are no limits set down to discourage courts from stepping into an on-going
arbitration. The Arbitration and Conciliation Act 1996 was enacted based on model rules
prescribed by the United Nations Commission on International Trade Law, 1986. This Act
provides for domestic arbitration, international commercial arbitration and enforcement of
foreign arbitral awards. Law relating to conciliation also forms a part of the Act.
Definition
Arbitration is a form of dispute resolution, carried out by a independent person or tribunal.

The process is agreed upon beforehand by the parties, normally through an arbitration clause
in the contract.
The Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996
The main objectives of the Act are as under:
(a) to comprehensively cover international and commercial arbitration and

conciliation as also domestic arbitration and conciliation;
(b) to make provision for an arbitral procedure which is fair, efficient and capable of
meeting the needs of the specific arbitration;
(c) to provide that the arbitral tribunal gives reasons for its arbitral award;
(d) to ensure that the arbitral tribunal remains within the limits of its jurisdiction;
(e) to minimise the supervisory role of courts in the arbitral process;
(f) to permit an arbitral tribunal to use mediation, conciliation Or other procedures
during the arbitral proceedings to encourage settlement of disputes;
(g) to provide that every final arbitral award is enforced in the same manner as if it
were a decree of the court;
(h) to provide that a settlement agreement reached by the parties as a result of
conciliation proceedings will have the same status and effect as an arbitral award
on agreed terms on the substance of the dispute rendered by an arbitral tribunal;
and
(i) to provide that, for purpose of enforcement of foreign awards, every arbitral award
made in a country to which one of the two international Conventions relating to
foreign arbitral awards to which India is a party applies, will be treated as a
foreign award.
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 2
ARCHITECTURE
Resolution of Disputes by Arbitration
Arbitration is the most popular mode of settlement ot disputes relating to building and
engineering contracts. Most construction contracts provide for arbitration. Imparting justice
with speed and least expense is the primary purpose of arbitration. Arbitration means the
determination of disputes by the decision of one or more persons called arbitrators. Every
dispute which can be settled by a civil court may be referred to arbitration. It is an alternative
means of settling disputes.
Advantages of Arbitration
o Speed,
o Less expense,
o Privacy,
o Informality of proceedings,
o Continuity of good relations,
o Expertise of arbitrators,
o Flexibility in choice of meeting place/location &
o Finality of decision is some of the advantages of arbitration over litigations.
Sole and Joint Arbitrators & Umpires
The parties are generally free to determine their own procedure for appointing the arbitrator
or arbitrators, including the procedure for the selection of an umpire or chairman. If the
parties decline to specify the mode for selecting the arbitrators, then the relevant legal system
will usually provide a default selection process. Characteristically, appointments will usually
be made on the following basis:
 If the tribunal is to consist of a sole arbitrator, the parties shall jointly appoint the
arbitrator not later than (for example) 28 days after service of a request in writing by
either party to do so.
 If the tribunal is to consist of three arbitrators:
(a) Each party shall appoint one arbitrator not later than (for example) 14 days after
service of a request in writing by either party to do so, and
(b) The two so appointed shall forthwith appoint a third arbitrator as the chairman of the
tribunal.
 If the tribunal is to consist of two arbitrators and an umpire-
(a) Each party shall appoint one arbitrator not later than (for example) 14 days after
service of a request in writing by either party to do so, and
(b) The two so appointed may appoint an umpire at any time after they themselves are
appointed and shall do so before any substantive hearing or forthwith if they cannot
agree on a matter relating to the arbitration.
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 3
ARCHITECTURE
Most arbitration clauses will provide a nominated person or body to select a sole arbitrator if
the parties are unable to agree. In default of such a provision, where the parties are unable to
agree, an application for an appointment is usually made to the court.
Chairman and umpire

Where the tribunal consists of an odd number of arbitrators, one of them may be designated
as the umpire or chairman. The selection of title actually carries some significance. When an
arbitrator is "chairman", then they will not usually exercise any special or additional powers,
and merely have a presidential function as the tribunal member who sets the agenda. Where a
member of the tribunal is an umpire, they usually do not exercise any influence on
proceedings, unless the other arbitrators are unable to agree — in such cases, then the umpire
steps in and makes the decision alone.
Arbitration Award
A good award should he:
o Within the scope of submission to arbitration, which limits the powers of arbitrators to
the substance therein
o Made within the prescribed or reasonable time
o Unambiguous, unconditional, complete and final
o The judgement and decision that of the arbitrator only and no one else's.
Arbitration awards are not generally set aside by courts (Legal misconduct is an exception).
A court will not act as an appeal court and set aside a good and valid award.
Conduct of Arbitration Proceedings
A specific clause is incorporated in building contract for settlement of disputes by the

designated authority specified in Arbitration clause. Arbitrator is appointed for settlement of
disputes. Aggrieved party is required to approach the designated authority to appoint an
arbitrator with a list of disputes and amount claimed against each. The designated authority
will appoint an arbitrator and refers all the disputes or selected disputes only to arbitrators for
adjudication.
In some of the contracts, provision is made for direct resolution of disputes initially by the
parties. Such of the disputes which are not resolved by mutual discussions are submitted to
designated authority with a request to appoint an arbitrator.
Arbitration is conducted in the light of various provisions contained in The Arbitration and
Conciliation Act, 1996 described as follows:
(a) The parties are treated with equality and each shall be given full opportunity to
present his case.
(b) The parties are free to agree on the procedure to be adopted by the arbitral tribunal.
(c) The parties are free to agree on place of arbitration and language to he used.
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 4
ARCHITECTURE
(d) Arbitration proceedings commence from the date of receipt of request for arbitration
by the respondent.
(e) Claimant shall state the facts supporting his claims, issue involved and remedy
sought. The respondent shall give defence in respect of these claims.
(f) Arbitration tribunal shall decide on oral hearings/documentary evidence.
(g) Experts may be appointed by arbitration tribunal to report on specific issues.
(h) Assistance of the court may be sought for taking evidence.
(i) Decision is by majority of tribunal members. (The tribunal consists of small odd
number of arbitrators).
(j) Award is in writing and duly signed by arbitrators.
(k) It is a reasoned award unless otherwise agreed to by parties.
(l) If award amount is not paid, it carries an interest of 18% per annum from date of
award to date of payment.
(m) Award is final and binding. It is enforced as if it were a decree of a civil court.
Arbitration Clause in Contract Agreement (Role of Architect, Excepted Matters)
All disputes shall be referred to and settled by the architect who then states his/her decision in
writing. Such decision may be in the form of a final certificate or otherwise. The decision of
the architect with respect to any of the expected matters shall be final and without appeal. If
the decision of the architect is not acceptable to either party, a notice shall be given within 28
days after receiving the notice of the decision. The disputes or difference shall be referred to
sole arbitrator of a fellow of Indian Institute of Architect mutually agreed by the parties. In
case of disagreement, each party shall appoint one architect (fellow of IIA) and both the
arbitrators select an umpire. They shall have the power to open up, review, and revise any
certificate, opinion, and decision requisition or notice expect excepted matters. The
arbitration shall be conducted as per the Act in force (The Arbitration and Conciliation Act
1996).
EASEMENT
Meaning
Easement as defined under Section 4 of the Indian Easement Act, 1882 is a right which the
owner or occupier of certain land possesses as such, for the beneficial enjoyment of that land,
to do and continue to do something or to prevent and continue to prevent something being
done, in or upon or in respect of, certain other land not his own.
Dominant and Servient heritages and owners
The land for the beneficial enjoyment of which the right exists is called the dominant heritage
and the owner or occupier thereof the dominant owner; the land on which the liability is
imposed is called the servient heritage and the owner or occupier is called the servient owner.
As shown in Figure 01 X is the owner of land ABCD and Y is the owner of land CDEF.
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 5
ARCHITECTURE
FIGURE 4.1 – ILLUSTRATION OF DOMINANT AND SERVIENT OWNER
As shown in the Figure, X cannot access his land from the road without passing through Y's
land (CDEF). ABCD is called dominant heritage. CDEF is called servient heritage.
This is an example of easement X is benefitted by the Indian Easement Act, 1882. Y

sacrifices a part of his absolute right of enjoyment and ownership of his land CDEF.
Example:
o X as the owner of certain house, has a right of way over his neighbour Y’s land for
purpose connected with the beneficial enjoyment of the house. This is an easement.
o X as the owner of a certain house has the right to go on to his neighbour Y’s land to
take water for the purpose of his house hold out of a spring therein. This is an
easement.
Characteristic of an Easement
The essential characteristics of an easement are:
1. There must be a dominant and servient tenement.

2. An easement accommodates the dominant tenement.
3. The right of easement must be possessed for the beneficial enjoyment of dominant
tenement.
4. Dominant and servient owners must be different persons.
5. The right should entitle the dominant owner to do and continue to do something or to
prevent and continue to prevent something, being done in or upon or in respect of the
servient tenement.
6. Something must be of a certain or well-defined character and be capable of forming
the subject matter of a grant.
7. Easement is private rights belonging to particular persons.
8. Easement is a right which the owner/occupier of land possess on land not his own.
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 6
ARCHITECTURE
Types of Easements
Easement of light
The right to have access of light to the property owned by the owner is a natural right, and
such a right may be either a natural right or an easement. This right can be acquired in case of
buildings such a right is a species of a negative easement. The owner of the dominant
tenements is entitled to the uninterrupted access through his/her ancient windows of a
quantity of light required for inhabitancy or for his/her business.
Easement of a right to free passage of light
Dominant owner should prove that
1. Light has been curtailed

2. Consequently dominant tenement has become inhabitable
3. Disturbance has affected dominant owner
In case disturbance is not substantial, Court at its discretion may award monetary
compensation as damages.
Easement of access to air
This is concerned with the volume of air which may be available through an opening. The
right to have air also is a natural right and a person has a right to receive all the air that
vertically passes to his/her land. Every owner has got the right to open apertures (openings) in
his own wall and unless by doing so he/she invades the privacy of any other pre-existing and
well-established right vested in his neighbour, the later cannot force him/her to close the
apertures and the remedy for the neighbour is to build on his/her own land or otherwise
obstruct the apertures.
Easement regarding pollution of air
Unreasonable pollution causing injury to property or health and also creating personal
discomfort cannot be justified normally.
Easement relating to water
If there is a defined channel and the water can get through that channel, it must not be
allowed to sprawl on the adjoining land. If there is no defined channel from which the water
can flow, then the land at a lower level has to take the burden of the flow of that water. The
right to flow of water or the right to discharge water by means of artificial water courses is
not a natural right, but may be acquired by contract, prescription; grant or even arrangement
and the rights of such nature too are to be established like other easement rights.
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 7
ARCHITECTURE
Easement of support
Easement of support may arise in cases of the support of buildings by land or the support of
buildings by buildings or easement to let down the surface as in the case of mining
operations, etc. the real nature of this right is not that the adjacent soil should not be
disturbed, but such disturbance should not be injurious to the dominant easement.
o If an adjoining building is endangered due to pile driving, that owner has a right for
compensation.
o Partition wall between two buildings is another type of support.
o Party wall, this applies to foundation too. While laying fresh foundation the existing
foundation of the neighbouring building should be adequately supported, i.e.
dominant heritage.
Acquisition
a. By grant: An easement may be imposed by anyone in the circumstances and to the

extent in and to which he/she may transfer his/her interest in the heritage on which the
liability is to be imposed.
b. By necessity: When a property is divided into two parts either by sale, mortgages,
partition, etc., and they are so situated that one cannot be enjoyed without exercising a
particular privilege in or upon the other.
c. By prescription: It is acquisition of a right or title by constant use or possession for
20 years. If it is claimed against government it is 60 years. Mode of acquiring
easement by this method is detailed in the Easement Act, 1882. A person should have
enjoyed the right of way, right to air, right to light and right of support continuously
for a period of 20 years without interruption.it is necessary to obtain a declaratory
order from the Court that dominant owner is entitled to the prescriptive easement
rights. The suit should be filed within two year after the expiry of 20 years.
Extinction and Protection
Case I: To prevent the neighbour from acquiring easement rights by prescription.
Situation 1: There are two adjacent plots. Client has kept his plot vacant (undeveloped). His
neighbour has built ground floor and first floor. He is receiving light and air from clients plot
also through windows on his building. If the client does not take action to prevent his
neighbour from acquiring easement rights, there will be difficulty in developing his plot in
future.
Situation 2: Both have developed their plots to equal height. The neighbour is attempting to
raise another floor. Clients should be advised to proceed as described:
(i) To draw an agreement with the neighbour stating that:

o No easement rights are claimed by his neighbour against him when he develops his
land or builds another floor as the case may be.
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 8
ARCHITECTURE
o Neighbour as a licensee is allowed to enjoy light and air from clients plot on payment
of normal fee.
(ii) If the neighbour does not agree for such an agreement, client should erect a screen of
CGI sheets to block air and light through neighbour's windows. This has to be done
well before expiry of 20 years.
Case II: Preservation of preservative rights of easement: When the dominant tenement is
demolished, for construction of a new building, if the position and size of windows are same
as before, there may not be any problem. If they are altered, it is to be proved that no
additional burden is imposed on servient owner.
Case III: Hurrying construction when injunction is anticipated: When a party's legal rights
are interfered, he approaches the court to grant injunction to safeguard against future injuries
and to maintain status quo. Injunction may be interim for a specified period or permanent or
mandatory. Mandatory injunction is granted when it is not possible to assess damages or
when easement rights are interfered.
In spite of this, if the work is completed and if the court cannot assess damages the court may
order mandatory injunction where by the person is required to pull down and restore the
building to its original condition.
COPY RIGHTS AND PATENTING
Copyright is a legal right created by the law of a country that grants the creator of an original
work exclusive right for its use and distribution. We cannot do anything without either asking
permission or confirming that the work is in the public domain, which means that the
copyright has expired and all of the above rights have been forfeited. If the work isn’t in the
public domain and we don’t have permission to use a piece, we put yourself in risk of legal
action, regardless of our intentions.
COPYRIGHT LAW OF INDIA
The copyright act, 1957 governs the subject of copyright law in India. It was the first post-
independence copyright legislation in India and the law has been amended six times since
1957. The most recent amendment was in the year 2012, through the Copyright
(Amendment) Act 2012.
In a 2016 copyright lawsuit, the Delhi high court states that copyright is "not an inevitable,
divine, or natural right that confers on authors the absolute ownership of their creations. It is
designed rather to stimulate activity and progress in the arts for the intellectual enrichment of
the public.
Copyright subsists throughout India in the following classes of work:
 Original literacy, dramatic, musical and artistic works.

 Cinematograph films and
S.V.RAVINDRA Page 9
EVA UNIVERSITY , SCHOOL OF
ARCHITECTURE
 Sound recordings
The author of a work is generally considered as the first owner of the copyright under the
Copyright Act 1957.
However, for works made in the course of an author's employment under a "contract of
service" or apprenticeship, the employer is considered as the first owner of copyright, in the
absence of any agreement to the contrary.
The concept of joint authorship is recognised in Section. 2(z) of the Act which provides that
"a work produced by the collaboration of two or more authors in which the contribution of
one author is not distinct from the contribution of the other author or authors" is a work of
joint authorship.
Section 19 of the Copyright Act 1957 lays down the modes of assignment of copyright in
India. Assignment can only be in writing and must specify the work, the period of assignment
and the territory for which assignment is made. If the period of assignment is not specified in
the agreement, it shall be deemed to be 5 years and if the territorial extent of assignment is
not specified, it shall be presumed to be limited to the territories of India.
Procedure for Registration of a Work under Copyright Act, 1957
Copyright comes into existence as soon as a work is created and no formality is required to
be completed for acquiring copyright. However facilities exist for having the work registered
in the Register of Copyrights maintained in the Copyright Office of the Department of
Education. The entries made in the Register of Copyrights serve as prima-facie evidence in
the court of law. The Copyright Office has been setup to provide registration facilities to all
types of works and is headed by a registrar of copyrights and is located in New Delhi.
PATENT
A Patent is a monopoly right granted to person who has invented a new and useful article or
an improvement of an existing article or a new process of making an article
Legislation
The Patent system in India is governed by the Patents Act, 1970 (No 39 of 1970) & The
Patents Rules 1972, effective from April 20, 1972. Subsequently The Patents Act, 1970 is
amended effective from January 1, 1995 & The Patents Rules, 1972 is amended effective
from June 2, 1999.
Administration
The Patent Office, under the Ministry of Commerce & Industry, Department of Industrial
Policy & Promotion, has been established to administer the various provisions of the Patents
Law relating to the grant of Patents & the Designs Law, relating to the registration of
Industrial Designs.
ARCHITECTURE
Types of patents
 Ordinary Patent
 Patents of addition
 Convention
Who can apply?
Application may be made, either alone or jointly with another, by the inventor, assignee, legal
representative of deceased inventor or assignee. The inventor is entitled to be mentioned in
the patent if he applies to do so.
Application may be made jointly by two or more corporations as assignees.
Inventions patentable
 Art, Process, Method or Manner of manufacture;
 Machine, Apparatus or other Articles;
 Substances produced by Manufacturing
 Computer Software which has Technical application to Industry or is used with

Hardware
 Product Patent for Food / Chemical / Medicines or Drugs
Inventions not patentable
 Frivolous or obvious inventions.
 Inventions which could be contrary to law or morality or injurious to human, animal

or plant life and health or to the environment.
 Mere discovery of the scientific principle or the formulation of an abstract theory or

discovery of any living thing or non-living substances occurring in nature
 Producing a new substance by mere admixtures of substances.
 Mere arrangement / rearrangement or duplication of known devices functioning

independently.
 Method of agriculture and horticulture
 Any process for the medicinal or surgical, curative prophylactic, diagnostic,

therapeutic or other treatment of human beings, animals to render them free of disease or
to increase their economic value or that of their products.
ARCHITECTURE
 The biological processes for production or propagation of plants and animals in whole
or any part thereof other than micro-organisms but including seeds, varieties and species
(new plant varieties can be protected by the protection of plant varieties and farmers act
2001).
 A mathematical or business method or algorithms.
 Aesthetic creation including cinematography and television production.
 Method for performing mental act or playing game.
 Presentation of information.
 Inventions relating to Atomic Energy.
Documents required for filing an application
 Full name, address & nationality of applicant (s) and inventor (s).
 Specification, provisional / complete drawings, claims and abstract.
 List of countries to claim priority, if any, where the application / applications for the
grant of patent has / have been filed, along with date and application number.
 Power of Attorney
 Priority document (if priority date is claimed).
 Fee in cash/by local cheque/by demand draft.
Appropriate office for filing an application
 Application is required to be filed according to the territorial limits where the

applicant or the first mentioned applicant in case of joint applicants for a patent
normally resides or has a place of business or the place from where the invention
actually originated.
 If the applicant for the patent or party in a proceeding having no business, place or
domicile in India., the appropriate office will be according to the address of service in
India given by the applicant or party in a proceeding.
Examination and publication
 All the applications for patent accompanied by complete specification are examined
substantively.
 A first examination report stating the objection(s) is communicated to the applicant or

his agents. Application or complete specification may be amended in order to meet
the objection(s).
RCHITECTURE
 Normally all the objections must be met within 15 months from the date of first
examination report. Extension of time for three months is available, but application
for extension therefore must be made before the expiry of normal period of 15
months.
 If all the objections are not complied with within the normal period or within the
extended period the application will be deemed to have been abandoned.
 When the application is found to be suitable for acceptance it is published in the

gazette of India (Part III, Section2). It is deemed laid open to the public on the date of
publication in the gazette of India.
Opposition
 Notice of opposition must be filed within four months of notification in the Gazette.
 Extension of one month is available, but must be applied for before expiry of initial
four month period.
Grant or sealing of patent
 If the application is not opposed or the opposition is decided in favour of the applicant
or is not refused the patent is granted or sealed on payment of sealing fee within 6
months from the date of advertisement.
 However, it is extendable by three months.
Register of patents
 The Register of Patents will be kept in the Patent Office and its branch offices.
 Register of Patents can be inspected or extract from it can be obtained on payment of

prescribed fee.
 Register of Patents contains full details of the Patent which include patent number,
the names and addresses of the patentee; notification of assignment etc.; renewals,
particulars in respect of proprietorship of patent etc.
Rights of patentee
 A patent grant gives the patentee the exclusive right to make or use the patented
article or use the patented process.
 He can prevent all others from making or using the patented process.
 A patentee has also the right to assign the patent, grant licenses under, or otherwise
deal with it for any consideration. These rights created by statute are circumscribed by
various conditions and limitations.
ARCHITECTURE
Renewal fee
 Renewal fees are payable every year. The first renewal fee is payable for third year of
the patent’s life, and must be paid before the patent’s second anniversary. If the patent
has not been issued within that period, renewal fees may be accumulated and paid
immediately after the patent is sealed, or within three months of it’s recordal in the
Register of the Patents.
 Date of payment of Renewal fees is measured from the date of the patent. Six months’
grace is available with Extension fee. No renewal fees are payable on patents of
addition, unless the original patent is revoked and the patent of addition is converted
into an independent patent; renewal fees then become payable for the remainder of the
term of the main patent.
 No renewal fees are payable during the pendency of the application for a patent;
renewal fees that become overdue during pendency are payable upon sealing within
three months of recordal in the Patent Register.
Working
 Annual reports as to the extent of working, by every patentee and licensee, are a
statutory requirement and must be submitted by March, 31 each year for the previous
year ending December, 31.
Compulsory license and license of right
 On failure to work a patent within three years from the date of its sealing, an
interested party may file petition for grant of a compulsory license.
 Every patent for an invention relating to a method or process for manufacture of

substances intended for use, or capable of being used, as food, medicines, or drugs, or
relating to substances prepared or produced by chemical process (including alloys,
optical glass, semi-conductors and inter-metallic compounds) shall be deemed to be
endorsed "Licenses of Right" from the date of expiry of three years from the date of
sealing the patent.
Assignment
 Applications must be filed on the prescribed form with the Controller for the
registration of assignments and any other documents creating an interest in a patent in
order for them to be valid. In order to be valid, an assignment must be recorded within
six months from the date of the document. A six-month extension may be obtained.
License
 Applications must be filed on the prescribed form with the Controller for the
registration of licenses and any other documents creating an interest in a patent in
ARCHITECTURE
order for them to be valid. A license must be recorded within six months from the
date of the document.
Duration
 A patent lasts for 14 years from the date of filing the complete specification (if an
application is filed with provisional specification on January 1, 1989, and a complete
specification is filed on January 1, 1990, the duration is counted from January 1,
1990). However, for food, drug and insecticide patents, the life is seven years from
the date of complete specification, or five years from date of sealing, whichever is
shorter.
Restoration
 Application for restoration of a patent that lapses due to non-payment of renewal fees
must be made within one year of lapse. If an overdue annuity is not paid within the
extension period, the one-year period for seeking restoration commences from the
date of recordal.
Infringement
 Infringement can consist of taking away essential features of the patented invention;
utilizing claimed features; copying patented substances; mechanical equivalence;
taking part of the invention. While the patent is in force. Use by the government or for
government purposes is not infringement. Such use must be paid for on terms to be
agreed upon before or after use. Accidental or temporary use, use for research, use on
foreign vessels, do not constitute infringement.
Appeal
 Appeal lies in the High Court. Appeal must be lodged within three months from the
decision of the Controller.
CONSUMER PROTECTION ACT
In order to provide for better protection of the interests of the consumer, the Consumer
Protection Bill, 1986 was introduced in the Lok Sabha on 5th Dec. 1986. Consumer Protection
Act 1986 is a social welfare legislation which was enacted as a result of widespread
Consumer Protection Movement.
Objectives
The main objective of the CPA is to provide speedy and simple redressal to consumer
disputes. It is one of the benevolent pieces of legislation intended to protect the consumers at
large from exploitations.
ARCHITECTURE
Who is a consumer? Sec. 2 (1) (d)
Any person who:
 Buys any goods for a consideration which has been paid or will be paid.
 Hires or avails any services for a consideration which has been paid or will be paid.
 It does not include a person who obtains goods for resale or any commercial purpose.
Rights of Consumers
RIGHT TO
SAFETY
RIGHT TO
RIGHT TO BE
CONSUMER
INFORMED
EDUCATION
RIGHTS OF
CONSUMERS
RIGHT TO RIGHT TO BE
REDRESSAL HEARD
Redressal Agency
The aims and objectives of the Act are achieved by
 District forum
 State commission
 National commission
District Forum
 It shall consist of a person who is or has been or is qualified to be a District Judge as

its President, two other members, one of them whom shall be a women.
ARCHITECTURE
 Every member of the District forum shall hold office for a team of 5 years or up to the
age of 65 years whichever is earlier.
 It shall have jurisdiction to entertain complaints where the value of the goods or
services and the compensation, if any, claimed does not exceed Rs. 20 lacs.
District forum shall have the powers
1. To remove the defect pointed out by the appropriate laboratory from the goods in
question.
2. To replace the goods with new goods of similar description which shall be free from
any defect.
3. To return to the complainant the price, or as the case may be, the charges paid by the
complainant.
4. To pay such amount as may be awarded by it as compensation to the consumer for
nay loss or injury suffered by the consumer due to the negligence of the opposite
party.
State Commission
 It is established by SG by notification.
services and compensation, if any, claimed exceeds Rs. 20 Lacs but does not exceed
Rs. 1 crore and appeals against the orders of any District forum with the State.
National Commission
 It shall consist of a person who is or has been a Judge of the Supreme Court, as its
President. Not less than four and not more than such number of members as may be
prescribed and one of whom shall be a women.
 Every member of the National commission shall hold office for a team of 5 years or
up to the age of 70 years whichever is earlier.
services and compensation, if any, the claim exceeds Rs. 1 crore and appeals against
the orders of any State commission.
Councils
 Central Council
 State Council
 District Council
District Consumer Protection Council
It shall consist of the following members, namely:
a. The collector of the District (by whatever name called), as its Chairman
ARCHITECTURE
b. Such number of other officials and non-official members or may be prescribed by the
SG.
 The procedure will be set by SG.
State Consumer Protection Council
 It shall consist of the following members, namely:

a. The Minister in-charge of consumer affairs in the SG as its Chairman.
b. Such number of other officials and non-official members as may be prescribed by the
SG.
 The State Council shall meet at least twice in a year.
 The procedures will be prescribed by the SG.
Central Consumer Protection Council
 It shall consist of the following members, namely:

a. The Minister in-charge of consumer in the CG as its Chairman
b. Such number of other officials or non-official members as may be prescribed.
 The Council shall meet at once in a year.
ETHICS
[UNIT V - IMPORTANT LEGISLATIONS AND

CURRENT TRENDS]
ARCHITECTURE
TOPICS
 DEVELOPMENT REGULATIONS IN SECOND MASTER PLAN FOR CMA,
CHENNAI CORPORATION BUILDING RULES 1972 -------------------------------- 03
 FACTORIES ACT ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
 PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES ACT --------------------------------------------------- 15
 BARRIER FREE ENVIRONMENT -------------------------------------------------------- 18
 COSTAL REGULATION ZONE ----------------------------------------------------------- 18
 HERITAGE ACT ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 18
 GLOBALISATION AND ITS IMPACT ON ARCHITECTURAL PROFESSION -18
 PREPAREDNESS FOR INTERNATIONAL PRACTICE ------------------------------ 18
 ENTRY OF FOREIGN ARCHITECTS IN INDIA -------------------------------------- 18
 INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY AND ITS IMPACT ON ARCHITECTURAL
PRACTICE -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18
 EMERGING SPECIALISATIONS IN THE FIELD OF ARCHITECTURE --------- 18
o ARCHITECT AS CONSTRUCTION / PROJECT MANAGER ----------------------- 18
 ARCHITECTURAL JOURNALISM ------------------------------------------------------- 18
 ARCHITECTURAL PHOTOGRAPHY --------------------------------------------------- 18
S.V.RAVINDRA,www.google.co.images? Page 2
ARCHITECTURE
DEVELOPMENT REGULATIONS IN SECOND MASTER PLAN FOR CMA,

CHENNAI CORPORATION BUILDING RULES 1972
For the development purpose all lands in the Metropolitan area have been categorized under
the following use zone:
01. Primary residential use zone
02. Mixed residential use zone
03. Commercial use zone
04. Light industrial use zone
05. General industrial use zone
06. Special and hazardous industrial use zone.
07. Institutional use zone
08. Open space and recreational use zone
09. Agricultural use zone
10. Non-urban use zone
In each zone certain uses will be permitted normally, certain other uses may be permitted on
appeal to the Metropolitan Development Authority and all other uses will be specifically
prohibited.
The use under each of the above ten categories along with regulations in respect of height,
floor space index, plot coverage, minimum set back and such other regulation have been
specified taking into consideration the three characteristically different units comprised
within the Metropolitan Area.
 The Central area, i.e. the area known as George Town (bounded on the north by
Ebrahim Sahib Street, on the east by the sea, on the south by General Hospital Road
and west by the Buckingham Canal) and other areas where continuous buildings are
permissible.
 Municipalities, Township areas and Chennai City within the Corporation limits
excluding George Town and continuous building areas.
 Area with the Metropolitan Area excluding the above two categories.
Permission and zones
1. Written Permission for Development

2. Manner of obtaining permission
ARCHITECTURE
3. Development to be in conformity with these rules ( Detailed Development Plans , Site

approval )
4. Designation of use of master plan or detailed development plan
5. Width of roads in the development plan
6. Boundaries of zones
Zones
ARCHITECTURE
Maximum height
One and half times the width of the abutting road provided that the height may be exceeded
to the extent of 1 meter for every 30 centimeters by which the building is set back from the
street.
Minimum set back
In accordance with rules - Where building lines have not been specified it shall be as follows:
(i) Front setback - 1.5 meters for all road widths.
Abutting road width - Set back
 Above 30 m - 6m
 Above 15 m but less than 30 m - 4.5 m
 Above 10 m but less than 15 m - 3.0 m
 Below 10 m - 1.5 m
a) For economically weaker section plots, front set back shall not be less than 1.00 meter
irrespective of the road width except where a street alignment and building line is
prescribed.
(b) For shops front set back shall not be less than 3 meters.
Rear set back ... Nil
Depth of Plot - Rear set back
Up to 15 meters - 1.5 meters
Between 15 to 30 meters - 3.0 meters
Above 30 meters - 4.5 meters
ARCHITECTURE
Commercial use zone
Light industrial zone
ARCHITECTURE
General industrial zone
Special and hazardous industrial zone
ARCHITECTURE
Institutional zone
ARCHITECTURE
ARCHITECTURE
ARCHITECTURE
FACTORIES ACT
Interpretations
Child - a person who has not completed his fifteenth year of age
Adult - a person who has completed his eighteenth year of age
Adolescent - a person who has completed his fifteenth year of age but has not completed his
eighteenth year
Calendar year - the period of twelve months beginning with the first day of January in any
year
Competent person - a person or an institution recognized as such by the Chief Inspector for
the purposes of carrying out tests, examinations and inspections required to be done in a
factory
Hazardous process - any process or activity that causes material impairment to the health of
the persons or result in the pollution of the general environment
Day - a period of twenty-four hours beginning at midnight
ARCHITECTURE
Power - electrical energy, or any other form of energy which is mechanically transmitted and
is not generated by human or animal agency.
Prime mover - any engine, motor or other appliance which generates or otherwise provides
power
Machinery - includes prime movers, transmission machinery and all other appliances
whereby power is generated, transformed, transmitted or applied
 Manufacturing process - any process for

making, altering, repairing, ornamenting, finishing, packing, oiling, washing,
cleaning, breaking, demolishing, treating or adapting any article or substance with a
view to its use, sale, transport, delivery or disposal; or
 pumping oil, water, sewage, or any other substance
 generating, transforming or transmitting power
 composing types for printing or other similar process or book-binding
 constructing, reconstructing, repairing, refitting, finishing or breaking up
 preserving or storing any article in cold storage
Worker - a person employed, directly or by or through any agency with or without the
knowledge of the principal employer, in any manufacturing process, or in cleaning any part
of the machinery or premises used for a manufacturing process, or in any other kind of work
connected with the manufacturing process.
Factory - any premises including the precincts (commercial area) thereof
 whereon ten or more workers are working, or were working on any day of the
preceding twelve months, and in any part of which a manufacturing process is being
carried on with the aid of power
 whereon twenty or more workers are working, or were working on any day of the
preceding twelve months, and in any part of which a manufacturing process is being
carried on without the aid of power
Occupier - the person who has ultimate control over the affairs of the factory
References to time of day - In this Act, references to time of day are references to Indian
Standard Time, being five and half hours ahead of Greenwich Mean Time:
Provided that for any area in which Indian Standard Time is not ordinarily
observed the Government may make rules
 Specifying the area,

 Defining the local mean time ordinarily observed therein, and
 Permitting such time to be observed the factories situated in the area
ARCHITECTURE
Power to declare different departments to be separate factories or two or more factories

to be a single factory
The State Government may on its own or on application made by an occupier, direct or by an order
in writing, and subject to such conditions as it may deem fit, that different departments or branches
of a factory of the occupier specified in the application shall be treated as separate factories or that
two or more factories of the occupier specified in the application shall be treated as a single factory;
Provided that no order under this section shall be made by the State Government on its own motion
unless an opportunity of being heard is given to the occupier.
Approval, licensing and registration of factories
The Government may make rules-
 Requiring the submission of plans of any class or description of factories to the Chief
Inspector or the State Government
 Requiring for the purpose of considering applications for such permission the
submission of plans and specifications;
 Prescribing the nature of such plans and specifications and by whom they shall be
certified;
 Requiring the registration and licensing of factories and prescribing the fees payable
for such registration and licensing and for the renewal of licenses.
Health
1. Cleanliness
2. Disposal of wastes and effluents
3. Ventilation and temperature
4. Dust and fume
5. Artificial humidification
6. Over-crowding
7. Lighting
8. Drinking water
9. Latrines and urinals
10. Spittoons
Safety
 Fencing of machinery
 Work on or near machinery in motion
 Employment of young persons on dangerous machines
ARCHITECTURE
 Prohibition of employment of women and children near cotton openers

 Excessive weights
 Protection of eyes
 Precautions against dangerous fumes, gases, etc
 Precautions regarding the use of portable electric light
 Explosive or inflammable dust, gas, etc
 Precautions in case of fire
 Power to require specifications of defective parts or test of stability
 Safety of buildings and machinery
 Maintenance of buildings
Welfare
 Washing facilities
 Facilities for storing and drying of wet clothing
 Facilities for sitting
 First aid appliances
 Canteens
 Shelters, rest rooms and lunch rooms
 Crèches
Annual leave with wages
Every worker who has worked for a period of 240 days or more in a factory during a calendar
year shall be allowed during the subsequent calendar year leave with wages for a number of
days calculated at the rate of:
 If an adult, one day for every twenty days of work performed by him during the
previous calendar year;
 If a child, one day for every fifteen days of work performed by him during the
previous calendar year.
If a worker is discharged or dismissed from service or quits his employment or dies while in
service, during the course of the calendar year, he or his heir or nominee, shall be entitled to
wages in lieu of the quantum of leave to which he was entitled immediately before his
discharge, dismissal, quitting of employment or death.
Payment in advance in certain cases - A worker who has been allowed leave for not less
than four days in the case of adult, and five days in the case of a child shall before his leave
begins, be paid the wages due for the period of the leave allowed.
Mode of recovery of unpaid wages - Any sum required to be paid by an employer under this
Chapter but not paid by him shall be recoverable as delayed wages under the provisions of
the Payment of Wages Act.
ARCHITECTURE
Penalties and procedure

In respect of any factory there is any contravention of any of the provisions of this Act or of
any rule made thereunder, the occupier and manager of the factory shall each be guilty of an
offence and punishable with imprisonment for a term which may extend to two years or with
fine which may extend to one lakh rupees or with both and if the contravention is continued
after conviction, with a further fine which may extend to one thousand rupees for each day on
which the contravention is so continued.
Enhanced penalty after previous conviction - If any person who has been convicted of any
offence punishable is again guilty of an offence involving a contravention of the same
provisions he shall be punishable on a subsequent conviction with imprisonment for a term
which may extend to three years or with fine which shall not be less than ten thousand rupees
but which may extend to two lakh rupees or with both.
Offences by workers – If any worker employed in a factory contravenes any provision of this
Act or any rules or orders made thereunder, imposing any duty or liability on workers he
shall be punishable with fine which may extend to five hundred rupees.
Penalty for using false certificates of fitness.- Whoever knowingly uses or attempts to use, as
a certificate of fitness granted to himself, a certificate granted to another person under that
section, or who having procured such a certificate, knowingly allows it to be used, or an
attempt to use it to be made, by another person, shall be punishable with imprisonment for a
term which may extend to two months or with fine which may extend to one thousand rupees
or with both.
PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES ACT
This Act may be called the Persons with Disabilities (Equal Opportunities, Protection of
Rights and Full Participation) Act, 1995. It extends to the whole of India except the State of
Jammu and Kashmir. It shall come into force on such date as the Central Government may,
by notification, appoint.
In this Act, unless the context otherwise requires,
(a) “appropriateGovernment” means:

 in relation to the Central Government or any establishment wholly or substantially
financed by that Government, or a Cantonment Board constituted under the
Cantonment Act, 1924, the Central Government;
 in relation to a State Government or any establishment wholly or substantially
financed by that Government, or any local authority, other than a Cantonment Board,
the State Government;
 in respect of the Central Coordination Committee and the Central Executive
Committee, the Central Government;
 in respect of the State Coordination Committee and the State Executive Committee,
the State Government;
ARCHITECTURE
(b) “Blindness” refers to a condition where a person suffers from any of the following
conditions, namely:
 total absence of sight; or
 visual acuity not exceeding 6/60 or 20/200 (snellen) in the better eye with correcting
lenses; or
 limitation of the field of vision subtending an angle of 20 degree or worse;
(c) “Central Coordination Committee” means the Central Coordination Committee
constituted under sub-section (1) of section 3;
(d) “Central Executive Committee” means the Central Executive Committee constituted
under sub-section (1) of section 9;
(e) “cerebral palsy” means a group of non-progressive conditions of a person
characterised by abnormal motor control posture resulting from brain insult or injuries
occurring in the pre-natal, peri-natal or infant period of development;
(f) “Chief Commissioner” means the Chief Commissioner appointed under sub-section
(1) of section 57;
(g) “Commissioner” means the Commissioner appointed under sub-section (1) of section
60;
(h) “competent authority” means the authority appointed under section 50;
(i) “disability” means:
 blindness;
 low vision;
 leprosy-cured;
 hearing impairment;
 loco-motor disability;
 mental retardation;
 mental illness;
(j) “employer” means:
 in relation to a Government, the authority notified by the Head of the Department in
this behalf or where no such authority is notified, the Head of the Department; and
 in relation to an establishment, the chief executive officer of that establishment;
(k) “Establishment” means a corporation established by or under a Central, Provincial or

State Act, or an authority or a body owned or controlled or aided by the Government or a
local authority or a Government company as defined in Section 617 of the Companies Act,
1956 and includes Departments of a Government;
 “hearing impairment, means loss of sixty decibels or more in the better year in the
conversational range of frequencies;
(m) Institution for persons with disabilities” means an institution for the reception, care,
protection, education, training, rehabilitation or any other service of persons with disabilities;
(n) “Leprosy cured person” means any person who has been cured of leprosy but is suffering
from:
ARCHITECTURE
 loss of sensation in hands or feet as well as loss of sensation and paresis in the eye and
eye-lid but with no manifest deformity;
 manifest deformity and paresis but having sufficient mobility in their hands and feet
to enable them to engage in normal economic activity;
 extreme physical deformity as well as advanced age which prevents him from
undertaking any gainful occupation, and the expression “leprosy cured” shall be
construed accordingly;
(o) “Loco-motor disability” means disability of the bones, joints or muscles leading to
substantial restriction of the movement of the limbs or any form of cerebral palsy;
(p) “Medical authority” means any hospital or institution specified for the purposes of this
Act by notification by the appropriate Government;
(q) “Mental illness” means any mental disorder other than mental retardation;
(r) “Mental retardation” means a condition of arrested or incomplete development of mind of

a person which is specially characterised by sub normality of intelligence;
(s) “Notification” means a notification published in the Official Gazette;
(t) “Person with disability” means a person suffering from not less than forty per cent of any
disability as certified by a medical authority;
(u) “person with low vision” means a person with impairment of visual functioning even after
treatment or standard refractive correction but who uses or is potentially capable of using
Vision for the planning or execution of a task with appropriate assistive device;
(v) “prescribed” means prescribed by rules made under this Act;
(w) “rehabilitation” refers to a process aimed at enabling persons with disabilities to reach
and maintain their optimal physical, sensory, intellectual, psychiatric or social functional
levels;
(x) “Special Employment Exchange” means any office or place established and maintained
by the Government for the collection and furnishing of information, either by keeping of
registers or otherwise, respecting:
 persons who seek to engage employees from amongst the persons suffering from
disabilities;
 persons with disability who seek employment;
 vacancies to which person with disability seeking employment may be appointed;
(y) “State Coordination Committee” means the State Coordination Committee constituted
under sub-section (1) of section 13;
(z) “State Executive Committee” means the State Executive Committee constituted under
sub-section (1) of section 19.
ARCHITECTURE
BARRIER FREE ENVIRONMENT
Refer given additional notes
Costal regulation zone
Heritage act
Preparedness for international practice & entry of foreign architects in India
Architectural journalism and photography
GLOBALISATION AND ITS IMPACT ON ARCHITECTURAL PROFESSION
Refer article: GLOBALISATION AND ARCHITECTURE by ROBERT ADAM +

IMPACT OF GLOBALISATION ON INDIAN ARCHITCTURE by VSDP (attached along
with these notes)
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY AND ITS IMPACT ON ARCHITECTURAL

PRACTICE
Refer article: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY AND ARCHITECTURAL PRACTICE:

KNOWLEDGE MODELLING APPROACH AND BIM by Ajla Aksamija & Mir M. Ali
(attached along with these notes)
EMERGING SPECIALISATIONS IN THE FIELD OF ARCHITECTURE
Architect as Construction / Project Manager
Introduction
Job definitions have broadened in the last few years with many titles defining overlapping
responsibilities. Construction managers oversee the day-to-day operations involved when
constructing facilities, buildings, road systems or homes. Project managers usually oversee
business systems and processes, but can also oversee a construction project from inception to
completion.
Construction Manager
A construction manager is involved in personnel management at the construction site. He

ensures that materials are delivered on time and that tools are available on the work site. He
also administers the construction budget. He will request work order changes and make
ARCHITECTURE
decisions as to building practices in compliance with building codes. He could also be

responsible for meeting with consultants, clients, engineers and inspectors.
Project Manager
The title of project manager has taken on broader dimensions since 2000. Project managers
oversee all elements of a project, which could include manufacturing, construction and
marketing. In a large corporation, for example, a company might have a multiphase
construction project. The project manager would oversee the administrative needs of the
project, including budgeting and funding, but would have an on-site construction manager
involved in the day-to-day personnel and site supervision. The project manager becomes the
"face" of the project.
FIGURE 5.1 – PROJECT MANAGER & CONSTRUCTION MANAGER SCHEDULE
A project management firm deals in all aspects of the project development process from the
initial assessment/conception phase, until the final move in, and beyond. A construction
manager, on the other hand, is concerned solely with the construction aspect of the project.
Without interfering on any particular professional’s responsibilities, a true third party project
manager leads and helps to integrate all vendors, elements and phases of a project from
start to finish. Designers, contractors and real estate brokers are very capable within their
specialties, but can fall short if entrusted with an independent project management firm’s
responsibilities—and so can a construction manager.
A project manager will act as your advocate and representative throughout the project so
that all of the goals from beginning to end are met. During the project’s life cycle [or]
duration, a project manager will become the owner’s trusted advisor, go-to person and single
point of contact for project performance and procedure. A project manager oversees
procurement of specialty consultants such as Audio Visual, Food Service, Security, and IT,
with direction from the client. The project manager will then act as liaison between the client
and all vendors, designers, engineers and contractors to ensure smooth, constant
communication across the various parties, so everyone stays on the same page for the full
duration.
ARCHITECTURE
In simple terms, the project manager will make sure all activities are aligned with the client’s
overall goals and objectives for the project. This means that the project manager will plan,
manage, oversee and fine-tune all of the details of the project, not just its construction
phase—and will even help to select and ultimately manage the construction manager.
A project manager will assist in the hiring of a general contractor and/or construction
manager and will oversee their quality of work through site visits, punch-list walkthroughs,
and reports at weekly project meetings. A project manager will also track and review the
construction managers change orders, make sure all vendors are coordinated to and with the
CM’s schedule and challenge the CM on lead times for products and delays.
*It is important to note that there is a difference between a general contractor and a
construction manager.
A typical construction manager has a scope of work that is limited to the pre-
construction/construction phase. A construction manager will supervise all construction
aspects of a project and will typically participate in pre-construction meetings, provide onsite
supervision during construction, and manage sub-contractors. They may also directly hold
subcontractor contracts, and is therefore liable for all of the subcontractors’ work.
A project manager will plan, manage, oversee and fine-tune all of the details of the
project, not just its construction phase
Construction Management:
A project delivery system that uses a construction manager to facilitate the design and
construction of a project by organizing and directing men, materials, and equipment to
accomplish the purpose of the designer. A professional service that applies effective
management techniques to the planning, design, and construction of a project from inception
to completion for the purpose of controlling time, cost and quality.
Project management:
The application of knowledge, skills, tools, and techniques to project activities to meet the
project requirements.
Construction manager
The functions of construction management typically include the following:
1. Specifying project objectives and plans including delineation of scope, budgeting,

scheduling, setting performance requirements, and selecting project participants.
2. Maximizing resource efficiency through procurement of labour, materials and
equipment.
ARCHITECTURE
3. Implementing various operations through proper coordination and control of planning,

design, estimating, contracting and construction in the entire process.
4. Developing effective communications and mechanisms for resolving conflicts.
Roles and Responsibilities of Construction Manager:
 Schedule the project in logical steps and budget time required to meet deadlines.
 Determine labour requirements and dispatch workers to construction sites.
 Inspect and review projects to monitor compliance with building and safety codes,
and other regulations.
 Interpret and explain plans and contract terms to administrative staff, workers, and
clients, representing the owner or developer.
 Prepare contracts and negotiate revisions, changes and additions to contractual
agreements with architects, consultants, clients, suppliers and subcontractors.
 Obtain all necessary permits and licenses.
 Direct and supervise workers.
 Study job specifications to determine appropriate construction methods.
 Select, contract, and oversee workers who complete specific pieces of the project,
such as painting or plumbing.
 Requisition supplies and materials to complete construction projects.
 Prepare and submit budget estimates and progress and cost tracking reports.
 Develop and implement quality control programs.
 Take actions to deal with the results of delays, bad weather, or emergencies at
construction site.
 Confer with supervisory personnel, owners, contractors, and design professionals to
discuss and resolve matters such as work procedures, complaints, and construction
problems.
 Plan, organize, and direct activities concerned with the construction and maintenance
of structures, facilities, and systems.
 Investigate damage, accidents, or delays at construction sites, to ensure that proper
procedures are being carried out.
 Evaluate construction methods and determine cost-effectiveness of plans, using
computers.
 Direct acquisition of land for construction projects.
Project Management
ARCHITECTURE
Various Stages of Project
FIGURE 5.2 – STAGES IN PROJECT DEVELOPEMNT
Why do companies use PM?
 To handle projects effectively in an organization.

 To define the project and agree with the customer.
 To plan and assess resource needs for the project.
 To estimate project cost and make proposals.
 To plan and schedule activities in a project.
 To allocate the right resource at the right time.
 To assess risk and failure points and make backup plans.
 To lead a project team effectively and communicate well.
Why do people learn PM?
 To explore the latest concepts and techniques of project management.

 To increase value/contribution to the organisation.
 To prove yourself skilful in managing projects.
 To learn a new thought process that helps organized thinking and structured approach.
 To acquire a professional degree/recognition and increase job prospects.
 Endless possibilities and benefits.
Project Management Plan:
“Tells how work will be done”
ARCHITECTURE
The key to a successful project is on the planning. All the detailed planning work for different
aspects of the project is integrated into one single plan known as the Project Management
Plan.
FIGURE 5.4 – PM PLAN
FIGURE 5.3 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT FLOW
The PM Plan establishes the project:
ARCHITECTURE
Project Management Process
Enter Phase / Start

Project
Monitoring &
Controlling
Processes
Exit Phase/ End

Project
FIGURE 5.5 – PM PROCESS
Monitoring & Controlling Processes
Initiating Processes Planning Processes Closing Processes

Monitoring &
Monitoring &
Monitoring &
Controlling Processes
+ Executing
Processes
FIGURE 5.6 – MONITORING & CONTROLLING PROCESSES
ARCHITECTURE
Project Management Stages
PLANNING
SCHEDULING
CONTROLLING
CLOSING
FIGURE 5.7 – PM STAGES
Planning Phase
This is the most important phase of the project management.
Planning is an art and science of converting a set of objectives to realization through a series
of steps executed in an organized and predicted way so that there will be less requirement of
changes in the plan later on. Like the old saying ‘plan the work. Work the plan.’
Scheduling Phase
This is the process of formalizing the planned activities, assigning the durations, resources
and sequence of occurrence in consultation with the team members.
Planning and scheduling phases are under taken before the actual project starts.
Controlling Phase
This phase is undertaken during the actual project implementation.
Project controlling is mechanism established to determine deviations from the project base
schedule, to re-plan and reschedule during implementation to compensate the deviations on
the basis of commissioning minima, flow of resources like finance, man power, and
equipment and application techniques.
ARCHITECTURE
Closing Phase
Closing phase is the last phase of the project which brings close out of the complete project.
Whatever the project requirements are pre-defined, during this phase the total delivery is
made and it is accepted by the customer.
Maximum conflicts can arise in the project during this phase between those who have worked
to deliver the outcome (contractor) and those who are accepting the results of the work
(customer).
PM Knowledge Areas
CHANGE
INTEGRATION
DOCUMENT
PROCUREMENT SCOPE
RISK TIMES
COMMUNICATION COST
HUMAN
RESOURCE QUALITY
FIGURE 5.8 – PM KNOWLEDGE AREAS
Suitability of architect as construction / project manager:
Architectural project managers typically are involved in most, if not all, aspects of
construction projects. These professionals consider many factors as they help architectural
projects involving commercial, industrial or residential buildings reach completion. Most
architectural project managers spend a significant portion of their time consulting with clients
in an office setting. However, they also visit construction sites, where they interact with
engineers, contractors and construction personnel.
ARCHITECTURE
Architectural Project Manager Duties
From site preparation to building completion, architectural project managers oversee

elements of the design and construction processes. Part of this preparation includes
developing, organizing and reviewing building plans, as well as preparing construction
contracts for general contractors. Architectural project managers also can take part in
interviewing and hiring contractors for proposed projects. As they consult with clients, these
professionals generally include a cost estimate based on equipment, materials and labour
requirements.
Architectural project managers must ensure that construction projects meet environmental,
safety, structural, zoning and aesthetic standards. They determine and schedule different
stages of the building process according to client needs. During construction site visits, they
monitor progress and ascertain whether phases of the construction process are in compliance
with building plans and project deadlines. After building completion, project managers may
provide additional services for expansion and relocation projects.
Session – II
Development Regulation provisions for Heritage Conservation in Chennai

Metropolitan Area
Tmt.S.Chithra
Senior Planner, and Member-Convener,Heritage Conservation Committee, Chennai.
Tmt. V.Sharmilee, Assistant Planner, CMDA
 Heritage Conservation has gained more importance after the UN Convention on

protection of World Cultural and Heritage held in Paris in 1972
 UNESCO is declaring world heritage monuments of international importance.
 At National level, the GoI’s Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Sites and Remains
Act 1958 provides for listing of heritage monuments for preservation.
 At State level, the Tamil Nadu Ancient and Historical Monuments Archaeological Sites
and Remains Act, 1966 provides for listing of heritage monuments for preservation
 At Local level, i.e., City/Town level, Town Planning Legislations include provisions of
listing of heritage buildings for conservation.
 When at International, National and State levels, the regulations address preservation of
more than 100 years old monuments, the town planning regulations at city level address
the conservation of heritage buildings not covered by the above regulations.
155
History of Conservation efforts in CMA
 Govt. of Tamil Nadu initiated action in 1997 to conserve heritage buildings.
 A committee headed by DTCP was constituted by GoTN in 1998 (G.O.Ms.No.179 H
&UD dated 25.05.98 to look into the aspects related to enactment of Heritage Act).
 The Committee had drafted Draft Tamil Nadu Heritage Conservation Act, 1999 and
submitted it to GoTN.
 Subsequently the Government in G.O. Ms. No.290, dated 17.09.2007 constituted an Inter
Disciplinary Expert Committee (IEDC) headed by Vice-Chairman, Tamil Nadu State
Planning Commission to look into all aspects of conservation of heritage buildings
including the need for enacting the law.
 The IDEC met on 20.11.2007 and recommended for constitution of many sub-
committees on
o Heritage Buildings
o Religious faiths
o Cultural aspects and
o Legal issues.
 DTCP being the Member-Secretary of the Committee requested for constitution of the
sub-committees; G.O. is awaited.
 CMDA was asked separately to draft the regulations under DCR to conserve heritage
buildings /precincts in CMA.
 CMDA had constituted HCC in 1999.
 The HCC prepared the draft Rules and a draft list of heritage buildings in Chennai City
(mostly covering the southern part of the Chennai City )
 CMDA forwarded the draft rules and the draft list (186 buildings/Precincts) to GoTN.
 Observing that views of all the concerned in the matter were to be obtained and CMDA
may re-examine the issues on heritage along with the Second Master Plan, the GoTN
returned the DCR in 2003.
 CMDA re-examined the matter taking into account of the draft rules circulated by the
GoI, the rules in force at Mumbai and Hydrabad, and the local requirements, and drafted
the regulations and proposed it as part of the D.R. in the SMP.
 SMP was approved by the Government on 02.09.2008 and the special rules for
conservation of heritage buildings/precincts forming part of it have come in to force since
then.
 With the recommendations of the Authority the Government constituted the HCC under
DR in G.O.Ms.No.85 H&UD, dated 01.04.2010
Composition
 The HCC comprises of members from P.W.D., A.S.I., State Archaeological Dept.,
Madras University, Anna University, NGO, INTACH and CMDA.
156
Terms of Reference
 To advise on the preparation of draft list of Heritage Buildings/ Precincts.
 Advise the Member Secretary, CMDA on the individual applications for permissions for
the developments referred to in sub Regulation No. (2) – Annexure XXV of the
Development Regulation.
 To advise the M.S. on the matters relating to alterations, modifications, or relaxation of
provisions or other regulations contained in the DR where necessary.
 To advise the M.S., CMDA on the matters relating to grant of TDR.
 Tenure of the non-official members in the committee shall be 3 years and they can be
reappointed for only one term.
 HCC met three times after its constitution in April, 2010.
 The criteria for listing the heritage buildings/ precincts in CMA finalized.
 The process of assessment/documentation of heritage buildings has been initiated.
 Students and faculty members of 10 Colleges/ Universities in and around Chennai will be
involved in the identification, assessment, documentation and listing of heritage buildings
/ precincts in CMA.
 It is proposed to complete the task within a time frame of 6 months.
 The documentation done by the students will be scrutinized by an Expert Committee to be
constituted and will be further discussed and draft list will be prepared by the H.C.C.
The criteria decided for listing of heritage buildings / precincts:

I - Historical
(a) Date / Period of construction:
This criteria may ensure that the building / precincts age is give due consideration in
determining historic significance
(b) Trends exhibited by the building:
The building or a precinct may reflect a particular social, economic, political or cultural
pattern, characteristic of the local settlement area.
(c ) Events associated with:
A building or structure may be directly linked to an event of local, regional, or national
significance or a noteworthy historical event.
(d) Persons associated with:
Building or precincts may be linked to a notable person, group, and institution and has
historical significance.
157
II – Architectural
(a) Design
The building may be significant because of its excellence artistic merits, or uniqueness of
its design, compositions, craftsmanship or details. It includes decoration, colour, texture,
massing notable proportion.
(b) Style
The building may exhibit features of a particular architecture style, period of construction
(style compared to others of its particular architecture style)
(c) Designer/Builder
The building might have been designed by an Architect / Engineer or other design
professional or constructed by a builder whose work is local, regional or national
importance.
(d) Physical conditions
The condition of the structure may be superior or it may require minor structural repair, or
extensive repair, or it may be in a dilapidated condition.
(e ) Design Integrity
In a heritage building if alterations had already been carried out, then its repairable nature
and worthiness to conserve.
III - Cultural
(a) Community context
For sentimental/symbolic reasons, the building/ precincts might have become significant
part of community identity.
Screening of heritage buildings

 Inventory making and evaluation with proper documentation (including photographs and
reports) are very big tasks to be attended to, when considering the no. of such buildings /
precincts in this metropolis.
 Heritage buildings or precincts will be screened first with reconnaissance survey;
 The eligible ones will be further evaluated, and then the overall scoring and rating with
rank in the metropolitan area will be arrived at.
 Based on this overall rating, it may be categorised as Grade I, II or III
The sequence of actions involved in the process is -

(i) Finalisation of the evaluation criteria ( done )
(ii) Notification in the newspapers (informing about the criteria also), inviting
suggestions from the public proposing the buildings / precincts within CMA to be
158
included in the list of heritage buildings / precincts to be conserved as per the DR (
done )
(iii) Involving the interested voluntary groups, NGOs, students of architecture through their
institutions, and other interested and competent groups, taking inventory of the
buildings, collecting details and documentation for consideration by the HCC (being
done)
(iv) Arriving at the initial draft list, and notifying it for public consultation as per the DR;
(v) Addressing the owners of the draft listed buildings / precincts giving an opportunity to
represent regarding the proposed inclusion of their building in the list,
(vi) Conducting public consultation meetings at select locations within CMA.
(vii) Conducting a workshop / seminar on the subject with the experts and interested groups
(viii) Scrutinise the objections / suggestions received, re-examine the list, place it before the
HCC and the Authority and forward it to the Government for the final approval and
notification in the Gazette
Major provisions relating to heritage conservation in the Development Regulations
 No development or redevelopment or additions, alterations, repairs, renovation of listed

heritage buildings / precincts shall be carried out without the prior written permission of
the MS, CMDA.
 The MS, CMDA shall act in consultation with HCC
159
 In relation to religious buildings in the said list changes, repairs, additions, alterations and
renovations required on religious grounds mentioned in sacred texts, or as a part of holy
practices laid down in religious codes shall be treated as permissible, subject to their being
in accordance and consonance with the original structure and architecture, designs,
aesthetics and other special feature thereof.
Grading of listed buildings/precincts.

 The heritage buildings/precincts in CMA will be graded as Grade - I, II or III
Grade-I
 Heritage buildings/precincts of national or historical importance, embodying excellence in
architectural style and design.
 They are the prime landmarks of the city.
 No intervention should be permitted either on the exterior or interior unless it is necessary.
 If it is absolutely essential, minimal changes would be allowed which must be in
accordance with the original
Grade-II
 Comprises of heritage buildings/precincts of regional or local importance possessing
special architectural or aesthetical merit, cultural or historical value .
 Internal changes and adaptive reuse will be generally allowed. But external changes will
be subject to scrutiny.
 The extension or additional buildings in the same plot is allowed provided that they are in
harmony with existing heritage buildings / precincts, especially in terms of height and
façade
Grade-III
 Comprises of important for town spaces. They evoke architectural, aesthetic or
sociological interest, though not as much as in heritage grade-II
 External and internal changes and adaptive reuse would be generally allowed
TDR
 If any application for development on a private land other than Government or quasi
government or agency or a religious institution or trust or a society or charitable
institutions, etc. is refused under this regulation, the private owner shall be compensated
by grant of Development Rights Certificate
160
Repair Fund
 The listed heritage buildings shall be repaired by the owners of the said buildings
themselves
 Monetary help will be given for such repairs to a limited extent in deserving cases ,where
the owner could not repair it. A separate fund will be created which would be kept at the
disposal of M.S, CMDA for disbursement in consultation with H.C.C.
Conclusion:
 Recently the GoI has amended the Central Act providing for preservation of monuments.
 According to the Act, within 100 m. around the notified ASI monuments, no development
is permissible.
 Further 200 m area around it, developments are restricted and any proposal is to be cleared
by ASI Committee.
 ASI may come up with Heritage-monument-specific / site-specific regulation instead of
prohibiting any development in the area within 100 m. radius and restricting developments
within 200 m wide belt around it.
 In Metropolitan areas, it is may be neither warranted, nor feasible for compliance.
 For e.g. in Chennai, the Tomb of David Yale , a small structure within High court premises
and a short mud wall viz. old town wall at Tondiarpet have been notified as Archaeological
Monuments. They are in the midst of heavily built up area and lies in the CBD of Chennai.
Will the prohibition work ? Is it required ? The ASI may examine.
 For the Heritage Conservation legislations or rules to be effective, the regulations shall be
simple to follow and the authorities who deal with applications for development in and
around should dispose off them within a stipulated time. The process shall also be
transparent.
 Due consideration for conservation of heritage buildings/precincts shall be given by all the
authorities concerned including urban planning authorities, PWD, Government
departments/ agencies who own heritage buildings, religious and charitable institutions,
industries, corporate firms and private.
 Notification of statutory list is not an end in itself. It is to be followed by a conservation
plan for these buildings/precincts, to be prepared in phases and recommended to the
owners of the buildings
 Financing for the implementation of the conservation plan to be explored. Sources may be
GoI’s JnNURM , Finance Commission grants, State Government grants and CMDA’s
Repair Fund.
161
*****
162
What is a Barrier-Free Environment ?
 A space that allows for free and safe movement, function and access for all, regardless of age,
sex or condition.
 A set of services that can be accessed by all, without obstacles, with dignity and with as much
independence as possible.
 The environment means buildings, roads, parks, gardens and other places, services, modes of
transportation, products of daily use, etc.
 It must be clearly understood that barrier–free goes far beyond just a ramp and has many other
necessary aspects. These range from door and passage widths to flooring surfaces, from counter
heights to door handles and railings, from signage and auditory signals to tactile guides.
Understanding
We are all physically disabled at some time in our lives. A child, a person with a broken
leg, an elderly person, etc. are all disabled in one way or another. As far as the built-up
environment is concerned, it is important that it should be barrier-free and adapted to fulfil the
needs of all people equally.
o As a child what we fantasised the most ?

To see above our height, i.e. we wanted to break our barrier and for this we were
dependent on our guardians. We didn’t need to tell them , they already knew to pick us up and
help us look beyond the barrier.
Just like that we too need to take care of persons who are differently abled. They don’t
need to tell us to help them. They don’t need to.
ACT
After the enactment of “The Person with Disabilities Act (Equal Opportunities, Protection of
Rights and Full participation), 1995 by Govt. of India.” There is a provision of Act under “Non
discriminate in the built environment” Chapter VIII Section 46.
The Act stipulates that the Governments, local authorities ensure provisions of
barrier-free facilities in all new Government buildings and public utilities, roads and transport.
We, as committed and concerned professionals, should take up this responsibility of

addressing these issues and demonstrate through our work the benefits of a barrier-free
environment.
WHY IS IT NECESSARY TO REMOVE
WHO ALL FACE BARRIERS? BARRIERS?
 Wheelchair users o Barriers make an environment unsafe and

cause a high level of difficulty to the user.
 People with limited walking/ movement
abilities o But more importantly, barriers cause spaces to
be out of reach, denying people the
 People with visual impairment or low vision opportunity of participation in various spheres
 People with hearing impairment of life.
 Elderly and infirm persons o This loss of opportunity is not only a loss for
the person concerned but also society’s loss
 Pregnant ladies which misses out on their contribution.
 Children
 People with temporary disabilities
Provisions
• Signage should be placed at nodal positions, openly and
Height
prominently.
• Should be simple in syntax and must be well lit in
ambient lowlight conditions.
• If the signage is floor based and free standing, then there
should be a detectable barrier at the floor level for the Distance
white stick users.
• In the case of multiple access points, each access point
should indicate the shortest route to the accessible entry.
• Letters and numbers on signs shall have a width-to-
height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1 and a stroke-width-to-
height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10.
• Characters and symbols shall contrast with their
background
Mounting height for Signages
Signages
Parking
 At the entrance of public parking
facilities, signage should be
displayed in prominent positions to
indicate the designated numbers of
the parking spaces reserved for
persons with a disability.
 The parking space shall be clearly
marked with the international
symbol of accessibility and the
parking space number on the floor.
Approachability
Provisions
Approachability
VEHICLES MUST PARK IN ALTERNATE DIRECTION IN
ORDER TO UTILIZE HATCHED AREA
Approachability
Kerbs
Approachability
Ramps
 Any part of an accessible route with a slope greater than 1:20 shall be considered a ramp.
 The least possible slope shall be used for any ramp. The maximum slope of a ramp in a new
construction shall be 1:12.
 Ramps shall have level landings at bottom and top of each ramp and each ramp run, and at
every 10 m of run.
 The minimum clear width of a ramp shall be 900 mm.
 The landing shall be at least as wide as the ramp run leading to it.
 The landing length shall be a minimum of 1500 mm clear.
If ramps change direction at landings, the minimum landing size shall be 1500 mm x 1500
mm.
Approachability
Provisions .
Approachability
Approachability
Entrance
o There should be no difference in level around an approach to a park and/or park roads. If
a level difference is unavoidable, a ramp or a staircase plus a ramp is needed.
o A level landing should be provided before and after the change in level.
o Bollards should be provided with adequate spacing for the wheel chair bound persons i.e.
900mm min.
o An information board with information about the facility should be provided for persons
with impaired hearing.
Reality
S.K. Puri Park: Patna S.K. Puri Park: Patna

Approachability
Service Counters
 Should be designed for parallel approach with
a height of 800 mm from the finished floor
level.
 Must be 1200 mm wide and 500 mm deep.
 It should have a knee space at least 750 mm
high, 900 mm wide and 450 mm deep.
 It should have a minimum of 1200 mm x 900
mm space in front of the counter for
manoeuvring.
Reality
• The counter is located at a high point
where only abled people can access.
• Even children have trouble asking for
tickets.
• The person sitting behind the counter is also
not visible clearly.
• Wheel chair bound person will not be able
to buy ticket, due to the unreachable height.
Accessibility
S.K. Puri Park: Patna
Telephone
 A clear floor or ground space at least 750 mm x
1200 mm that allows either a forward or parallel
approach by a person using a wheelchair shall
be provided at telephones.
 The cord from the telephone to the handset
shall be at least 750 mm long.
 Volume controls, capable of a minimum of 12
dB and a maximum of 18 dB above normal, shall
be provided. If an automatic reset is provided
then 18 dB may be exceeded.
Accessibility
Access Path /Walk Wa
o Access path from plot entry and surface parking to
building entrance shall be minimum of 1800 mm wide
having even surface without any step.
o Slope, if any shall not have gradient greater than 5%.
o Selection of floor material shall be made suitably to
attract or to guide visually impaired persons.
o Finishes shall have a nonslip surface with texture
traversable by a wheel chair.
o Curbs wherever provided should blend to common
level.
Accessibility
Accessibility
Accessibility
Reality
Accessibility
Benche
In Parks 20% of sitting benches should be
provided for various types of disabled like
old citizens, meeting the criteria.
Accessibility
Reality
Accessibility
Tables
• The table’s one side should
be extended so as to fit the
wheelchair inside it.
• The width should be 760
mm min.
Accessibility
Gratings
 If gratings are located in walking surfaces,
then they shall have spaces no greater than
12 mm wide in one direction.
 If gratings have elongated openings, then

they shall be placed so that the long
dimension is perpendicular to the
dominant direction of travel.
Accessibility
Tactile
o Immediately in front of a location where there
is a vehicular traffic.
o Immediately in front of an entrance/exit to and
from a staircase or multilevel crossing facility.
o In a park, on the walk way so that they can
follow the tactile and move from one place to
other.
o At a junction of pathways, a signboard should
also be provided, so that they could know which
direction has what.
Accessibility
Accessibility
View of a community space
having guiding blocks installed.
Accessibility
Lighting
Accessibility
Reality
• The light provided here is not
glare and is also not sufficient
enough to light this area of
the park.
• The height of the light post is
2.7 m.
Accessibility
Swimming Poo
Recreational
Side Elevation of ramp and
stairs
Recreational
Fishing
Recreational
Basket Ball
o For wheelchair people, the height of
the hoops can be adjusted.
o Later on this can be used as a normal
basketball court also by adjusting the
height again.
o It is heighted at 2.7m from ground
level.
Recreational
Play Equipment
• Height of the platform is 310mm.
Recreational
Cantilevered Platforms
• The min diameter for this type of
platform is 1500mm so that
wheelchair is able to circulate in it.
• Hand rails are provided in
accordance with the provisions.
Accessibility
Reality
Eco Park: Patna

Expectation
Accessibility
Light and sound
o In a park a good practice is to ensure that
every one who visits has something to
remember about that park later on.
o So, a great way to ensure that is to provide

light and sound show in the park.
Buddha Smriti Park: Patna
Recreational
Water Fountains (Drinking)
o Allow sufficient space around the water
fountain to make it easily accessible for wheel
chair users.
o Depending on the type of water fountain allow
a space about 750 mm high and 400 mm deep
under the fountain.
Accessibility
Reality
Eco Park: Patna S.K. Puri Park: Patna
Accessibility
Dustbins
Accessibility
Toilet Cubicle
 Entrance should be in accordance of the
barrier free.
 These must be equipped with the western
water closet as opposed to the Indian-style
pan.
 Internal dimensions must not be less than
1500 mm x 1500 mm, with a clear space not
less than 900 mm wide next to the water
closet.
Accessibility
Reality
• The entry in this case is not barrier free.

• A wheelchair bound person will have
difficulties in accessing the toilet cubical.
Accessibility
W
o It must be equipped with grab-bars.
o Tap/ toilet roll dispenser mounted below it at not
more than 300 mm from the front edge of the seat.
o It should be at a height between 50 mm and 250
mm from the top of the water closet seat.
o The top edge of the toilet seat should be 500 mm
from the finished floor level.
Accessibility
Urinals
They should be of the wall hung type with the rim not
more than 430 mm from the floor.
Clear floor space of 750 mm width x 1200 mm depth
without steps in front of it.
There should be vertical grab-bars on either side
extending from 900 mm to 1500 mm above finished floor
level and with a minimum of 120 mm between the bar and
the wall.
The flush, if manually operated, should be located
between 900 mm and 1200 mm from the finished floor
level.
Accessibility
Congress Avenue Park, U.S.A.
The Tennis Centre and Barrier Free Park were built
by the city of Boynton Beach.
Between the Tennis Centre and the lake is the new
barrier free (accessible) playground and park.
There are three play areas for people with
differing abilities, a picnic pavilion, restroom,
picnic areas, a water play splash pad, trails, public
art, and native landscaping.
There are beautiful meandering walkways
throughout the park connecting several play
areas, a picnic pavilion and a large open field. Location :- 3111 S. congress Avenue Boynton Beach, FL 33436, U.S.A
Website :- (http://www.boyntonbeach.org/departments/parks/index.php)
Play Area
 Two shade sails have been installed over the
spider web climbing structure and the Sway Fun
boat ride for fun all day long!
 The Swamp splash pad is just across the bridge

in the centre of the park with spraying cattails, a
frog mister and large alligator heads that peer
out of the ground and squirt water.
Fit Zone
 It is be comprised of machines for people of
varying abilities to exercise.
 Fitness Zones® are easy to use, accessible
outdoor gyms designed to promote general
health within a park experience, creating a
supportive social context for getting fit.
 Fitness Zones® require no electricity and
employ their user’s body weight to engage
different muscle groups.
 The Fitness Zone® at Barrier Free Park will
include 17 pieces of exercise equipment, five of
which are wheelchair accessible
Other Examples Are:
o High Line Park (New York City, U.S.A.)
o Eifel National Park (North Rhine, Westphalia, Germany)
o KLCC Park (Suria KLCC, Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia)
COASTAL REGULATION
ZONE
INDRODUCTION
• THE GOVT OF INDIA EARLIER ISSUED INSTRUCTIONS TO ALL STATE

GOVERNMENTS TO PROHIBIT DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES WITHIN 500M
COASTAL STRECHES OF HIGH TIDE LINE.
• THIS HAS BEEN DONE AFTER CONSIDERING THE NEED FOR
PROTECTING COASTAL AREAS AND BEACHES FROM ENVIRONMENTAL
DEGRADATION.
• PROHIBITION OF DEVELOPMENT ACTIVITIES OF ANY KIND HAS CAUSED
CONSIDERABLE PROBLEMS TO STATE GOVERNMENT AS THERE ARE
EXISTING DEVELOPED AREA WITHIN THE STRECH OF 500M.
• KEEPING THIS IN VIEW AND ENSURING THAT THE USE AND ACTIVITIES
IN COASTAL AREAS ARE CONSISTENT WITH PRINCIPLES AND
REQUIREMETS OF ENVIRONMENT CONSERVATION,THE GOVERNMENT
OF INDIA HAS PROPOSED COASTAL REGULATION ZONE AND TO IMPOSE
RESTRICTIONS ON DEVELOPMENTAL ACTIVITIES
• THESE REGULATIONS AMONG OTHER THINGS PERMIT DEVELOPMENTS
IN THE AREA ALREADY DEVELOPED OR PARTLY DEVELOPED WITH
CERTAIN RESTRICIONS AND SUBJECT TO LAND USE AND OTHER
REGULATIONS FRAMED UNDER THE TOWN AND COUNTRY PLANNING
ACT PREVALING IN THE STATE.
RESTRICTED AREA UNDER CRZ
RESTRICTED AREA UNDER CRZ
• CRZ SHALL APPLY TO THE LAND BETWEEN THE HTL TO 100M OR

WIDTH OF THE TIDAL INFLUENCED WATER BODIES THAT ARE
CONNECTED TO THE SEA WHICH EVER IS LESSER.
• THE LAND AREA FALLING BETWEEN THE HAZADOUS LINE AND 500M
FROM HTL LANDWARD SIDE IN CASE OF SEA FRONT.
• THE LAND AREA FALLING BETWEEN THE HAZARD LINE AND 100M IN
CASE OF TIDAL INFLUENCED WATER BODY.
• THE LAND AREA BETWEEN HTL AND LTL WILL BE TERMED AS INTER
TIDAL ZONE.
• THE DISTANCE UPTO WHICH DEVELOPMENT ALONG TIDAL
INFLUENCED WATER BODIES IS TO BE REGULATED SHALL BE
GOVERNED BY THE DISTANCE UP TO WHICH THE TIDAL EFFECTS
ARE EXPERIENCED WHICH SHALL BE DETERMINED BASED ON THE
SALAINITY CONCENTRATION
• FOR LAKES MINIMUM 30M BUFFER SHALL BE KEPT.
C.Z.M.P
WHAT IS COASTAL ZONE MANAGEMENT PLAN?

• IDENTIFYING COASTAL STRECHES AND CLASSIFYING THEM
IN DIFFERENT CRZ AREAS.
• INTEGRATED DEVELOPMENT OF THESE AREAS.
• STATE LEVEL COASTAL MANAGEMENT AUTHORITY
RESPONSIBLE FOR MONITORING
CONSTRUCTION METHODS IN CRZ
• THE CONSTRUCTION IN COASTAL REGION
SHOULD PREFERABLY BE DONE ON STILTS
SO AS TO PREVENT THE HOUSE FROM HIGH
& LOW TIDES, WHICH CAN LED TO
DESTRUCTION.
• RAISING THE HOUSES ON STILTS NOT ONLY

PREVENT THE TIDES BUT ALSO HELPS IN
PROPER VENTILATION INSIDE THE HOUSE.
• THE DIAGRAM SHOWS THE DIFFERENCE

BETWEEN AN UNELEVATED AND AN
ELEVATED HOUSE.
• THE CONSTRUCTION ON SAND IS

PRACTICALLY IMPOSSIBLE AS THE SAND
RECEDES ALONG WITH THE WATER
DURING HIGH TIDES.
• FOUNDATION AND STILTS ARE THE MOST

IMPORTANT STEP IN CONSTRUCTION. WITH
STRONGER FOUNDATION AND STILTS THE
DESTRUCTION TO THE HOUSE CAN BE
MINIMAL.
PROHIBITED ACTIVITES WITHIN CRZ
• DISCHARGE OF UNTREATED WATER &EFFLUENTS FROM

INDUSTRIES , CITIES AND OTHER HUMAN SETTLEMENT.
• DUMBING OF CITIES OR TOWNS WASTES INCLUDING
CONSTRUCTIONAL DEBRIS, INDUSTRIAL SOLID WASTE , FLY
ASH FOR THE PURPOSE OF LAND FILLING.
• PORT AND HARBOUR PROJECTS IN HIGH ERODING STRECHES
OF THE COAST, EXCEPT THOSE PROJECTS CLASSIFIED AS
STRATEGIC AND DEFENCE RELATED.
• RECLAMATION FOR COMMERCIAL PURPOSES SUCH AS
SHOPPING AND HOUSING COMPLEXES, HOTELS AND
ENTERTINMENT ACTIVITIES.
• MINING OF SAND , ROCKS AND OTHER SUB-STRATA
MATERIALS.
PROHIBITED ACTIVITIES WITHIN CRZ
• DRAWL OF GROUNDWATER AND CONSTRUCTION RELATED
THERETO, WITHIN 200mts OF HTL; EXCEPT THE
FOLLOWING:-
In the areas which are inhabited by the local communities and only for
their use.
In the area between 200mts – 500mts zone the drawl of groundwater
shall be permitted only when done manually through ordinary wells for
drinking , horticulture, agriculture and fisheries where no other source
of water is available.
• DRESSING OR ALTERING THE SAND DUNES ,HILLS,
NATURAL FEATURES INCLUDING LANDSCAPE CHANGES
FOR BEAUTIFICATION, RECREATION AND OTHER SUCH
PURPOSE.
• FACILITES REQUIRED FOR PATROLLING AND VIGILANCE
ACTIVITIES OF MARINE/COASTAL POLICE STATIONS.
NORMS FOR REGULATION OF ACTIVITIES
CRZ-I
• NO NEW CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE PERMITTED IN CRZ-I EXCEPT;-

PROJECTS RELATING TO DEPARTMENT OF ATOMIC ENERGY
PIPELINES, CONVEYING SYSTEMS INCLUDING TRANSMISSION LINES
FACILITES THAT ARE ESSENTIAL FOR ACTIVITES PERMISSIBLE UNDER
CRZ-I
INSTALLATION OF WEATHER RADAR FOR MONITORING OF CYCLONES
MOVEMENT
CONSTRUCTION OF TRANS HARBOUR SEA LINK AND WITHOUT
AFFECTING THE TIDAL FLOW OF WATER.
• AREAS BETWEEN LTL AND HTL WHICH ARE NOT ECOLOGICALLY
SENSITIVE , NECESSARY SAFETY MEASURES WILL BE
INCORPORATED WHILE PERMITTING THE FOLLOWING NAMELY:-
• EXPLORATION AND EXTRACTION OF NATURAL GAS;

• NECESSARY SAFETY MEASURE SHALL BE INCORPORATED WHILE
PERMITTING SUCH DEVELOPMENTAL ACTIVITIES IN THE AREA
FALLING IN THE HAZARD ZONE;
• SALT HARVESTING BY SOLAR EVAPORATION OF SEAWATER;
• DESALINATION OF PLANTS;
• STORAGE OF NON-HAZARDOUS CARGO SUCH AS EDIBLE OIL,
FERTILIZERS AND FOOD GRAIN WITHIN NOTIFIED PORTS;
• CONSTRUCTION OF TRANS HARBOUR SEA-LINKS ROADS ON
STILTS OR PILLARS WITHOUT AFFECTING THE TIDAL FLOW OF
WATER.
CRZ II & CRZ III
• BUILDINGS SHALL BE PERMITTED ON THE LANDWARD
SIDE OF THE EXISTING ROAD, OR ON THE LANDWARD SIDE
OF EXISTING AUTHORIZED STRUCTURES.
• BUILDINGS SHALL BE SUBJECT TO THE EXISTING LOCAL
TOWN AND COUNTRY PLANNING REGULATIONS
INCLUDING THE EXISTING NORMS OF FSI.
• NO CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE PERMITTED WITHIN NDZ
(NO DEVELOPMENT ZONE) EXCEPT:-
REPAIRS OR RECONSTRUCTION OF EXISTING AUTHORIZED
STRUCTURE NOT EXCEEDING EXISTING FLOOR SPACE
INDEX , EXISTING PLINTH AREA AND FOR PERMISSIBLE
ACTIVITIES UNDER THE NOTIFICATION INCLUDING
FACILITIES ESSENTIAL FOR ACTIVITIES.
DWELLING UNITS FOR TRADITIONAL COASTAL
COMMUNITIES AND FISHER FOLK.
HERITAGE ACT
Development Regulation provisions for Heritage
Conservation in Chennai Metropolitan Area
■ Heritage Conservation has gained more importance after the UN Convention on
protection of World Cultural and Heritage held in Paris in 1972
■ UNESCO is declaring world heritage monuments of international importance.
■ At National level, the GoI’s Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Sites and
Remains Act 1958 provides for listing of heritage monuments for preservation.
■ At State level, the Tamil Nadu Ancient and Historical Monuments Archaeological
Sites and Remains Act, 1966 provides for listing of heritage monuments for
preservation.
■ At Local level, i.e., City/Town level, Town Planning Legislations include
provisions of listing of heritage buildings for conservation.
■ When at International, National and State levels, the regulations address
preservation of more than 100 years old monuments, the town planning regulations
at city level address the conservation of heritage buildings not covered by the
above regulations.
History of Conservation efforts in CMA
■ Govt. of Tamil Nadu initiated action in 1997 to conserve heritage buildings.
■ A committee headed by DTCP was constituted by GoTN in 1998 (G.O.Ms.No.179
H &UD dated 25.05.98 to look into the aspects related to enactment of Heritage
Act).
■ The Committee had drafted Draft Tamil Nadu Heritage Conservation Act, 1999
and submitted it to GoTN.
■ Subsequently the Government in G.O. Ms. No.290, dated 17.09.2007 constituted
an Inter Disciplinary Expert Committee (IEDC) headed by Vice-Chairman, Tamil
Nadu State Planning Commission to look into all aspects of conservation of
heritage buildings including the need for enacting the law.
■ The IDEC met on 20.11.2007 and recommended for constitution of many
subcommittees on
o Heritage Buildings
o Religious faiths
o Cultural aspects and
o Legal issues.
Major provisions relating to heritage conservation in
the Development Regulations
■ No development or redevelopment or additions, alterations, repairs, renovation of
listed heritage buildings / precincts shall be carried out without the prior written
permission of the MS, CMDA.
■ The MS, CMDA shall act in consultation with HCC.
■ In relation to religious buildings in the said list changes, repairs, additions,
alterations and renovations required on religious grounds mentioned in sacred
texts, or as a part of holy practices laid down in religious codes shall be treated as
permissible, subject to their being in accordance and consonance with the original
structure and architecture, designs, aesthetics and other special feature thereof.
Grading of listed buildings/precincts.
■ The heritage buildings/precincts in CMA will be graded as Grade - I, II or III
Grade-I
■ Heritage buildings/precincts of national or historical importance, embodying
excellence in architectural style and design.
■ They are the prime landmarks of the city.
■ No intervention should be permitted either on the exterior or interior unless it is
necessary.
■ If it is absolutely essential, minimal changes would be allowed which must be in
accordance with the original.
Grade-II
■ Comprises of heritage buildings/precincts of regional or local importance
possessing special architectural or aesthetical merit, cultural or historical value .
■ Internal changes and adaptive reuse will be generally allowed. But external
changes will be subject to scrutiny.
■ The extension or additional buildings in the same plot is allowed provided that they
are in harmony with existing heritage buildings / precincts, especially in terms of
height and façade.
Grade-III
■ Comprises of important for town spaces. They evoke architectural, aesthetic or
sociological interest, though not as much as in heritage grade-II
■ External and internal changes and adaptive reuse would be generally allowed.
Conclusion
■ Recently the GoI has amended the Central Act providing for preservation of
monuments.
■ According to the Act, within 100 m. around the notified ASI monuments, no
development is permissible.
■ Further 200 m area around it, developments are restricted and any proposal is
to be cleared by ASI Committee.
■ ASI may come up with Heritage-monument-specific / site-specific regulation
instead of prohibiting any development in the area within 100 m. radius and
restricting developments within 200 m wide belt around it.
■ For the Heritage Conservation legislations or rules to be effective, the regulations
shall be simple to follow and the authorities who deal with applications for
development in and around should dispose off them within a stipulated time. The
process shall also be transparent.
■ Due consideration for conservation of heritage buildings/precincts shall be given
by all the authorities concerned including urban planning authorities, PWD,
Government departments/ agencies who own heritage buildings, religious and
charitable institutions, industries, corporate firms and private.
■ Notification of statutory list is not an end in itself. It is to be followed by a
conservation plan for these buildings/precincts, to be prepared in phases and
recommended to the owners of the buildings.
■ Financing for the implementation of the conservation plan to be explored. Sources
may be GoI’s JnNURM , Finance Commission grants, State Government grants
and CMDA’s Repair Fund.
GLOBALISATION
AND ARCHITECTURE
ROBERT ADAM
A
rchitecture has only a small part to play in
the affairs of man. It does, nonetheless, bring
together much that is important for society
at large: shelter, social function, technology, art,
economics, politics, science and more. Consequently,
architecture can be a mirror to society. Since the
early twentieth century, architects have sought to link
design symbolically to express a particular analysis
of society and its future direction. This analysis
has often been technological, but it has also been
spiritual, psychological and even cosmological. But
this view can be reversed; society can be made a mirror
to architecture. We can understand architecture as a Bretton-Woods1944
natural reflection of what is current socially, politically
and economically. dominant Western powers that the world economy
and the welfare of humanity could no longer be left to
A series of social, political and economic changes the vagaries of nation-states. The creation of the IMF
that affect everything from the operation of nations and the World Bank at the Bretton-Woods agreement
to everyday life come under the collective title of and the establishment of the United Nations and
‘globalisation’. Often considered just to be the the Declaration of Human Rights, put in place the
domination of the world by global corporations, the institutional framework for a global economy and a
phenomenon of globalisation goes much further global political philosophy between 1944 and 1948.
than this. It is summarised by Jürgen Habermas: This was the foundation of globalisation and both
“By ‘globalisation’ is meant the cumulative processes events were based on Western or Enlightenment
of a worldwide expansion of trade and production, principles. The idea of the free market could be
commodity and financial markets, fashions, traced to Adam Smith. Globally enforced individual
the media and computer programs, news and rights over and above the community or nation-state
communications networks, transportation systems fulfilled Condorcet’s aspirations for the equality of
and flows of migration, the risks engendered by man and Imanuel Kant’s ideal of world government.
large-scale technology, environmental damage and
epidemics, as well as organised crime and terrorism.”1 These principles could not be realised at a global
Globalisation may now have its own global band of level until the collapse of the Soviet Empire in
protestors but it is generally acknowledged that, save 1989. The IMF’s imposition of a free market system
a major catastrophe, “the intensification of worldwide on an exhausted Russian economy3 was followed
social relations in such a way that local happenings by the voluntary liberalisation of the Indian and
are shaped by events occurring many miles away and Chinese economies (although not the Chinese
vice versa” 2 is unavoidable and increasing. political system) in the early 90s. This free market
was a north-Atlantic economic system evangelically
Imperialism, internationalism and other forms of promoted by the USA (and often politically linked
interchange between cultures and economies has to American-style liberal democracy or “freedom”).
been taking place for millennia, but globalisation is As a consequence, globalisation can appear to be a
different in effect, depth and breadth. form of American imperialism. In the short term this
seems to be the effect. But the ideology is that of
At the end of the Second World War experience of liberalisation, rather than imperial protection and
the depression and the holocaust convinced the control, and the true liberaliser must acknowledge
‘...the two poles of globalisation – homogenisation and localisation.’

Architecture and Globalisation
the possibility of a loss of control over what has been Modernism conquered the earth. As Maxwell Fry
liberalised. noted as early as 1969, Modernism is an “architectural
story which is first a record of dispersal from Germany
Globalisation is a new world order. We do not know and Central Europe to the ends of the earth, but first
its outcome or have a full picture of its nature as we to England and America.”12
are only in its earliest stages. Some commentators
consider it to be ‘high-modernity’4 and the realisation For countries swept up in the tide of the global
of the ideals of the Enlightenment while others economy, the association of Modernism with
believe it to be a new phenomenon of equal but rationality, progress and successful and dominant
different significance from the Enlightenment.5 At north-Atlanticeconomieswasirresistible. Furthermore,
this stage, however, it is clearly a Western world order, the Modernist association with the principal building
dominated by north-Atlantic culture and the most types identified with key aspects of globalisation – the
evident outcome has been the spread of north-Atlantic corporate office, the airport, the international hotel
products and corporations. The effect is described and the shopping mall – provided a clear symbolic
by Helena Norberg-Hodge: “Western consumer link with the engines of global capital expansion. In a
conformity is descending on the less industrialised very short space of time the homogenisation of global
parts of the world like an avalanche. ‘Development’ consumerism had its parallel in the homogenisation
brings tourism, Western films and products and, more of city centres throughout the world. It was observed
recently, satellite television to the remotest corners by Henry Russell Hitchcock as early as 1951.13 The
of the Earth. All provide overwhelming images of glass-walled office block has become the Coca-Cola
luxury and power. Adverts and action films give the of architecture. Now, without reference to signage or
impression that everyone in the West is rich, beautiful vehicle registration plates, it is often impossible to
and brave, and leads a life filled with excitement identify the global location of parts of San Francisco,
and glamour. ….. Advertisers make it clear that Osaka, Sao Paolo, Brussels, Berlin and Shanghai.
Westernized fashion accessories equal sophistication
and ‘cool’. In diverse ‘developing’ nations around the
world, people are induced to meet their needs not
through their community or local economy, but by
trying to ‘buy in’ to the global market.”6 Put more
succinctly by Theodore Levitt, “everywhere everything
gets more and more like everything else as the world’s
preference structure is relentlessly homogenized.”7
In architecture, the historical development of

globalisation corresponded very closely to the
ascendancy of Modernism. Founding Modernist
ideals had always been global in ambition. In 1919
Walter Gropius said, “One day there will be a world-
view, and then there will also be its sign, its crystal
– architecture.”8 By 1932 it had been identified as the Mumbai, Moscow, Shanghai - ‘the Coca-Cola of Architecture.’
“International Style” and, although this was really
a development of “parallel experiments” between The response of the architectural profession has been
nations,9 it was presented as a “contemporary style, equally clear. While it is impossible to accurately
which exists throughout the world, .. unified and estimate the increased number of international
inclusive.”10 By 1948, the year the foundations of commissions, an indication of the increased
globalisation were finally laid, Modernism had so globalisation of architecture can be found in the
obliterated traditional architecture that it came to cumulative number of branch offices opened in
be described as simply “modern”.11 Modernism different global regions. Since the fall of the Berlin
was also, quite specifically, a north-Atlantic cultural Wall in 1989 these have increased from less than
phenomenon. It was based on the ideals of the same 20 to more than 150 (see figure 1)14. Of the 55 large
Western Enlightenment thinking that informed architectural practices with offices in other global
globalisation: rationality, scientific innovation, regions, 80% have their head offices in English-
progress and the end of tradition. With globalisation speaking countries and even the two Hong Kong firms
2
MILLIONS OF NUMBER OF INTERNET
INTERNET
HOSTS (SOURCE ISC)
HOSTS
350
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
89 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 01 02 03 04 05 06
90 00
YEAR
Figure 1
were founded in the nineteenth-century colonial

period by UK expatriates (see figure 2).
Globalised commercial architecture has developed

a symbiotic relationship with a new breed of global
star architects. As cities, more than nations, now
compete to attract global investment and global
tourism, they seek brand differentiation and symbolic
modernity. The commissioning of public buildings
by star architects is now an established marketing
technique. The buildings must be (in the literal sense
of the word) extra-ordinary and designed by one of
a small band of global architects whose nationality
is more accidental than significant. The names are
familiar and include Frank Gehry, Daniel Libeskind,

Jean Nouvel, Rem Koolhaus, Norman Foster, Santiago
Calatrava and Renzo Piano. The personal status
of these architects is now so great and the demand
for their presence so high - from students, the
lecture circuit and competitions as well as the cities
themselves – that their work is almost by necessity
strongly conceptual and cannot rely on any detailed
study of fine grain or culture of the locality. Indeed,
as it is the intention that the building should be an
Figure 2
3
origins of the star product. The new architecture has
been approvingly dubbed “supermodern” by the
Dutch critic Hans Ibelings. “For this architecture
the surroundings constitute neither legitimation
nor inspiration for these are derived from what goes
on inside the building, from the programme. This
autonomy is in many cases reinforced by the fact
that the building has an inscrutable exterior that
betrays nothing of what happens inside In many
instances these buildings look as if they might house
just about anything: an office or a school, a bank or
a research centre, a hotel or apartments, a shopping
Gugenheim, Bilbao - Frank Gehry
mall or an airport terminal.”15
Globalisation itself is, however, more complex

than the simple expansion of Western capital and
concomitant spread of products, culture and style.
The creation of the rights of the individual over their
resident community or state has changed the role of
the relationship between the state and the individual.
At the same time, the free movement of global
corporations and capital has restricted the ability of
the state to maintain an autonomous economy. The
principle that the state could control its citizens and
wage war with other states, established in the Treaties
of Westphalia in 1648, has been significantly eroded.
Central Chinese Television Company, Beijing - Rem Koolhaus
Aggressive nationalism, which in the nineteenth
century often led to the suppression and incorporation
iconic global product, local distinctiveness is often of diverse groups to form nation-states, is no longer
not a desirable characteristic. a functional necessity for defence or economic
containment. “The nation-state has become too
The competitive marketing of these buildings by small to solve global problems and too large to
cities has set up an upward demand spiral. Out deal with local ones.”16 As the power of the nation-
of the work of the star architects, design types and state declines, regional, local and ethnic identities
styles emerge and become identified with successful re-emerge. In 1990 there were 800 micro-national
cities, even before they are built. As star architects movements in a world of fewer than 200 states.17 This
are, by definition, limited in number, demand for is localisation, the other face of globalisation.
symbolic and extraordinary buildings far outstrips
the capacity of the star group to provide their own Localisation is closely associated with the politics
designs, however conceptual their original input may of identity. Identity is community and place related
be. The conceptual nature of the star product allows and the individuality of community and place are
global commercial firms (who have sometimes been undermined by global homogenisation. Migration,
acting as the executive architects for star architects) to instantaneous communication and increased travel
clone the trademark design characteristics of the star all threaten and dislocate community identity. At the
product. The reproduction of the spiral or twisted same time, members of communities can intensify
forms, globular glass, planar intersection and so on their association with one another and their place of
is facilitated by the use of the same sophisticated origin over long distances with the internet and the
computer graphics employed by the offices of the star other communication media. The same phenomena
architects to develop and present their concepts. can also promote the local cohesion of ethnic
communities or micro states. To be Catalonian is
This trickle-down effect and the high status of star not ethnic, it is to speak Catalan in Catalonia and
architects within the architectural profession have Catalan-language television is an important agent
influenced architecture more generally than the global in the consolidation of an increasingly independent
4
Catalonia. The widely dispersed Sami community, statement: “We also favour cultural differences, every
an ethnic micro-nation recognised across Norway, city’s own identity, and we believe that city planning
Sweden, Finland and Russia, is brought together by a and architecture should emphasize these proper
dedicated Sami website. symbols.”21
The sociological, political and economic impact Concern with the identity of place is, not surprisingly,
of region and identity is a powerful force in the more evident in urban design and urbanism than in
globalised world. Dislocated identity can lead to architecture – although many urbanists are architects.
fundamentalism and terrorism. Regional revival can In the last fifteen years there has been a growing
lead to civil war and national fragmentation. The urbanist movement specifically concerned with the
need to attract global capital can divert cities from individuality and identity of place. One of the earliest
the interests of their national governments. and the most successful is the American Congress
for the New Urbanism (CNU) which was founded
It has been recognised for some time that international in 1993 and seeks “the reconfiguration of sprawling
modernism had a homogenising tendency. Post suburbs into communities of real neighbourhoods
Modernism was a direct response to this but had a and diverse districts” and “the redevelopment of towns
short life. In 1982 Kenneth Frampton, principally as and cities [to] respect historical patterns, precedents
a Modernist rebuff to the overt cultural symbolism of and boundaries.”22 A Vision of Europe was founded
Post Modernism, published the first of a number of a year previously in Bologna with the objective of
essays on “Critical Regionalism” to highlight what he “the creation of villages, neighbourhoods, cities and
saw as localising tendencies in current Modernism. even metropolises, marked by new structural and
The definition of what made a building regional, formal qualities that will make them comparable to
however, was vestigial and amounted to as little as their historic counterparts.”23 Ten years later, a sister
building to the contours of the site. When combined organisation to the CNU, the Council for European
with the insistence that it “should not be sentimentally Urbanism (CEU), was established in Bruges and
identified with the vernacular,”18 the theory was a promotes “the distinctive character of European cities,
long way from any readily-comprehensible form of towns, villages and countryside [and] consolidation,
local identity. renewal and growth in keeping with regional identity
and the aspirations of citizens”.24 In 2006 the
Academy of Urbanism was created out of an initiative
Architectural interest in any kind of literal
contextualism is now a minority activity. by the then president of the RIBA, George Ferguson,
and asserts that “the design of spaces and buildings
should be influenced by their context and seek to
There is, nonetheless, independent evidence of a new
enhance local character and heritage.”25
concern for localisation of place. A 30% increase in
the last ten years makes urban tourism the highest
growthtourist sector in Europe. The principal demands While the rhetoric suggests that there is an association
of the urban tourist are for high quality, cultural and between the minority traditional movement in
“authentic” (or apparently authentic) places.19 In 2004 architecture and the urbanist movement (and indeed
Richard Florida followed up his ground-breaking there is), the broad base of the urbanist movement is
book The Rise of the Creative Class, which identified indicated by the UK Government’s 1999 report, Towards
the key role of innovators in the information-age an Urban Renaissance, written by an “Urban Task Force”
economy, with Cities and the Creative Class. With chaired by the leading Modernist, Richard Rogers. In
empirical research he demonstrated that “the quality common with the other urbanist organisations it had
of place, a city or region, has replaced access as the a concern for identity and context: “The diversity of
pivotal point of competitive advantage. Quality- urban neighbourhoods means that different places will
of-place features attractive to talented workers of a respond to the pressure for change in different ways.
region have thus become central to regional strategies … This diversity reflects the full richness of the English
for developing high-tech industries.”20 In 1992 the urban tradition.” 26
mayors of Rio de Janeiro and Barcelona, brought
together respectively by the correspondence of the This interest in local contextual identity runs contrary
United Nations Conference on the Environment to the homogeneous international architecture of star
and Development and the Olympic Games, signed architects and their followers. The contrast is illustrated
the Rio-Barcelona Declaration. Point 4 included the by a famous clash between the two ideologies which
5
uniformity.”28 Stimman for his part told Libeskind that
his museum was “an architectural fart”.29 Libeskind left
Berlin for Los Angeles.
These two poles of modern architecture –

supermodernism and the particularity of place – are
clear reflections of the two poles of globalisation –
homogenisation and localisation. As joint products of
globalisation they must not be seen as totally distinct.
The city of Bilbao did not just erect Frank Gehry’s
Guggenheim, the definitive iconic building, it restored
the fabric of its historic centre. The future of both
architectural persuasions will be tested in the latest and
most urgent global crisis – the survival of the ecology
of the planet such that it will continue to support our
global civilisation. This is the supreme challenge for
globalisation: the cause, the effect and the resolution
are and will be global and local. It will affect all aspects
of social, political and economic life and it will, as day
follows night, have a profound impact on architecture.
Jewish Museum, Berlin - Daniel Libeskind

© Robert Adam, June 2007
First published; Architects’ Review, February 2008
Plan for Berlin - Hans Stimman
took place, appropriately enough, in Berlin – flashpoint

for both the Cold War and the fall of the Russian empire.
When the Bundestag voted to move to Berlin in 1991, the
regeneration of the reunited city was under the control
of Hans Stimman, Director of Municipal Construction.
Stimman strictly regulated reconstruction to maintain
the distinctive historic character of the city by reinstating
traditional city blocks and limiting building heights
and materials. He said, “I wanted to go back to a city
structure that I call a European city. I wanted to make
Berlin readable again.”27 Daniel Libeskind, resident
while working on the Jewish Museum, considered these
to be rules “that are transforming … the city into banal Ion, Charleston, South Carolina - New Urbanism
6
References: 15 Hans Ibelings, Supermodernism: Architecture in the Age of

Globalisation, NAi Publishers, 1998, p88
1 Jurgen Habermas, The Divided West, Polity Press, 2006,
16 Daniel Bell, The End of Ideology: On the Exhaustion of
p175
Political Ideas in the Fifties, Harvard University Press, 1962
2 Anthony Giddens, The Consequences of Modernity, Polity Press, (expression much used subsequently)
1991, p64
17 Jan Aart Scholte, Globalisation: a critical introduction,
3 Joseph E Stiglitz, Globalization and Its Discontents, Penguin, Palgrave Macmillan, 2005, p233
2002
18 Kenneth Frampton, Ten Points on an Architecture of
4 In particular Anthony Giddens and Ulrich Beck Regionalism: A Provisional Polemic, Center 3: New Regionalism,
5 In particular Martin Albrow but see also Immanuel 1987, pp 20-7.
Wallerstein. 19 City Tourism and Culture, European Travel Commission
6 Helena Norberg-Hodge, ‘The March of the Monoculture,’ The Research Group, 2005.
Ecologist, Vol 29, No 2, May/June 1999, p195 20 Richard Florida, Cities and the Creative Class, Routledge,
7 Theodore Levitt, Harvard Business Review, May- June 1983 2005, p50
8 Walter Gropius, Bruno Taut, Adolf Behne, ‘New Ideas on 21 Quoted in, Jordi Borja and Manuel Castells, Local and Global,
Architecture’, leaflet at Arbeitsrat für Kunst, April 1919. Management of Cities in the Information Age, Earthscan, 1997,
9 Henry-Russell Hitchcock and Philip Johnson, The International pp227-30
Style, Norton, 1995, orig. publ. 1932, p36 22 CNU Charter and Principles Point 6
10 Henry-Russell Hitchcock and Philip Johnson, The International 23 Vision of Europe, Charter of the City of the New Renaissance,
Style, Norton, 1995, orig. publ. 1932, p35 Point 2
11 Henry Russell Hitchcock, speaking at ‘What is Happening to 24 The Charter for European Urbanism, Stockholm, 6 November
Modern Architecture?’ Bulletin of the Museum of Modern Art 2003, ‘Action’
XV, no 3, Spring 1948. Symposium in MOMA Feb 11th 1948. 25 Academy of Urbanism, Manifesto, 2007
12 Maxwell Fry, Art in a Machine Age, Methuen 1969, p133 26 Urban Task Force: Towards an Urban Renaissance 1999, p30
13 Henry-Russell Hitchcock, ‘The International Style Twenty 27 Quoted by Andreas Tzortzis, International Herald Tribune,
Years After’, Architectural Record, August 1951 September 29 2006
14 Survey by author of architectural firms with total worldwide 28 Brian Ladd, The Ghosts of Berlin: Confronting German
staff over 75 with branch offices in global regions other than region History in the Urban Landscape, University of Chicago Press,
of head office, taken from BD Survey, ‘World Architecture 100’, 1997
January 2007. Offices with two or more technical staff. Response
29 Daniel Libeskind, Breaking Ground: Adventures in Life and
rate 52 of 55. Global regions are: Africa, Australasia, Central Asia,
Architecture, John Murray, 2005
Central/Eastern Europe, Middle East, North America, Pacific Rim
and China, South and Central America, Western Europe.
7
Information Technology and Architectural Practice: Knowledge Modeling
Approach and BIM
Ajla Aksamija, PhD, LEED AP, Architectural Research Analyst
Perkins+Will, Tech Lab
Mir M. Ali, PhD, Professor

School of Architecture
University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign
Abstract
This paper presents recent developments in information technologies and their impact on
architectural design. It presents a practical technique for knowledge-based information
modeling extending the currently prevailing Building Information Modelling (BIM) to
include information beyond the building elements, and to foster analysis during the
design process. Interactive web-based application for information discovery and design
analysis is discussed as a case study. The application integrates several aspects of the
early schematic design, and is intended for demonstration of integrated design factors.
Introduction
Architectural design requires immense amount of information for inspiration, creation,
and construction of buildings. The process from the initial conception to the finished
product involves substantial knowledge and involvement of multidisciplinary agents,
such as architects, engineers, and planners as well as their collaboration. As buildings
become more complex due to the introduction of innovative technologies and increased
awareness of social and communal needs, design process requires significant
modifications of previous practices to respond to newly emerging requirements.
Improved environmental sensitivity, energy efficiency, integrated building systems, life-
safety and security measures, as well as high performance are the driving factors at
present. These factors might not result in the development of new building types, but
rather they change the nature of architectural discourse and practice and impact the
design process. In particular, integrated practice, use of virtual building, simulations,
modeling, and analysis of design decisions have become crucial.
Recent developments in information technology are providing means and methods for
improvement of current practices to respond to these changes. Energy and thermal
simulations, modeling of structural behavior, improved design representations, and
enhanced collaboration using digital media are being utilized in the design process.
Traditional CAD programs present data based on geometric entities, capturing the spatial
relationships but not the domain-specific information. Building Information Model (BIM)
provides a common database of information about a building including geometry and
attributes. The goal of BIM is to provide a common structure for information sharing that
can be used by all agents in the design process and construction, as well as for the facility
management after a building is constructed and occupied. BIM allows designers to fully
use the concepts developed during the schematic design phase, advance data transfer into
Aksamija, A. and Ali, M., (2008). 1

Proceedings of AIA IL Conference: Breaking New Ground, Moline, IL, November 7-8.
the design development phase, and integrate visualization efforts into project
development.
Knowledge modelling approach is presented in this paper that aims to capture implicit
design factors, computationally represent integrated relationships between them, and
foster design analysis. Integrated design as an approach and recent developments in
information technologies that support integration are discussed. Development of a web-
based application is presented as a case study, aimed to foster extension of BIM to
include contextual information and general design knowledge. The advantage of such
system is that improved decision-making and analysis processes are actively supported
by computational tools.
Integrated Design Approach: Methodology

Design process can be perceived as a successive concretion of the description of future
characteristics of an artifact, and it leads from the incomplete to complete, abstract to
concrete, and conceptual to precise descriptions (Grabowski et al., 1996). By nature, it is
a non-linear process that requires analysis, evaluation, synthesis, and decision-making. In
that sense, it requires constant information flow between the designer and environment.
According to Kalay (2006), architectural design analyzes current stages of being and
develops plans for improved new states, and it gathers and processes information from
different sources, re-arranges and produces new information, and simulates the expected
outcomes.
Integrated architectural design requires interdisciplinary approach and comprehensive
methodology that considers multifaceted design requirements to produce buildings with
improved performance. Buchanan (1995) states that the design cannot be reduced to one
science, but rather it should be concerned with connecting and integrating knowledge
from different disciplines. It is important to differentiate between integrated design as an
approach and as a project delivery method, as portrayed in Figure 1. Integration as an
approach requires comprehensive consideration of design factors, systems and
requirements, and balances these to form a building. Integrated design as a delivery
method requires collaboration between different agents from the earliest stages of the
project.
According to Bachman, there exist three types of integration: physical, visual, and
performance (2003). Physical integration relates to building elements, components and
systems, and the common space that they share. The floor-ceiling section of many
buildings, for example, is subdivided into separate zones for lighting, ducts, and structure
to support the floor above. These segregated volumes prevent interference between
systems by providing adequate space for each system. Connections between components
and among systems in general constitute physical integration. Visual integration involves
development of visual harmony among many parts of a building and their agreement with
the intended visual effects of design. This may include exposed and formally expressive
components of a building that combine to create its image. Performance integration
relates to shared functions of elements and systems, such as unified functions in one
building element. Whether integration is visual or physical, the various interdependent
components must interact with one another to create a harmonious balance. The complex
relationship between intentions, systems, environment, and requirements greatly affects
integration in the design process.

INTEGRATED DESIGN AS APPROACH
INTEGRATED DESIGN AS DELIVERY METHOD
Figure 1: Integrated design as an approach and project delivery method.
Integration as an approach and as a delivery method, entails advanced design

methodology, and improved means of communication. Technological advancements that
impact information processing have the potential to affect the integral processes and
artifacts of architectural design, and revolutionize the profession. Kalay states, “It can do
so by transforming the access to the information form a sequential process into an
interleaved one, where decisions are made in an a-synchronous yet coordinated manner”

(2006). Representations of architectural principles and knowledge are essential for the
future implementations of information technologies and advanced applications.
Information Technology and Design: Representation

Technological revolutions affect processes and products of architecture. Assessing the
impact of information technology on architecture is challenging, since “we are still in the
midst, if not at the very beginning of the revolution” (Kalay, 2006). Information
technology has the potential of transforming current design processes into a network of
design, manufacturing, and management organizations where multiple professions are
involved and geographic locations are insignificant. Understanding the future of
architectural practice is even more challenging, since currently available computational
tools are starting to change processes. When the architectural drawing was introduced,
organization of work and image of practice changed, as well as products. Especially
exigent are the tools that have the ability to represent what was formerly obtained through
education and practice, and the implicit values of architectural knowledge. Figure 2
presents the difference between the past practices, where processes are distinct activities
separated from the information that direct the final product, and the future where
information-centric integrated processes are essential. It is important to note that the
present is a transitional stage, where both approaches are present. Information-centric
methodologies for design depend on computational representations of design processes,
knowledge and elements.
Figure 2: Role of information in design, production and management processes.
Paradigm shift in architecture and construction industry has been originated by the
BIM design and management methodology, where the primary causal elements are:
 Transfer in computer software techniques from procedural algorithmic
programming languages to object-oriented; and
 Change in the building representation from drawings and written specifications to
integrated models, taking building elements and spaces as the starting point (Bjork,
1995).
BIM acts as an integrated, comprehensive building model which stores information

contained in traditional building documents, such as drawings, specification, and
construction details, in a centralized or distributed database. Information management in

this form changes the design procedure and documentation, since all the relevant
information is organized as a database, rather than sets of drawings, specifications, etc.
Data that resembles traditional documentation are specific views of common information.
It virtually simulates design and construction, and provides groundwork for collaborative
design, since all the relevant information, such as spatial organization, building
components, building systems (mechanical, electrical, plumbing, HVAC) is incorporated
into building descriptions.
Visualization of design in three-dimensional space is one of the advantages of BIM;
however, it is not the only capability and the integrative nature of contents must be
emphasized. Beyond visualization, BIMs are used to review constructability issues where
the construction team is able to analyze design decisions while in the early stages of the
process and provide responses to the design team. Information about the site, such as
existing conditions, infrastructure systems and utilities can be included in BIM and
analyzed. Construction schedule can be integrated with the building model to visualize
the sequencing of construction activities, which is also referred as “4D” modeling, since
the time dimension is included. Cost estimation is another dimension, commonly referred
as “5D”, since materials and components are analyzed and directly linked to cost
databases to produce financial information and assist in analyzing design decisions as
they relate to the economic factors.
Figure 3: BIM utilization during design and operation.
Goal of using BIM is to provide a common structure for information sharing that can
be used by all agents in the design process and construction, as well as for the facility
management after a building is constructed and occupied, as seen in Figure 3.
Information contained in BIM can be used internally for analysis and simulations, such as
structural analysis or energy performance. Construction documentation is automatically
generated and updated when the changes are made to the model. The information about
the model can also be extracted for external applications. The major benefits of BIMs

were outlined in a recent study of the utilization in the architecture and construction
industry as the ability to create views and schedules dynamically and automatically,
instant reflection of changes in all drawings and schedules, and single integrated file for a
project (Tse et al., 2005).
Role of Information: Applications

Current information technologies allow for improved planning, visualization and
simulation of growth, land use, and infrastructure control. Geographic Information
System (GIS) technology is effectively utilized for research, development,
implementation, and monitoring of the planning efforts. Graphical interface to complex
sets of data, mapping, and three-dimensional visualization offer simplified analysis of
complex sets of factors (Brail and Klosterman, 2002). Virtual cities in conjunction with
GIS offer navigable environment and effective digital simulation of real cities, which
give planners and designers an opportunity to visualize un-built spaces and interaction
with the existing infrastructure (Dodge et al., 1998).
Visualization and analysis of BIMs within virtual 3D city models are possible through
integration of GIS and BIM data (Hagedorn and Dollner, 2007). Virtual 3D city models
represent objects and components of urban areas at a lower level of information detail
and rely on spatial data. An approach for integration is through distributed, heterogeneous
web services and geo-visualization system, where BIM data is mapped on building
representation in GIS.
Besides integration of BIM and GIS data, there are also other advantages for
combining other information technologies to assist the design process. For example,
information over the web could be accessible through applications that internally contain
knowledge-bases and links to various data-sources. Manufacturers of architectural
products provide online catalogs and details; however, these are currently not formatted
to allow a method for accessing data internally.
BIM-based CAD and these new web-based technologies will change the information
delivery and processing. Distributing information between BIM and external sources is a
viable solution, where BIM stores some information and points to other systems rather
than embeds within the model. Communication and information exchange between the
systems becomes crucial in this case. In order to achieve this, representations of
knowledge about building element, components, systems, etc. are necessary and the
relationships with the design factors. Moreover, integration of contextual aspects requires
representation of the surrounding features and their effects on the building design, thus
comprehensive computational descriptions are needed to achieve further extension of
information technologies in architectural design.
The emphasis should be placed on the content of information stored in the BIM, and
how that information is accesses and utilized. Ibrahim et al. (2004) state:
Objects should have a specific structure of their related information that relates to the different stage of
the building design lifecycle. Every bit of information is relevant in one stage or another in the design
process. It is up to the designer to decide when to reveal each bit of information according to how
much decision he is willing to make in the design phase he is working on. Starting in the preliminary
design phase, objects would be generic and only describe the function and some of the general
geometry specific to that object. It would only be used to define spaces, enclosures and openings while

developing architectural plans. In subsequent stages, more detailed specifications could be decided and
specified.
The missing part is the information that guides the initial design. Although the use of
BIM has been increasing in the architecture and construction industry, development of
computer applications that integrally aid the overall design process, assist the designer in
decision-making process and analysis, foster collaboration and exchange is still in the
initial stages. Integration of BIM, knowledge-based semantic web, and GIS systems is the
next objective of many research efforts (Benner et al., 2005).
Case Study: Web Knowledge-Based Analysis Application

Future trends in architectural design and practice rely on advanced implementation of
information technologies (Aksamija and Grobler, 2007). Currently, various applications
are utilized for design, research, collaboration and simulation; however, there is a lack of
tools that fully support integration and collaboration. There are numerous existing tools
and platforms that support communication and documentation, but few that address the
design process itself, and actively aid the decision-making process. The future generation
of computer applications and software for architectural design should incorporate these
aspects. According to Al-Homoud (2001), future trends in computer-aided design and
building modeling should involve:
 More accurate models with greater flexibility;
 User-friendly interfaces;
 Graphical representations;
 Comprehensive programs covering all needs; and
 Interfacing between different packages.
This research utilized ontology as the basis for the development of web knowledge-
based application, aimed for early schematic design (Figure 4). An ontology is a
knowledge-based model that represents a domain, and it is used to reason about the
objects in that domain, as well as the relations between them. It is a knowledge
representation about a subject, and it describes individuals as the basic objects, classes as
collections or types of objects, properties and characteristics and the relations between
them. The representation structure provides a set of terms and descriptions that express
the facts within a domain, while the body of knowledge using this representation is a
collection. The purpose of ontology, developed during this research, is to capture design
factors influencing buildings design. The application that utilizes ontology is primarily
used for indexing, aimed to present information to the user, and foster decision-making
process in design.
The development of real-world ontology-based knowledge management software
applications is in the early stages (Maedche, 2003). Majority of research and
implementation efforts have been aimed at ontology representation, engineering and
reasoning. Standardized features that are widely adopted in traditional database-driven
information systems, such as scalability, reliability and transactions, are typically not
available in ontology-based system.
The developed application integrates several actions necessary for schematic design:
 Site analysis: Analysis of context through satellite maps and demographic data;

 Energy analysis: Access to external web-based tools;
 Material selection: Access to material information and product catalogs;
 Collaboration: Communication through a forum and real-time discussion;
 Precedents: Analysis of precedents;
 Ontology: Analysis of design factors; and
 Search: Access to external information through general web search.
Ontology represents architectural design factors in a semantic model, as seen in Figure

5. It is also linked to the precedents, displaying information for existing buildings (Figure
6). The frames allow navigation of classes, individuals and properties, presenting the
context and relationships.
Figure 4: Overview of knowledge-based analysis application.
Figure 5: Utilization of ontology.

Figure 6: Building information displayed through ontology.
The development and use of knowledge management tools in construction industry

has overlapping phases, depending on aspirations and flexibility. The first step aims to
improve traditional design by developing cooperation via internet portals for universal
access to traditional design documentation (Agger, 2002). However, the design process is
not affected by these implementations; rather the communication system between agents
is improved. The second approach is the model-based design, which is currently gaining
popularity. In this case, modeling is based on the parametric components, but the process
uses traditional project documentation where the representations of building design are
still achieved by geometrical orthogonal projections and floor plan. The next step is the
overall model-based construction, which aims to integrated design in the whole sector,
from the initial schematic design, through all design phases and construction, and
numerous systems and components (Shaked and Warszawski, 1995). In order to achieve
this goal, contextual information must be modelled, and the information structure must be
presented in a machine-readable format.
Conclusion
Designers have always been investigating improved means of communicating design
which follows the demand in industry. Today, two and three dimensional drawings are
simply not sufficient to represent and capture knowledge necessary for building
construction. Building practice is changing from traditional to integrated, where agents are
starting to collaborate from the very beginning of the project. All these aspects require
significant changes in the building representations. The challenge in representing design in
a computable form lies in the fact that some of the driving forces are intricate and difficult
to quantify. Designers use implicit knowledge, acquired through education, training, and
practice, to produce final outcome. However, explicit knowledge, such as building codes,
regulations, and material databases, are used in the process.
Virtual building and Building Information Modeling (BIM) are being increasingly used
in architectural design practice. These methods consider building as a common database of
information, allowing for comprehensive representation, analysis, and information
processing. The focus of this research has been computational

representations of design factors, particularly capturing design knowledge to be used by
software applications. Conducted research was aimed at extending BIM to include
contextual information and design knowledge to aid designers in the decision-making
process.
Web-based application, which utilizes the knowledge-based model for decision- making
process in architectural design, was presented. The application integrates several functions
necessary for schematic design: site analysis, energy analysis, material selection,
collaboration, and exploration. The benefit of this approach is that this system assists
designer in the process, and aids the decision-making process.
Bibliography
Agger, K., (2002). “Model-Based Architecture—an Architect’s View”, Proceedings of

International Council for Research and Innovation in Building and Construction
Conference CIB w78, pp. 101-111.
Aksamija, A. and Grobler, F., (2007). “Architectural Ontology: Development of

Machine-Readable Representations for Building Design Drivers”, Proceedings of the
2007 ASCE International Workshop on Computing in Civil Engineering, Pittsburgh, PA,
July 24-27, pp.168-175.
Al-Homoud, M. S., (2001). “Computer-Aided Building Energy Analysis Techniques”,

Building and Environment, Vol. 36, No. 4, pp. 421-433.
Bachman, L., (2003). Integrated Buildings: The System Basis of Architecture, New York,
NY: John Wiley & Sons.
Benner, J., Geiger, A. and Leinemann, K., (2005). “Flexible Generation of Semantic 3D
Building Models”, Proceedings of Next Generation 3D City Models, Bonn, Germany,
June 21-22.
Bjork, B-C., (1995). Requirements and Information Structures for Building Product Data
Models, PhD Dissertation, Espoo, Finland: Helsinki University of Technology.
Brail, R. and Klosterman, R. E., (2001). Planning Support Systems: Integrating

Geographic Information Systems, Models and Visualization Tools, Redlands, CA: ESRI.
Buchanan, R., (1995). “Wicked Problems in Design Thinking”, The Idea of Design: A
Design Issues Reader, Margolin, V. and Buchanan, R., eds., Cambridge, MA: MIT Press
pp. 3-20.
Dodge, M., Doyle, S., Smith, A. and Fleetwood, S., (1998). “Towards the Virtual City:
VR and Internet GIS for Urban Planning”, Proceedings of Virtual Reality and
Geographical Information Systems, Birkbeck College, UK.

Grabowski, H., Lossack, R. F. and Weiss, C., (1996). “Supporting the Design Process by
an Integrated Knowledge Based Design System”, Advances in Formal Design Method for
CAD, Gero, J. and Sudweeks, F., eds., London, UK: Chapman & Hall.
Hagedorn, B. and Dollner, J., (2007). “High-Level Web Service for 3D Building
Information Visualization and Analysis”, Proceedings of the 15th Annual ACM
International Symposium on Advances in Geographic Information Systems, Seattle, WA.
Ibrahim, M., Krawczyk, R. and Schipporeit, G., (2004). “Two Approaches to BIM: A
Comparative Study”, Proceedings of Education in Computer Aided Architectural Design
in Europe Conference (eCAADe 2004), Copenhagen, Denmark.
Kalay, Y., (2006). “The Impact of Information Technology on Design Methods, Products
and Practices”, Design Studies, Vol. 27, No. 3, pp. 357-380.
Maedche, A., Motik, B., Stojanovic, L., Studer, R. and Volz, R., (2003). “Ontologies for
Enterprise Knowledge Management”, Intelligent Systems, IEEE, Vol. 18, No. 2, pp. 26-
33.
Shaked, O. and Warszawski, A., (1995). “Knowledge-Based System for Construction

Planning of High-Rise Buildings”, Journal of Construction Engineering and
Management, Vol. 121, No. 2, pp. 172-182.
Tse, T. K., Wong, K. A. and Wong, K. F., (2005). “The Utilization of Building
Information Models in nD Modelling: A Study of Data Interfacing and Adoption
Barriers”, Electronic Journal of Information Technology in Construction, Vol. 10, pp. 85-
110.

PREPAREDNESS FOR INTERNATIONAL PRACTICE
INTERNATIONAL PRACTICE
The International Practice PPN (professional practice networks) promotes the practice of
architecture abroad as an instrument of public and professional services through the following
objectives:
•Conducting periodic surveys of PPN members to determine the scope and quantity of architectural practice
abroad:
•Developing seminars and education sessions dealing with international practice for the ASLA Annual
Meeting and other conferences;
•Establishing connections with organizations concerned with global environmental issues;
•Promoting ASLA membership and professional organizational development worldwide;
•Promoting the profession among international groups.
DRIVING FORCES
There are five major driving forces that take architects into foreign markets.
•First are the clients undertaking design and building projects seeking the services of foreign architects
who have established an internationally renowned design reputation or who are seeking the services
for specialized building types.
•The second are business decisions by clients encouraged and facilitated by free trade agreements who
then wish to take their established domestic client relationships with them into an international arena.
• Third are public agencies commissioning domestic architects for projects in foreign countries.
• Fourth are architects winning public and private design competitions in foreign countries.
•Fifth is the downturn in the domestic economy which results in architects turning to more successful
national economies seeking project commissions in those countries.
DECIDING THE FORM OF FOREIGN PRACTICE
•Any architects working outside their own country are required to make both a legal and a business
decision with regard to engaging the regulatory regime in the host country.
•If it is a one-time event then the most likely course of action will be to identify a competent local
registered architect, negotiate and sign professional service contract with them, and have the local
architect serve as the legal project architect of record.
•The contractual relationship defines their respective 12 responsibilities and how the client fee
will be apportioned. This apportionment varies from project to project depending on the scope of
work negotiated between the foreign and domestic architects.
•Most commonly the foreign architect carries the project through the entire design development
process.
•The domestic architect commonly prepares the working drawings and specifications, assumes
responsibility for adhering to codes of ethics, signing and stamping all of the building documents and
assuring adherence to all applicable building codes and regulations.
•The local architect is also knowledgeable in the country’s language, construction bidding procedures
and construction supervision methods. This approach avoids the necessity of the foreign architect
becoming registered in the host country. It is a common form of international practice.
•If the foreign architect is making a business decision to maintain an ongoing professional business
presence and practice in a foreign country in order to be the sole architect of record, then it is
necessary to become legally registered in that country under the prevailing laws and regulations. There
are increasing instances of architectural firms in one country buying a firm in another country to
expand their international practice.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS FOR ARCHITECTS WORKING IN A
FOREIGN COUNTRY
•There is no universal standard of regulatory requirements for architects working in a foreign

country.
•There are two common requirements among national regulatory bodies for an applicant to qualify
for the registration examination.
•A university degree in architecture and a defined period of professional internship and/or
experience.
•The applicant is required to pay a fee to take the licensing examination and in most countries to
renew the license once granted.
ARCHITECTURAL
JOURNALISM
What is journalism ?
By the end of the 20th century the journalists in general come to the conclusion
that “ the central purpose of journalism is to provide citizens with accurate
and reliable information that they need to function as a free society.”
Journalism is not just fact finding, media analyzing, opinion writing and
commentary, but more than that. It should be fair and balanced reporting of
events at local, regional, national and international levels.
Journalism is divided into many streams – sports journalism, science
journalism, fashion journalism, photojournalism, political journalism,
architectural journalism etc. Like others architectural journalism
includes objective journalism and advocacy journalism.
What is Architectural journalism?

It is a document that encompasses research and involvement of the latest
construction technique, the building materials, coverage of architectural
seminars, conferences, features, forms, analysis of building structure, urban
design, sustainable development, restoration and much more.
Architectural journalism does not only speak about the built environment but
the relation with the welfare of the society. It also broadly deals with the
concerns of architectural education, professionalism and its ethics.
THE IMPORTANCE OF JOURNALISM IN ARCHITECTURE
Writing to express oneself to the public about various issues in architecture

and urbanism. Architectural criticism acts as abridge between people and the
built environment by preserving cultural values and welcoming future
technologies.
The public at large needs to be educated about the negative effects of

urbanization on the built environment, the ecology and the urban setting such
as slum & squatter development, inadequate housing ( quality & quantity),
traffic congestion, pollution (water & air), overcrowding in public spaces,
absence of pedestrian pathways etc.
Built environment should be a social expression and must reflect the

philosophy and mindset of its people.
PROBLEMS & ISSUES IN URBANIZATION
•The forces that drive urbanization are the shifting of jobs from agriculture to
industry which are located in the urban areas results in large scale migration
of people from rural to urban areas. However the urban areas have not been
planned in terms of infrastructure, housing, facilities etc to absorb this large
scale migration. This has resulted in increased demand for food, energy, water
and shelter, which in turn has created slums, poor quality housing, lack of
water supply and sanitation facilities and inadequate methods of waste
disposal.
•According to 2001 census, 307 million were living in urban areas, which
amounts to 30% of the total population. This is 5 times more than the 60
million who were living in urban areas in 1947.
•Urbanization affects the environment in 3 major ways: 1. the prevailing
pattern of urbanization is more material and energy intensive, which is not
sustainable, 2. the discharge of effluents causing pollution and the inability to
manage solid waste disposal, 3. the financial, institutional, technological
systems and infrastructure required to manage this pollution are inadequate.
PRINCIPLES OF JOURNALISM
NINE CORE PRINCIPLES

1. Obligation to truth – journalists should convey a fair & reliable account of facts. They
should be transparent about the sources so that the public can make their own assessment.
2. Loyalty to citizen – Journalists should maintain the larger public interest and should be
representative of all sections of the society.
3. Discipline of verification – journalists should rely on consistent methods of testing
information.
4. Independence of spirit and mind – journalists should avoid any tendency towards
arrogance, nihilism, elitism or isolation.
5. Independent monitor of power – journalist can serve as a watch dog over those in power
& position whose actions can affect the citizens.
6. Overriding forum for public criticism and compromise – the media can serve as a forum
for public discussion only if it is informed by facts without prejudice and supposition.
7. Significant and relevant – journalist should find out the information which is of value to
citizens.
8. Comprehensive and proportional news – Keeping news in proportion without leaving
important things.
9. Exercise of personal conscience – Personal sense of ethics and responsibility is the
guiding factor.
GUIDING PRINCIPLES
1. Writing should be as factual and straight as possible, without any leanings.

2. Do not write about the built environment that you have not seen. Don’t
depend on photographs. Visit the site to observe and to study.
3. To project unbiased conclusion about any project, avoid talking to the
architect or urban designer before visiting the site.
4. Don’t be afraid to talk about the architectural experience and the success of
the design parameters.
5. Write about the buildings that connect architecture to the culture of the
society.
6. Be an advocate. Do not waffle. At the end of the article the reader should know
where we stand. The ability to architecturally analyze any project or issue and
take an educated point of view is desirable.
The scope of architectural journalism
The scope of architectural journalism is only visible to those
who wish to see it.
It is widely accepted as a legitimate architectural course, and a

few institutes abroad even offer a Master's degree in the subject.
While the scope in other countries is definitely large as compared
to India, times are changing -- the Internet now reaches out all
across the world, and using it as a medium, anyone can pursue
writing for architectural publications or websites.
The number of architectural journals being published in India is

also on the rise. And why look only to journals? Full-fledged
writers can focus on regular architectural features in regional and
national newspapers, while amateurs can document the
limitations, difficulties and validity of a career in the field.
Architectural
Photography
• Architectural photography - is all about
capturing the interiors and exteriors of
buildings to show them at their best to the
viewer. Technically, buildings can be very
demanding to photograph, but the key in
solving this and attaining good images is
understanding image distortion and finding
the best time to capture the building at its
most glamorous moment.
It is not just camera techniques but there are
other features that make the image visually
more exciting
- Point of view
- Artistic composition within the picture frame
- Light
Architectural photography is not
photographing a lifeless inanimate
structure but a portrait of the exterior
and interior of the building, more
like the creation of a memorable
portrait of a person
Point of view
Worm’s eye view
30/60 view
45/45 view
One point perspective at eye level
One point at aerial level
One point street scene
What are the ingredients that
distinguish a professional
architectural photograph from a
picture of a building?
Composition?
Exposure?
Sharpness?
All of the above and one another
vital characteristic is that all
vertical lines are truly vertical.
Lofty pursuits
planning
1. Study the site and its surroundings
a. Roads
b. Access
c. Impediments
d. Shade and shadow
planning
2. Establish a “POINT OF VIEW.”
a. Find open areas for positioning your camera.

b. Determine which facades you wish to record.
c. Determine if there are building details worth
recording.
(Remember, “God is in the details” – Ludwig
Mies van der Rohe.)
planning
3. Set your time so that you can create “ A Tale
Well Told.”
a. Check the traffic patterns to avoid peak hours.

b. Walk the building with an empty camera, to
establish the precise positions that favor the
building
Never on sundays
Foreground and background
lighting

PPE Notes

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PPE Notes

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PPE Notes

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE AND ETHICS

[UNIT I - INTRODUCTION TO ARCHITECTURAL

 IMPORTANCE OF ARCHITECTURAL PROFESSION ------------------------ 03

 ROLE OF ARCHITECTS IN SOCIETY -------------------------------------------- 03

 REGISTRATION OF ARCHITECTS ----------------------------------------------- 04

 ARCHITECT’S OFFICE AND ITS MANAGEMENT- LOCATION,

ORGANISATIONAL STRUCTURE ------------------------------------------------ 08

 INFRASTRUCTURE REQUIREMENTS, SKILLS REQUIRED,

ELEMENTARY ACCOUNTS -------------------------------------------------------- 08

 TAX LIABILITIES --------------------------------------------------------------------- 20

 ROLE OF INDIAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS ---------------------------- 22

 ARCHITECTS ACT 1972 (INTENT, OBJECTIVE, PROVISIONS WITH

REGARD TO ARCHITECTURAL PRACTICE) ---------------------------------- 23

 COUNCIL OF ARCHITECTURE (ROLE AND FUNCTIONS) ---------------- 39

 IMPORTANCE OF ETHICS IN PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE ---------------- 40

 CODE OF CONDUCT FOR ARCHITECTS, PUNITIVE ACTION FOR

PROFESSIONAL MISCONDUCT OF AN ARCHITECT -----------------------40

SOURCE:http s://creativemin d snitc.files.word p ress.com/201 2/04/role - o f-

FIGURE 1.1 - WHO IS AN ARCHITECT?

SOURCE:http s://creativemin d snitc.files.word p ress.com/201 2/04/role - o f-

 Profession is the mastery of specific activities demanding prolonged period of study

IMPORTANCE OF ARCHITECTURAL PROFESSION

 A professional architect is required to satisfy the below mentioned characteristics:

ROLE OF ARCHITECT IN SOCIETY

SOURCE:http s://creativemin d snitc.files.word p ress.com/201 2/04/role - o f-

The Council of Architecture maintains a register of Architects under section 23 of The

ARCHITECTURAL PRACTICE/ ARCHITECS OFFICE

A variation from the above mentioned classification is “Consultant” concept.

SOURCE:http s://creativemin d snitc.files.word p ress.com/201 2/04/role - o f-

AFTER GETTING WORK / - PREPARE SKETCHES

FIGURE 1.2 - SMALL OFFICE

SLIGHTLY OLDER PRACTICE

FIGURE 1.3 – SLIGHTLY OLDER OFFICE

SOURCE:http s://creativemin d snitc.files.word p ress.com/201 2/04/role - o f-

FIGURE 1.4 – MEDIUM PRACTICE

ARCHITECTS: 10-15 NUMBERS

FIGURE 1.5 - BIG PRACTICE

SOURCE:http s://creativemin d snitc.files.word p ress.com/201 2/04/role - o f-

a. Improve upon existing information system

MANAGEMENT AND ARCHITECTS

SOURCE:http s://creativemin d snitc.files.word p ress.com/201 2/04/role - o f-

LOCATION, ORGANISATIONAL STRUCTURE, INFRASTRUCTURE

Types of Architectural Organization

 Single Proprietorship Firm

Single Proprietorship Firm

 The easiest and simplest mode of architectural consultancy firm.

SOURCE:http s://creativemin d snitc.files.word p ress.com/201 2/04/role - o f-

 Generally there will be two partners or more number of partners.

SOURCE:http s://creativemin d snitc.files.word p ress.com/201 2/04/role - o f-

Large scale consulting company

SOURCE:http s://creativemin d snitc.files.word p ress.com/201 2/04/role - o f-

Very large offices

 Have corporate status in organisation.

 Not a type of organisation, but very relevant and appealing to Architects/designers.

SOURCE:http s://creativemin d snitc.files.word p ress.com/201 2/04/role - o f-

 Remains as a highly controversial and a hot-debated issue in architectural profession.

SOURCE:http s://creativemin d snitc.files.word p ress.com/201 2/04/role - o f-

LAYOUT OF ARCHITECT’S OFFICE

SOURCE:http s://creativemin d snitc.files.word p ress.com/201 2/04/role - o f-